IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 % 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 U£ 1^ 122 
 
 IL25 i 1.4 
 
 6" 
 
 1.6 
 
 y] 
 
 c 
 
 71 
 
 ^P). 
 
 v<^v/ 
 
 
 
 /A 
 
 h y^T^"^ *" »*»*'-*■*-% I 
 
 nu 
 
 riii 
 
 Corporation 
 
 UmgicipiiiC 
 
 Sciences 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 S^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^<b 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 \ 
 
 4S 
 
 >' 
 

 IHM/ICMH 
 Microfiche 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microraproductions historiquas 
 
 
 s 
 
Technicel and Bibliographic Notas/Nota* tachniquas at biblioqraphiquas 
 
 The Instituta has attemptad to obtain tha bast 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliograohinally unique, 
 which may altar ar.y of the imeges in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 □ Coloured cowers/ 
 Cb;iverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endommagte 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurAe at/ou pelliculAe 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 □ Coloured maps/ 
 Cartas gAographiques en couleur 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planches et/ou illjstrtitions an couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relii avec d'auires documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La re liure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion !• long de la marge intiriaure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within tha text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutiea 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texta, 
 mais, lorsque cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas iti filmtes. 
 
 Additional comme;its:/ 
 Commentairas supplAmantaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Lns details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-itre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographiquc, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mAthoda normals da filmage 
 sent indiquta ci-dessous. 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 v/ 
 
 n 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endom magmas 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restaurAes et/ou pelliculees 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxe< 
 Pages dicolor^es, tachet^es ou piqu^es 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages ditachees 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prin 
 
 Quality inigale de {'impression 
 
 I — I Pages damaged/ 
 
 I n Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 |~~~| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 I I Showthrough/ 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprsnd du material supplementaire 
 
 r~~| Only edition available/ 
 
 Seule Mition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, ate. have been ref limed to 
 ensure the best possible Image/ 
 Lee peges totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuiilet d'errata. une pelure, 
 etc.. cnt iti film^s i nouveau de facon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This Item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce docun'rent est filmd au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 18X 
 
 22X 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 30X 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 ! 
 1 1 
 
 
 i •*' 
 
 
 \ i \ i \ 1 
 
 
 
 1 i i 
 
 
 
 1 L,„. 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
..;-,*^..v- 
 
 l-i 
 
 The copy fii'med h«r« has b««n reproduced thanks 
 to the generMlty of: 
 
 Tha Nova Sootia 
 
 Lagitiativa Library 
 
 L'exemplaire filrnA fu; reprodult grice i la 
 g4n4ros!tt de: 
 
 Tha Nova Scotia 
 
 Lagialstiva Library 
 
 The images appe.^ring here are the bert quality 
 possible considering the condition and ieoiblllty 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Les Images suivantea ont itt reproduites avec ie 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at 
 de la nettetA de l'exemplaire filmi, et en 
 conformity avec lea conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or Illustrated Impres- 
 sion, C7 the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impressioi. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est Imprimte sont filmis en commen^ant 
 par Se premier plat et en termlnant solt par la 
 derni4re page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustratlon, solt par Ie second 
 plat, salon Ie cas. Tous las autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmte en commen9ant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte urte empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'lllustration at en termlnant par 
 la dernMre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol —^ (meaning "CON- 
 TIISiUEO"), or thu »ymbo( V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la 
 dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie 
 cr»: Ie symbols -<»> signifle "A SUIVRE", Ie 
 symbols y signifle "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure i^re filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent ttre 
 filmte A des taux da rMuction dIffArents. 
 Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour Atro 
 reproduit en un seul clich*. 11 est film* A partir 
 de I'angle supArieur gauche, de gauche i droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant Ie nombre 
 d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammea suivants 
 illustrvnt la mAttiode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 4 5 6 
 
■^^:V. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
Main & (Itt/s €buj»tumal Stwe. 
 
 .j NEW ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 IN THREE PARTS: 
 
 ETYMOLOGY, SYNTAX, & ANALYSIS. 
 
 BY 
 
 WILLIAM SWINTON, A.M. 
 
 RKVIIKB BT 
 
 J. B. CALKIN, M. A., 
 
 PRINCIPAL OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL. TRURO, V. S. 
 
 TORONTO : 
 
 ADAM MILLER & CO. 
 1878. 
 
r\5> 
 
 -i^-'S- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 <i^'^'' 
 
 Printed and StereotypBd by 
 
 TU Olobe PrinHna Company. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 This work, which is in the main a revision of 
 Swinton'e "Progressive Grammar," consists of three 
 parts : I. Etymology, II. Syntax, III. Analysis and 
 Construction. 
 
 A characteristic feature of the book consists in a 
 gradual unfolding of principles through an analysis of 
 language. The learner is taught to look at words in 
 connection with their use in the sentence. 
 
 Under Etymology the various kinds of words, or 
 Parts of Speech, are first defined ; then the sub-classifi- 
 cation of each class is presented; and finally the 
 inflection is exhibited. The learner thus gains a clearer 
 view of the relation of grammar to language than on 
 the plan of following up a single class, as the noun, 
 through its various sub-classes and inflections before the 
 other classes are presented. At each stage practical 
 exercises are given, which, if faithfully performed, will 
 fix thoroughly what has been learned, and at the same 
 time will train by regular gradations in systematic 
 parsing. 
 
f ■ "^ . -'. ' c - -*- _&!. - - - 
 
 IT. 
 
 it??. 
 
 ^ 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 w 
 
 Part 11. aims to be practical. The systematic 
 parsing required under each rule will tend to give clear 
 views of the relationship of words, and, together with 
 the special rules, illustrations, explanatory notes, and 
 exercises, will aid the learner in an intelligent examina- 
 tion, and in the correct use of, the English language. 
 
 The exercises in Sentence BuUding, or Construe 
 tion, is an important feature in Part III. These ex- 
 ercises will not only ground the pupil more thoroughly 
 in the principles of Analysis, but will form an excellent 
 introduction to Composition. 
 
 'rtie Publishers would introduce this edition of 
 Swinton's Popular Grammar to the teachers and educa- 
 tionists of the Dominion of Canada, believing that the 
 changes introduced by the Editor wiU render the work 
 better suited to the wants of our schools. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 Introduction 
 
 PAoe 
 9 
 
 U 
 15 
 13 
 
 Part I.— ETYMOLOGY. 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 'LAS8IFICATI0X 
 
 The Noun 
 
 The Pronoun 
 
 The Adjective.. t^ 
 
 The Verb ..' ".'.'!'.".. "".V,..". i? 
 
 The Adverb •••• 
 
 The Preposition ig 
 
 The Conjunction 19 
 
 The Interjection ig 
 
 Review lo 
 
 CHAPPER II. 
 
 5rB-CLAS.SIFICATI0N OA 
 
 The Noun .'.".'.".'.'.".■■.■.■■■■.;.■.■.■. 20 
 
 The Pronoun ......'. 22 
 
 The Adjective or 
 
 The Verb *5 
 
 The Adverb ..■.■..■..■.■.■.■..■..■ gO 
 
 The Preposition . . ' 39 
 
 The Conjunction [ 35 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 [iNFLKCXrON 
 
 The Noun ■.■.■.': •• J° 
 
 N.nber :..■. ^^ 
 
 Gender % 
 
 Case '.'".".!.'.'.".'.'.'.' ^7 
 
 Person *i 
 
 The Pronoun....;::;:::.;.;. JJ 
 
 Inflections of Personal Pronouns 50 
 
 Ti, 'aj- 1- Relative Pronouns .:v:';;;;';:; 52 
 
 Ihe Adjective 7^ 
 
 Comparison ^2 
 
¥-Jf' 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Th* Adverb ''A«« 
 
 Comparison.. W 
 
 Thfc Verb 6« 
 
 ^7 
 
 S8 
 
 59 
 
 68 
 
 Voice... 
 
 Mood.... 
 
 Tense '^".['.'.'.'.'. 
 
 Formation of Tenses 
 
 •Jse of the Tenses ^^ 
 
 •Number and pPrson ^' 
 
 Auxiliary Verb.s ''O 
 
 Conjugation... 72 
 
 Principal Parts of theVerb.'. I* 
 
 1 he Regular Verb J* 
 
 The Irrej^lar Verb "* 
 
 Conjugation of To Love l^ 
 
 " ToBp .. I? 
 
 " " To Write.:.. |J 
 
 List of Irregular Verbs \\ 
 
 Defective Verl)3 °^ 
 
 Various Forms of the' Verb .■.::. JJ 
 
 TaJbular Review.. ^2 
 
 Order of Parsing ^8 
 
 Various iJses of a Word. ,5^ 
 
 Model of Parsinjr ^02 
 
 * 104 
 
 Part II.— SYNTAX 
 Syntax of the Noun 
 
 Subject of a Verb".".'.!."..'.". 
 
 Predicate Nominative 
 
 Object of Transitive Verb 
 
 Noun with a Preposition. 
 
 1 he Possessive Case . 
 
 Noun in Apposition !.... 
 
 Case Independent .... 
 
 Nominative Absolute 
 
 Syntax of the Verb.. 
 
 Agreement with the" "Subject '.'.,' 
 
 The Subject, a Collective Noun 
 
 Singular Nouns United by ajwZ 
 
 " " " .n— 
 
 Affirmative and Negative Su'bj'ectT 
 
 A^Smgular and a plural Nominative with" the" Verb 
 
 a^^^ ^ iipsis ot an Auxiliary... 
 
 Syntax of thb Pronoun .. 
 
 A Pronoun and its Noun,,,.. 
 
 107 
 
 108 
 
 111 
 
 112 
 
 114 
 
 115 
 
 118 
 
 119 
 
 120 
 
 120 
 
 120 
 
 122 
 
 123 
 
 124 
 
 124 
 
 125 
 126 
 127 
 128 
 129 
 
C0NTBNT6. 7 
 
 tJi© ot PenotuU Pronouns '^i 
 
 The Pronoun /r {S 
 
 Each. Other, ±c ;..;.;. JJJ 
 
 Politeness in Pronouna.. . le' 
 
 The ReUtire and ita Antecedent " V . ■■"".■ lo^ 
 
 W:io, Which, and That .. . \%l 
 
 ^», a Relative \^l 
 
 Ellipsis of the Relative..."'. JJJ 
 
 General Caution {*X 
 
 Sy.VTAX OF THE AdJECTIVB .".".....".'.". ij? 
 
 Comparative and Superlative ifi 
 
 Special Adjectives \*i 
 
 The Articles J*3 
 
 SVNTAX OF THE ADVERB . JJJ 
 
 Practical Syntax of the Adverb i ll 
 
 Only ... *•* 
 
 Not Only, Alone .■.::.■.■..■.■;;.■ }" 
 
 Some rcisused Adverbs . l?f 
 
 Double Negatives ,?J 
 
 Distribution of Adverbs '.'.7. j« 
 
 SvN TAX OF Prepositions JJJ 
 
 Position of Prepositions . JJI 
 
 Between and Among fJJ 
 
 Rhetoric of Prepositions J5J 
 
 Appropriate Prepositions. !^ 
 
 bvNTAX OF THE Conjunction {JV 
 
 Practical Syntax of the Couiunction:; {A 
 
 And, orOr ' -^?? 
 
 Or,— its double use tH 
 
 Not-Orand Not— Nor..V: {J? 
 
 so-ibat ;;. Ill 
 
 Doubt-But, or That {SJ 
 
 As— as; So— As \^l 
 
 And-And; To-Nor .■;.". }JJ 
 
 Neither-Nor ; Either_Or ; WhetheV-6r 188 
 
 Now ^zz 
 
 Connection of Terms '.""." '."'.i '. }gj 
 
 Ellipsis of Conjunctions '". JSJ 
 
 The Rhetoric of Conjunctions... ita 
 
 Syntax OF THE Infinitive ■.■.■;;■] Ji" 
 
 "_ ". I'articiples and Gerunds.! 17« 
 
 Errors in the use of Participles 171 
 
 ^SYNTAX OF Moods and Tenses . \it 
 
 The Use of Tenses {JJ 
 
 Present Infinitive fi? 
 
 Perfect Infinitive .■■.■ ,;* 
 
 Harmony of Tenses . . JIJ 
 
8 
 
 
 f^' 
 
 til 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 l^llinsis of V,rU I'Aor. 
 
 'NnalJ and Will 180 
 
 Erronj in Verba 181 
 
 1^1 
 
 ^ART ril.__ANALYSLS AND (JONSTRUCTION. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 D««NnriON8 AND Pr.kciple.s... 
 
 The Sentence and its Elements '* 
 
 ClaM..H of Sentences '»» 
 
 Adjunct* of the Suhiect ^^^ 
 
 ,, " . " Predicat..-; 200 
 
 Expansion.... '202 
 
 205 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 The Order oFa sTnTence .". 
 
 Th« Simple Sentence. 
 
 20« 
 
 207 
 
 I CHAPTER III. 
 
 The Complex Sentence. 
 
 Connectives 215 
 
 Directions for Analysis ^Id 
 
 Sentence Buildiuc 218 
 
 * 224 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 The Compound Sentencf 
 
 Co-Ordinate Connectives ^27 
 
 Contraction and Expansion'. '. ■,;.... ■.■;;; ^27 
 
 
 li-x;. 
 
sstmttm^Mi^ 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 CHAPTER I- INTRODUCTION. 
 
 1. When we wish to express our thoughts we talk, 
 or we write down certain marks or signs which peo- 
 ple have agreed shall stand for the sounds which we 
 utter when we talk. That which we speak with our 
 voice, or which we write to lepreaent what we speak, 
 is called /anyuage. There are many different lan- 
 guages in the world, as German, French, and Spanish. 
 Ours is called the £nr/lish Lawjuagc. 
 
 2. Language is made up of words. Tho^e are over 
 1 00,000 words in the English language. A collection 
 of words arranged so as to convey complete sense is 
 called a senteui-e ; as — 
 
 Tht cat ca-jjht a mouse, 
 
 3. The ciiiidren who use this book know a good 
 deal of the English language. They gained their 
 first kncv-ledge of it by hearing it spoken bv others , 
 they have been speaking this language ever since they 
 learned to talk ; and they have now a large stock of 
 words, and they know how to put these words to- 
 gether into sentences. 
 
 4. Uneducated persons often make mistakes in 
 speaking and writing. They use such expressions as 
 
10 
 
 -?^^' 
 ^^?^=, 
 
 mf 
 
 ■N0LI8H GRAMMAR. 
 
 " ^ «?'>«« it," " T ;i«„, often u,^ there " M.r^ a 
 
 me was there " " FTo < u t , ' °^^^ *"*' 
 
 w» cnere, Ke told John and / " '* To„o * j 
 
 ought to learn her lessons." ' ^® ^ 
 
 An odncftted person wonld say 
 
 <* T 
 
 "! have done it," "^ri,jr:ir' "\'''' '*■" "■ 
 
 ought to learn her les,™,." ' "''"«' 
 
 ui grammars examine carpfnllTr ix. i 
 of the Wrned, and <■,„„, ^7""^"'^ *■»•» language 
 
 what i, cZw ■ ■ ''"'' I"'"""P''^ «<» '"ie^ fo.m 
 
 e. We see, :hei,. that there are two wa™ b, 
 -i..ch one can learn tie correct nse of UnZ« -^ 
 
 8. On examining the words i„ the EnrfiA I 
 
 gZ; :; r ''"' -' -■> '"-^^ 'i- a'H ^o'a : 
 
 groups or classes, according f,^ * u • 
 
li?TR0DUCTI01f. 
 
 n 
 
 The mt mvgTit a monm arid hrovi^hi it to her kitten, 
 the words cat, monse, and Mften can l>e placed in 
 the same class, because they are ,Ii na^ne words; so, 
 also, caught and hronyht are used to make statement^, 
 and belong to another .-lass. 
 
 9. If you wish to si)e.«k of the moving of the water 
 in the river, you may say : The river flmos. i^^xt 
 suppose you wish to denote more than one river, you 
 then chanjre the form of the word to rivers, ,ind' you 
 will have, ry rivers, flows. This, however^ wi\\ not 
 do ; it is not according to the rules of grammar, or 
 the way in which educated people speak. You must 
 say, The rivers flow. 
 
 Suppose you wish to state, not that tha river is now . 
 flowing, hut that it did so yesterday, you add ed to 
 flow, and say, The river flow id. 
 
 Again, notice the changes in the word nail. We 
 say, Pnnce Edward Island is a small Province ; it w 
 tmaller than Manitoba ; it ii the srt .diest oj the seven 
 Provinces. 
 
 10. Look at the two sentences : 
 
 He was bitten on the leg hy a dog. 
 A djg hit him on (he leg. 
 
 The words was bitten and bit are different forms of 
 the verb hite. So, also, the word him, in the cwond 
 sentence, is a change of the form of the word he in 
 the first sentence. Why does it take this form? 
 Because the verb bit must be followed by the form 
 f »w?» ,• ; L gotoiTiS tae w orU in this fbrio. 
 
12 
 
 BN0L18H GRAMMAR. 
 
 11- Observe this sentence :— 
 
 fVanted a younu r^^an to take care of horus of 
 
 man. i lie anangemcnt is wrong. 
 
 *:J^«Jl-!7' 'f ™' ^'S™'""'- ha. .0 do with the 
 
 "■i/ere/t« A;</<f/^ of words ««/■«/ .7^ 
 
 y- . . * ""^ us, as tar, caught ; with thp ^Z/' 
 
 ^■cn«y.™.,of thesame wor.l to /e„„te a chltetf 
 idfta, us nwr rivers- «.-;♦ 1. +i / ^"aiige oi 
 
 1 „ 1, J , '•"l'"-" "''o treated of in th;>. 
 
 l^ook under the two divi„,„„,: of grau,„.^, oane^^7 
 
 oj woros in their relation to each other when ,-n>„ 
 toed into a sentence. It include., the ..,^^,,7. 
 gov,rnmm. and the a,-™,,;,.,,,.;,, oi word!. ' 
 
 16. If we examine a sentence as Th^ ,/ / / 
 we .Lall Und tLat it con..u of two";!.! ^ '"^*'' 
 
^J 
 
 
 :^AXff.v*i 
 
 IXTRODUCTIOy. 
 
 13 
 
 1. That part which represents, the thing of which 
 we make a statement, as the dog. 
 
 2. Ttiat part which nakes the statement, as 
 barks. 
 
 The words, the sweet-,ct,ded mayfiowpr, do not form 
 a sentence, because they do not express a complete 
 thought ; and for the same reason, the words, bloom 
 m spring, do not form a sentence. But by placing 
 these two parts together : 
 
 The sweet-scented niaufiower blooms in spring 
 we express a complete thought, and the assemblage 
 of words used forma a sentence. 
 
 17. Every Sentence consists of two parts :— 
 
 1. The subject, or that part which represents the 
 thing about which a statement is made. 
 
 2. The predicate, or that part which makes a 
 statement. 
 
 18. Sometimes several words aro used in connection 
 with the subject and the predicate, but tlSe Teener 
 ally some one term that denotes the thine of whicli w.' 
 
 inus m the sentence above, mayflower is the suhiPnt a^A 
 
 ill and th.^rV • ''"^^ *^^ *^'"g *^^ ^'^i'^h we are speak 
 m^erySrpr^etcrE^^^ "^^' *^ "'"^^ ^^^ "-'- 
 
 19. The particular term that forms the subject of -.. 
 sentence is always a name-word, or, as it is called a 
 noun, or some word having the force of a noun ; the 
 particular term that forms the predicate is always a 
 word of that class called verbt. 
 
 Wk 20. The noun and the verb are thA f.^sr^ «y4 
 
 
* INOLISH GRAMMAB. 
 
 Parts Of Speec!.. or classes of words. They make thu 
 framt-work of every sentence. 
 
 21. Tho various «orts of words used with the nub- 
 ,^<.^d.th.he,.ed^^^^^ 
 
 other German tdbe8 8eU,^;[„^?f«^>«' ^'^^ *^« ^»^«°« «^»^ 
 A. D. The hinKua.; that 1? .1 ^^T* *^" ^*^ ^"'*'"-y 
 Anglo-Saxon. It vSs ou J, ?^''° ''-^ *^^« P*'^^'^ » «^»'^'l 
 it is the basis of our speS £|\'- "^ ^"g"^^. 'nit 
 
 three quarters, perhans rof i . ""^ ^^^ '^"^^^ ?*«•* ("^^^^rJy 
 
 Saxon was largo yin^uencel bv th'. F^"'' ^^^^^ge- Anglo^ 
 by the Normans, who conn«P.3 f 1 ?-^ ^f^guage, spoken 
 In the 15tli and 16th ce3S> "^'•*"? '° ^^'"^ ^^^^ ^^^^t^ry. 
 of words from Latin and frTrr n ''T'^"** ,* ^^/^ *^«^* °'^'«ter 
 other sources. Thus we see thaTtlT ^ ^^bse.,ucntly from 
 combination of many t^Ues Cv f L .°**'''^ ,^*°gr«« '« « 
 in the IGthcenturv if ITh ^7 *^e time of Shakspeare. 
 
 English is a row7wuai^'' n "*" ""^^'H '^ P^^^^'^* f«r» 
 
 hun^dred millions of Se It1s°Z ?'^'" ^^ ^ ^^ ^"'^ 
 mm on of Canada of +^^ t?" •. ] i! *^® lan.auago of the Do- 
 Ireland, of Tustr^Ha and W7.« '*=.'' "^ ?^** ^'^**i" '^"d 
 South Africa, in India and dj^t^c' To hU T'^° '!? 
 accurate use of it is one of the fin^J !.f - ^vX!" "^ ^''*'® ^"^^ 
 
 .uch a u.e the study ^fGrliLi^t^Jir^^^^^^^^^ -^ 
 
 PART I. 
 ETYMOLOOY. 
 
 CHAPTER I.-CLASSIFICATION. 
 22. Words are arranged in classes, aocordin-^ to 
 

 CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 16 
 
 AU words used as names, as boy, rose, are put in one class • 
 »U words used with name-words to express some qiioiity of 
 the object named, as ^ood, IcauUfvl, are put in another class ; * 
 all words ubed to asaer', as niJK, blvorno, form a third clase 
 etc. * 
 
 23. Tiiereaioeig'it classes of words, often caUed 
 
 tke fart 3 of iSpHech. 
 
 PARTS OF SPE230H. 
 
 1. llie Noun. 5. The Adverl). 
 
 2. The Pronoun. 6. The PrepoEitlon. 
 
 3. The Adjective. 7. TIio OoAjunction. 
 
 4. The Verb. 8. The interjectisii. 
 
 I- — The Noun. 
 
 24. Nouns are names, vzords , as, John, London, 
 
 hotik, beauty. 
 
 Non,n is derived from the Latin nor,„n a namo. E'erv- 
 thing that wo speak about or think about-person, pl»S 
 object, action, or thou^ht-rausc have a nam\^d 9V^ 
 name IS a ^0U;{, ^ * v»w*gr 
 
 Exercise I. 
 
 Pick out the Nouns. 
 
 1. The snow was deep ou the hills last week. 1 Th« nm 
 ri.v.8 m the mornu g and sots in the evenin^A 3. Wellington 
 defeated Napoleon at Waterloo. 4. Skat/ng on the TcVS 
 
 uio aispositiQu. 6. KnowLdfTo is power, 
 
 11. -The Pronoun. 
 
 u.?K^'/ ?^-^0"a3 stand for Nouns; as, Charles ^^ix% ta Paris 
 With Im mother, auu n, ;ame back without hii, 
 
 SIhI"^ f-""""- ^^'"."'^ '^' P»^noun. is to prevent tS 
 
,<» 
 
 16 
 
 ENOLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 T-,^ -r, *- 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 A. 
 Pick out the Peonouns, rnrf .«y /or u,Aa< i^oun* «Aey 
 
 stand. 
 
 B. 
 
 ^TriVe Pronouns /or the Nouns ;>nWerf tn Italics. 
 1. The master told the two fcrothpia +« *oii ^i 
 
 III.-The Adjective. 
 
 £S«To/:^ t.ss^^„»i ^Wl^ S2^^ 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Ac^ uw< the Adjectives, a,i,/ .,«;ne Me things they 
 
 describe or limit. 
 
 9 Vn^?K'^''i"^*'®^""°"«*"d industrious little creatures 
 2 Good books deserve a careful perusal. 3. They S^^ 
 
 theTtom fi^Th^r^^' '"^- ^^'^'^y ships ;^ere 'lit S 
 me storm. 5. Ihere are seven days in a week « Ti,^ 
 
 long, long, weary days are past. ^ ' *• ^^« 
 
 7. The way was long, the wind was cold. 
 ihe minstrel was inlirm and old. 
 
CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 IV.— The Verb. 
 
 17 
 
 27. Verbs make statements; as, The wild catanu-t 
 
 haps in glory ; The revolution of th^ earth on it! iiwil^ 
 the 8uccessiou of da> and night. " **^ 
 
 A verb is a word by means of which we assert m ,«*^/ 
 <^p0^ngdoes; (2) JVhai is don. to U ; or (3^ ^mfLl'l,^ 
 
 The term rrrfi is derived from the Latin verhtm, a word 
 and this part of speech is so called because it Z the ZrA 
 without which no group of words can make a sentence. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Pick out the Verbs, mid tell their suhjectg. 
 
 My father left me a large estate, the best part of which 
 I 3pent during my youth. But I perceived m? error a^d re 
 fleeted that nches are perishable, and are nnir^tl^ JA 1 
 
 by such ill-managers as^myself. 'I'furthL cTs^deVd Sbv 
 my irregular way of living. I wietchedly miWnt mv ti™/ 
 I remembered the saying1,f the greav Sobmon,^ which^ /S 
 
 liTtitVo^rrV. •' " "' '^''^^' *'** " '^^^^ " "-- *«'- 
 
 Fr!J^V'^^* Shone . trough the open door. 
 
 .trom the round declining sun, 
 
 And fantastic shadows all about 
 
 On the dusty floor were thrown 
 
 As the factory clock tolled the hour of five. 
 
 And the school was almost done. 
 
 v.— The Adverb 
 
 28. Adverbs describe actions and qualities; as, I 
 nave often climbed very steep hills. 
 
 but adverbs are also joined ti> adje'ctives Smother adverbs.' 
 
 thly aff done ^^Tofthr''"' ^^ tt"^'^"8 ^'"'' ^^'"' °^' ^'^^'^ 
 ey are aone. b or this purpose they are joined to verbs. 
 
 i;ec.. J/r"; iittfe'mt^^^^^ ^'^^^ *^^ j^^^^^ ^o -^- 
 
18 
 
 ENOLISFI GRAMMAR 
 
 r«?-VV 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Pick ml the Adverhs, and name the words to which 
 they arejolv f. 
 
 that Really lo.,U ^I'^Z^X C\ Sngtf '^ ^ ^'^ ''^'"'^ 
 
 Softly peacefully, lay her to rest, 
 
 Place the turf lij^htly on her youn^. breast • 
 
 Oontly, so emnly bend o'er the bod 
 
 Where ye have pillowed thus softly her head. 
 
 VI.— The Preposition. 
 
 o/bXien f hf ^'' '^°7 *^' ''^^«°« ^«*^een things, 
 or between things and actions or at* ibutes. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 The ring is m the box. 
 John lo' ked through the keyhole. 
 Jane is fond 0/ music. 
 
 the action Mpr« .,1 bv S? nn J „^ r™ S" '?''"'« '"'J 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Pick out the Prepositions, and name the words which 
 
 they ]oin. 
 
 pleasur? on those iajandr ^^""^ ^^" ^^^^ ^'^^ g^'^^t 
 

 CLASSIFrCATIOX. 19 
 
 VII.— The Conjunction. 
 30. Co^^unctions connect words and sentences : as. 
 
 .11.11.08 a*u/ John are good boys, and they are much esteeineil 
 by their teacher. 
 
 The word conjr.nction, derived from the Latin, ccn, to- 
 ficther, and 7 ««//'», I .join, mevkna joining L-^gHher. Prououiis 
 a. I verbs, and prepositions also serve as connectives. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 Pick out tho Conjunctions, and say what words, or 
 statements, they connect. 
 
 1. Hamilton an.l JefTereon were distinguished statesmen 
 -. (.reene was a courageous oflieer, but Washington was tho 
 greater general of the two. 3. You will succeed if you i)er 
 severe. 4. We reail the newspapers because they give ua 
 the news 5. I have not received tho letter, though X expect 
 it every hour, ° * 
 
 VIII.— The Interjection. 
 01. Interjections express sudden feeling; aa, Alisi 
 
 how changed ! 
 
 The literal meaning of Mcrjedlm (Latin inter and jadA 
 18 a Ihrmvimj hlwren. The Interjection has no grammatical 
 coimection with the other words in the sentence. It cannot 
 form part of a proposition, nor connect two propositions, but 
 IS thrown m to express sudden emotion. 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 Pick out the Interjections. 
 
 I.Alas ! poor Yorick. 2. Hurrah ! the v ,rk is done. .•? 
 I.O, the por Indian! 4. Hush! he sleeps forfever. 5 Ah'f 
 where is he now ? 6. Pshaw I it is nothing' 
 
 REVIEW OP THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 1. Nouns name tJiin<Ts. 
 
 2. PRONOUNS stand for noiu^a. 
 
 3. Adjectives describe things. 
 
 •J. Verbs make statements. 
 

 20 
 
 
 iNOIJSir GRAMMAR. 
 
 l' p°^'"^'' d«««"be actions and qualities. 
 
 6. PREPosirroNs. . .join words and show relations. 
 
 7. CoNVUNCTioNs. .connect words and statements. 
 «. INTERJZCTIONS. .express sudden feeling. 
 
 Exercise p. 
 
 Tell the part of speech to which each word belongs. 
 The study of history improves the mind Th- -J„fi, • x 
 
 Oh f it is excellent 
 
 1 use It like a gaait.—Shakspeare. 
 
 Lo ! here the gentle lark, weary of rest. 
 From his moist cabinet mounts up on high 
 A^d wakes the morning, from whose Swer breast 
 The aun anaeth in his maiestv.-^Aa.fc,piarc 
 
 >i-'' 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Sub-divisions op the Pahts of Speech. 
 
 I. — The Noun. 
 
 32. Nouns are divided into two classes- Common 
 lioum and Proper Nouns. 
 
 A Common Noon is a word that may be used aj. *i„ 
 name Of each individual of a class of U^^s' « ^; 
 nmn, home, city. """eo , as, ooy, 
 
 „Jt,f'T'' ''''™ *' • '"'™ ""« M the name of soma 
 Pa,t,cularper,on, or object ; ^,John.OUaZy:JTa. 
 
SUB-DIVISION OP THB PARTS OP SPEETH. 21 
 
 ^ ProiH,r nouns are written with a c-piial letter at the begin- 
 
 .13. A proper noun become, a common nonn when il n- 
 
 Jrlnl dlL" rmr °°""' "^"^ '"'' '" '^ »" - 
 
 34. In like manner, a common noun, becomes a nroner 
 noun when .t is used to represent an indiklu^d S. ect ^Sl 
 park 19 a commonnoun, but The Park is a proper noun. 
 
 Common Nouns are sometimes further subdivided into yfA- 
 stract norxnn, Participial nouns, and CoUective nouns. An aI 
 sfract noun is the name of a quality, considered apart from 
 he object to which it be]ongs,'a8, I-hitenessXnesT A Co? 
 ZT ",?":••' * "*'"'* ^^»«h' '" the singular nSr standa 
 for a collection or number of *4iing, ; ^., flock, Jlea^'^ZS 
 
 Exercise la 
 
 Assign eac/i Noun to its Class, a/uf Sub-Class. 
 
 MoDEU-The Cotter's Saturday Night, composed by 
 Robert Burns, is a charming poem. 
 
 Coder's Saturday Nighi is a uoun, because it is a name , 
 
 proper, because it is a special name. ' 
 
 RiMrt Bxrns -^^ n^un, because it is a name ; 
 
 proper, because it is a special name. 
 
 Poem • , 
 
 ' 18 a noun, because it is a name ; 
 
 common, becau, a it is the name of all the in-' 
 
 dividuals of a class. 
 
 ^* ^"^^Fourt? "''* ^^^'^ ^"^'^ *''*'*^^'" ^'°^ ** ^^'"'"^ ^''« 
 2. Hope is as strong an incentive to action as fear. 
 8. bavid and Jonathan loved each other tenderly. 
 
22 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 l-Ji^- 
 
 6. Men ^un.1 women usea to make pilgrimages to Canter- 
 
 6. Chaucer wrote the Canterbury Tales. 
 
 7. The Channel is noted for its rou-h weiither. 
 
 8. 31iIton is the Homer of English literature. 
 
 0. Thou hast all seasons for thine own, O Death, 
 
 Exercise ii. 
 Give a Common Noun/.,, eachgronp o/Proper Nouns. 
 
 ' mfi'^^T' ^^."*""' *'"' H"morwere;>oc/». 
 Ottawa, Toronto Montreal. Halifax are--- 
 
 Ontario Mumtoha, au.l New Brunswick are-^ 
 
 Ihe Mackenzie, the St. Law.enco. and the St. John arc . 
 
 II.— The Pronoun. 
 
 35. Pronouns are divided into two clussos. 
 
 I. Personal. 2. Relat:<re. 
 
 Personal i^ronouns. 
 
 3G. The Personal Proumms are : /, thou, /^, she 
 It; we, you, they. * 
 
 37 /and we denote the person speaking, and are 
 said to be of the First Person. 
 
 38. Thou and you denote the person spoken to, und 
 ai-e said to be of the Second Person. 
 
 Bol^mn'ocSons'"ancS 1^ poTf^^ ' '" '"'" "'" "" """^*'- 
 
 39. He, she, it, and <%, denote the person or the 
 thing spoken of, and are said to be of tlie 7'hirU 
 Person. 
 
SUB DIVISION OF TlIK PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 23 
 
 Tlierr IS ail import .i.t (lilferctice Ih-tweeii tlio porscial 
 I>r..n.)iuiM of tlie «irst and of the «ecoii,l poruon ami the- per- 
 Hoiial pronoun of tlio tl ircl porBon. lie, nhe, an.l it, come 
 lully up t.) the (JeHnition of tha pronoun that is they 
 tUm\ for Nnnm. I, we, and you arc used to express the 
 personality ol the 8|>eaker and of the person siwken to. The 
 radical difference iKtwocn tlie pronouns of the Hrst and of 
 the second person, and the pronoun of the third person has 
 led some ruodem g'-anitnarians to conHne the name Persomd 
 I nniouna to the former, and to class he, nhe, it, with Demon- 
 Ktiatives ; but the old nomenclature does not lead to any 
 mistakes of practice, aud hence it has not been chanced in 
 this text-boolw. ** 
 
 40. Pome grammarians classify certain words as Adjective 
 J ronouns which they still further sub-divide -nto Demomtra- 
 tirf, ladrfnUe, Distributive, dec. It is better to regard tb-se 
 words as adjectives, limiting nouns understood ; t. a.—- Some 
 (i.e. some seed) fell by the way side.' 
 
 The following are the principal words of this sort :— 
 
 All, any, another, both, each, either, few, fonnrr, after, 
 many, much, no7ie, neither, one, other, sohie, that, this. 
 
 \. 
 
 Eelative Pronouns. 
 
 41- A Kelative Pronoun is a pronouu that bo*;h 
 represents a preceding noun or pronoun, and con- 
 nects with it a dependent proposition. The word 
 that thv. Eelative Pronoun represents or to which it 
 relates, is called the Antecedent. 
 
 Illlstuation. 
 
 The mountahi which I climhed is very high. 
 
 In this sentence which is the Relative and vw-.in' 
 tain is the Antecedent. 
 
 42. Relative Tronouns perform the office of connectives 
 jniuuig two sentences into one Thus, the sentence iriven 
 above is equal to the two sentenoes :- - 
 
 The mountain is very hljh. I dinihed it. 
 
2\ 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 43. The Rolatlve I'.onouns are : u/hk irhhh that 
 
 44. mo relates to persons ; ,,•/././, to the lower ani- 
 mals and to lifeless things ; //.,,, may. in certain cases, 
 be used m place of u-/>o or ir/aW,. 
 
 4r>. The inono.ni tohaf i.s eqi.ivalont to f/nU winch 
 or (lu: thuuj n-hirh ; us, ' L have found what I wanted ' 
 IS cHjual to ' I have found thr. thing which I wanted.'' 
 
 What 13 the neuter of ?r/,Yi T+ iu rtt-., i 
 
 tive ; as, I know .kat bo^k L wluil "'"^ "' "° "'j^'^' 
 
 46. Compound Relatives are forn.ed by addin<. 
 n.r an.i .ocver to who, which, and ../.a^- as, whoeve,- 
 whosoever. ' 
 
 47. The word a. has the force of a rehative when its 
 an((.cedent i.s qu.Iiiied by the adjective s>wh : a.s, 
 
 We .lie mch stuff as aieain.'i are made of. 
 
 48. Bat is sometimes equal to a relative an.l a 
 negative, and its antecedoit is always a ne..ttive ; as, 
 
 There is «o fireside, howsoe'er dcfende.!, 
 l^u. has [-- thai has not] oue vacant cliair. 
 
 ^ 49. The Pronoun, ivho, which, and what, when used 
 '" Hsking a question, are called Intcrromtlve Pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 For xrU to ,1„„,1. forgotfulness a pr.v. 
 
 ilns plea.nig, anxious l.eing eer resigned ? 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 Assign each Phonoun to Us proper Class. 
 
 p.L?:^;:fn:is:^;.s:nr:;;d:i:i'rt^ -^"^ 
 
 ■'•'c<, .uKi entered tliat of tlie xrcneral. 
 
sun DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEEfir. 25 
 
 It i« an ill win.l tliat Mows n..1)ody good. What did the 
 l.nsoncr.say .' lell me what .he prisoner said. The Kiucr wo 
 IS the hea. of the htat. ,nay witlihold his consent from a 
 measuie wliicJi ha.s passed both lioitses of Parliameut. 
 
 What in me is dark, 
 Ilhnnine ; what is low, raise and sujjport.— J//7/on. 
 
 I have sen him buy such bargains as would amaze one - 
 
 Who was tlie thane, lives yet.—Shaksprare. 
 
 Whenever Antonio met Shylo.rk on the iJialto, he used to 
 niMuach hun with his usuries and lia.d dealings ; which the 
 J.-u wnnld hear XMth seeminy; p.tience, while he secretly 
 nictlitatcd revenge. — Lamb. ^'^-i-V 
 
 III— The Adjective. 
 
 50. Adjectives express either qml/f^ or qnantHy, or 
 tliey point out. Hence we may divide them into tliree 
 
 cliiHscs : — 
 
 I. Qualitative. 2. Limiting. 3. Demons- 
 trative. 
 
 51. Qualitative adjectives denote some quality or 
 attribute, that is, they state of what sort the thing is. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 'A lu,,h mountain, " a /v^/ rose,' 'a 6^'a<«z/aZ landscape." ' The 
 *"'/((■ hoy. *'>"'= 
 
 ^ To this class I)elong participles when us.mI as adjectives • as 
 I lie running, ^^M- also adjectives derived from prope,' 
 names, as, ' hnglish,' 'American.' ^ ^ 
 
 52. Limiting adjectives denote how much or how 
 
 tlUDIIJ. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS, 
 
 ' He has eaten a whuJc apple.' ' Make m noise.' 'Somr men 
 ill o cowards. ' A II men are mortal. ' 
 
 This class includes a or nu, sometimes called the I n<h finite 
 AHiQle ; the numeral.S; nnp, /j/v,. //-?•... a.^ . iv.„ .^.,-a- ,n 
 
viua 
 
 rXGLISII OHAMMAn. 
 rrvff, some, half, mnmi f,,r '7", 7 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 airily referred to, or to be ';elmea''fj°~' »""■"•''"" "I'H" 
 
 mtl, Article, The oS amlTh/HT ™T"»'i' »°l'I''i«'l 
 ilcfinitc article • the T •,*!„ i Hebrew have oiilv the 
 
 iave both artiSes Vho rame T,; / ^f™!","' ""'' -Vni.h, 
 .jNut. It „.ems merWy to ev'ls h .t'/h'''"^ ""=°"f/ ='"»» 
 
 '"■•ir, «« hour, an urn. ' ' '' "" '"''' "^ 
 
 v«w.»..ut.tbr«r,iLt^';r;ta,-L:s--'- 
 
S'JB 1>1VI8I0N OP THE PAllTS OF SI-EECII. 
 
 27 
 
 tlif sc'coinl ;i Vdvvrl s'linu?. i ami //. 1 ''^inninc words aio 
 • •-tns'iiiants, and Wvird.s (•oiiimciiciiiLC witii Jiose Icttt-n;, or the 
 sui'iiils (.f tlu'sc letters, take a. Words bc-'ni.iiif? with the 
 .SDiiuded ,7 t.J;e a ; as a history ; those be^'iniiiiig with h aileut 
 take ((/( ; as. an honor. 
 
 {h) The )i ill nn is a part of the root (as in Latin "-?«, Frcncli 
 [ 1/n.) Hence it is not a that tiecomes ati hefo' i> ,- "owel or a 
 silent //, aee< -ding to the eonimon lule, but <;/? . Ii loses its 
 linal letter before a consonant. 
 
 5G, Xute ih(i s'ujniju-atlvn of the fullowinrj adjcc- 
 
 tlvps : — 
 
 This and these point out objects ne.or the speaker. 
 
 That and those indicate objects distant from the 
 
 I s[)caker. 
 
 Wlien two objects are conipared, this represents the 
 latter, that l\..i former. 
 
 Ea^h denotes every iniividual of a class viewed 
 
 \ separately. 
 
 Emli ivlcl arch andpillar lone, 
 
 l'ie:.d- hau^'h+ily f;r j^loiies gone. --T^jrcn. 
 
 Ever^ refero to "cdividuals taken collectively. 
 
 Either m^ans literally whiclicver of the two you 
 lileaso. 
 
 Sometimes either has the s^nse of hoth ; aa, On clUicr side is 
 level fen (/. e., on lulh didcs). 
 
 Neither is either with th^ negative prefix we, not. 
 
 Both means two taken totrether. 
 
 Many may be joined w Ith a «iiig'.ilur noun preceded 
 by (III or a. 
 
 W: 
 
 <l 
 
 1,, ... f 1 ' . 1 . 
 
28 
 
 EXGLISII GRAMMAR. 
 
 No is a contractic^n of no... Not followod hy a c 
 an has the force of no ; as, ^ot a drum was heard. 
 
 Exciwisei3. 
 
 As.^;gn each Adjective to its proper Class 
 
 false glare of military i-lory "ho>^'s nl« "^ "'""'ents. 4. The 
 in the colors of goo/.lted? '"^^^J, '"'^«acre and rapine decked 
 «P m two lines. 6/ J-i sol.lLinL K ''^ ^/'^'""'^ "'*« ^"-^^vn 
 was i.ropared to do it ^ S cuS V%^ k^^^V"^ ^^^"-y "'«« 
 one in buttle, the other at sea "'^^^^^'"^"^.^both his sons, the 
 
 other, and took their la.' fare"«vell" ^o'rT''"^ ^"''^''f^^'l «aeh 
 in the words of the ohl , -an l,.,f Uhi. '*'•'''' J' '""^^'^ ^'«<iom 
 
 ^'othing is xnore ren arUdrt, rth^rr", '^''^ 'J^'^^''^- ■'^• 
 cviuntryin material wealth -ImiJ. he nrel ^i ^''''^'^■'' ^^ ^^'"^ 
 The yoom of that fair face is wa\w t^ v.^'""'""*''^"- "• 
 ^•are 12 I passed some time ^n the' rmf.''Vr-^''*^ ^''^ 
 ^J^^rful structure, and th. ^eS ^i^^l^^J!^ 
 
 ''••^Jityrijrs^^rr^fr^r ^''-^ - «- 
 
 representations th'e s'ource rfe^T hS "^' "'^^ 
 pleasure.— ^,ir/[e. ^ ^^'^ "'gh species of 
 
 ''■ n!Siffe,!S:ilffm^^?l=^^- --«- every 
 Asiatic seent"ry._!^rS4! ^''° transported into 
 
 Ten thousand lleets sweep over thee in vain?-/?^,^.. 
 
 IV.— The Verb. 
 
 57. Some verbs require to be followed by a noun 
 or pronoun, called an object, to con^plete the sense 
 as, Solomon hu/lt the temp/e.' ' 
 
 Oth.r verbs do not admit of suoh object afte^ them 
 but complete the sense nf n.<. i ' 
 
 swim.' themselves; as, 'Fishes 
 
SUB-DIVISION OF THK PARTS OF SPEECH. 29 
 
 Verbs are divided into two classes : — 
 Transitive Verbs. Intransitive Verbs. 
 
 58 A transitive verb states an action that passes 
 Dver to an object. 
 
 A sentence containing a transitive verb if. ..v»t > :)in- 
 plete unless the word which represents the object of 
 the action is expressed. This word muat be a noun 
 ar some word representing a noun. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 James strikes the hnll. 
 John loves hh father. 
 Music pleases me. 
 
 59. An Intransitive Verb is one which denotes a 
 ^taie or condition, or it denotes an action which does 
 lot pass over to an object. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 I am, I sit, I skcj), I i-un, I rrjoicc. 
 
 60. Many verbs are used sometimes as transitive vcbs 
 Sometimes as intransitive verba ; as, 'Heat melts ice'- 'Ice 
 
 Imelts.' 'She reads a book'; 'Sh- reads well.' 'He 'swam 
 Ithe lisk '; ' He swam to the ship.' 
 
 61. Some Intransitive Verbs are followed by an object of 
 leiimlar meaning to themselves ; as, ' I dreamed a sa^di dream. 
 \ He sleeps his last sleep. ' 
 
 62. Some verbs when used intransitively are propcily 
 JspeaKing reflexive, that is, the agent acts upon himself, but 
 Vhe pronoun is not expressed ; as, ' He stretches (himself). 
 I Ho bends (himself) over the grave.' 
 
 I, ^^- Intransitive Verbs that require as Comple.nent a word 
 Ifadjective, noun, or pronoun) relating to their subject, are 
 Isometimea called Copula Verbs. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 He is a man. 
 The rose smells sweet. 
 
i 
 
 I 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 30 
 
 E\(ilj:sll (;i{.\MMArt. 
 
 /'■'I. look, .mdl, (cute '"' "'""' "^'^"■'"•' ^'•'^"' 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 Assirpi each Vkri5 to tU roprr Cla j 
 
 J. I^ves of great men mII remind u... 
 We can make our lives sul.lmie. 
 
 2. CIuH penury repressc.l their n<.l.Ie ra -c 
 An.l froze the genial . nrrent of the .s,?,,!*. 
 
 3. Some murmur when their sky is .'ear. 
 
 4. Sir Chri.stoi>her Wren huilt .St. V-MiVn. 
 
 5. Virtue is its own rcuanl. 
 
 6. He was a m.n take him for all 'n al?. 
 ^^e shall not look upon his like again. 
 
 7. Where heaves the turf in many a mouldering h-ap. 
 
 8. And there upon the ground I sit. 
 ■I smg and sing to them. 
 
 9. The gas burns brightly tliis evening. 
 10. Mohammedans wash three t.mes a day. 
 
 v.— The Adverb. 
 
 65. Adverbs are divided into five classes :-- 
 
 1. Adverbs of Time. 2. A.lverbs of Plac. 3 Ad 
 verbs of Manner. 4. Adverbs of Causo '5 A ■ 
 verbs of Affirmation and Negation 
 
 C'f>- Adverbs of Time express v/m ho,,, nf>r„ ; 
 
 o»j an action is done ; as. nor;, seM..,,l,l'Z, ^ ' ' '""^ 
 
 «7. Adverbs of Place oxpre.^s n-h.-.-r whiH.or 7 
 
 an a. tion proceeds • -^ hn-> / / ' ^vJuthcr, or wJtcncr, 
 
 tjs. Adverbs of Manner express how an action ,-, 7 
 
 or how a -luality is possessed • a« ^-..a' .. - " ''"""' 
 
Si;iM)!\ ISIoN (»F THE PARTS OF SPKIXir. 
 
 31 
 
 ';?>. Adverbs of Cause i'xpres;j xchu a thin- ia done ; as, 
 
 //(' r'h'ir, ii'liij, 
 
 70. Adverbs of Affirmation afTlrm ; a.^, yes, yea, ay. 
 AilvL'il)s of negation deny ; as, no, not, n<ty. 
 
 71. Tlicrc are cert.un arlverbs wliicli, in addition to 
 the ordinary use of adverbs, have also tho fo- 3 of 
 ioiaiMirr^/^oxmn^ the chiuse to wliich they kdong 
 to the rest of the sentence; as, when, while, wher'e, 
 how, ii:hj, wherefore. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION'!!, 
 
 . li^ill I be friglitcd vhni a madman staros 1-Suah<^prarc. 
 
 The world was all before them v:hfrc to cliooso 
 
 TJioir place of rest, and Providence their ynide.—J/j7/o?i. 
 
 72. Connective adverbs, nnliko all other adverb.s, havo 
 no ihdrpendent meaning in themselves. Thus, in tlio 
 expression, * Ho came whiU; the sense is suspended 
 till some other words are supplied, as ' He came while 
 I was spenhiiuj: Hero whila connects 'I was sueak 
 iiig ' with ' he came.' 
 
 NOTES OX Tlin ADVF.IJD. 
 
 NoTR T.— The Cimnective or relative adverbs arc derived 
 mm the same \n-lo-Saxon root as the relative prononns 
 W. ami vindi Hence they may generally be resolved into 
 W. ' u??"w."' •'^"'1 ?■ r^'l^'tive phrase. Thus, ' He arrive! 
 'Ion we left may bo resolve.l into, « He arrived at tht tine 
 LaateccdentJ at ivhich we left ' [relative clause]. 
 
 Note II.— Adverbial phrases arc expressions made up of 
 t«o or „.ore adverl>s connected by conjunctions, or they 
 ■ ec v?'-''""-^ oons..stn,g of a prepos.ttin with a' noun an 
 . 'I e ct.ve, or an adverb. Ekampj.k.s : By and h„, n; 'and 
 
■^^H 
 
 i 
 
 ^^^H 
 
 i 
 
 ^^^9 
 
 f 
 
 ^Hh 
 
 i 
 
 ^^^H 
 
 I 
 
 ^m 
 
 i 
 
 
 ' t 
 
 » 
 
 -m 
 
 1 
 
 32 
 
 ENCilJSM (iHA.MMAR. 
 
 ami .tl.. b=.to'.l,„„l,l ,,e ,,,,r1c,l":;l. .^ll'Xl iSZ.T"' 
 ■JCoU^:-W,'^Z l!-,'^"' ^'^"f. '" •"■""limes callcl a,!. 
 
 down to us from thoiisaiul, nf v ''- '•*""^''' ^•"»^« 
 
 tliem Indej,endTut Zv'"!!! ^ '^'"- '^ i^^'""'«' ^^''^^ 
 
 < 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 Chmify the Adverbs. 
 
 the doubling drum 'i KvVrv ol T-?"'^ ""^" ''^^ '^^a* 
 
 dition 1 1 'p i , '^'"" 1 ^^^ Ji'm in so wretched i pon 
 
 pioaThcs.''- -^^^^^""'-^l-^eo -uthward «. ..a,M« .TnttA^p: 
 
 CVm/^y^ i/ie expressions in iialics into adverbs. 
 
 Model. He did the work with care. He did the 
 work carefully. ^ 
 
 Everything was done «.7A prunencc and .m./om. The bird 
 
 huny. mth s^rrncss and .ac/.e.. we laid him down. ^Lif 
 her up with tenderness. 
 
 VI. Prepositions. 
 
 73. 
 
 Tlie Engli.sh language contains about fifty Pre. 
 POSITIONS. -^ 
 
sun-Divisro'i of the varth of 
 
 si'Kncii. 
 
 33 
 
 It IS not correct to say tli;it PrciMjsltions .si 
 
 ailed ad- 
 le a vtrl) 
 iIjs than 
 
 ISO ol' the 
 » means 
 
 1. COllRS 
 
 iug, call 
 
 as hor- 
 in legal 
 te. 
 
 Night s 
 >f>j she 
 rejects, 
 k Dhu. 
 lie beat 
 thither. 
 i a con- 
 iter ap- 
 
 i tbt 
 
 e bird 
 
 great 
 
 Lift 
 
 •it "/*' //( 
 
 'tin to (tttoth'-r. PrfpoHitiun 
 
 iioii;is to otIi(;r words ; but they 
 
 'W the reliitioii 
 8 jirin nouns and pro- 
 
 t(. n:!irr thi)n,.f, or to adluns or attribuli^. 
 
 c.vprc-iH the relation of th 
 
 1 t Inn I in 
 
 Pee- 
 
 74. The most common relations exnressed bv Pre- 
 positions are phcc, time, mcinn.r, caul: 
 
 7.1. The followinrj ave among tl)( mo.st Mn| „tvnt 
 l'i( jiu.sitions : — 
 
 Of- o,- g,„eni]Iy d,notp.s possession; as, the book o^ tlu- 
 scliolar ; i.e., the *irhn!ars book. 
 
 Of expresses many relations, all cnnnectrd with the 
 ^•.Kinal meaning cf the word, wliich \^ prooxdlnjfrcm. 
 
 nJ V '^^'f/-'^'''^ ^^ ''''■^'" *''« P^^rt of anvthin- to the whole • 
 nK.an;.g:''"'^' "^ " ''''"■ '''''' ""^ ''^ ''^^ ^^^ ^'"'''''>'^ 
 
 r-'.) 0/is used to ronnect an abstrar-t prorertv with the 
 
 of^tn vlirt'ir''^'''" '^' '"'*'' ^^'.""""' '^•'^« "'■^^" the force 
 m an adjectne; as, a croini of gold (a -'olden crownl 
 
 This may be called the adjective m/aning. ° '• 
 
 (o.) Xouns in apposition are sometimes connected by of ■ 
 as, the city of Avistcrdam. ^ ■' ' 
 
 To -The primary idea of ic is motion Uncards; as, he went 
 to the bouse. 
 
 •to^'a„'d?m"^"A^'""^?'*''^ with/..m, as in the phra.. 
 to bo f nnH "i; u"^' ^^'^^ '""''^ '■'^'""t« '-applications oho ar 
 to be found such phrases as ' pleasant to the taste. ' « ^o 
 
 •n.?e 
 e 
 onp'a 
 
' } 
 
 y 
 
 ■f-r' r 
 
 .X^ 
 
 34 
 
 ENOLISn ORAMMAR. 
 
 ^^ --'■ «-A ts i:;.?„::;:«r;e;u';.,ri°! 
 
 ^ytl„ .... they ,re f„ iway="„E:,.,;.'Vrt °VS. 
 
 meaning . tw^ilVS t^drVS .Yutlro? h"^'' 
 ion^Wp .'t "e'tr' iS i™'"" "-at ot company or compan- 
 
 is reJii>if^piLa7;fh! r '' 'r ''■■"^""'.'^y^- -P^i.. 
 
 of.' From u , on cora™ ^ """"•.»" ■" ' "»'* the hope 
 
 opposition (a«. to. iiirJ-r """"«<>' ' with' to .lenote 
 to , lU,, ,,,/, „ person' comes from the fact 
 
 'H must win in n v+..,...„I„ ""''' 
 
 . .rfrlp 
 
 that antagonists must Join in a i,tiu 
 
 t -?n /^ ^"/-^"f ^'^"«^ ^^^'-"^^ is a group of words tlmt, 
 U.en together, have the power of a Preposition; as 
 /'^r the sake of, apart /.om, etc. 
 
 77 The Preposition and the Adverb are closely 
 
 u Id ' 'a.""?' '^ '^' ^^^i^^° Prepositions mav be 
 usedM Adverbs j thus-- '^ 
 
 'i— , 
 
SUBDIVISION or THE FARTS OP SPEECH 
 
 3ff 
 
 Prfpofitiitns. 
 Re fell dotOH stiiira. 
 I have a pain in the heail. 
 He passed throwjh the town. 
 
 He movetl dnirn. 
 f!<i in, and .sec liitn. 
 He pasacd thiouijh. 
 
 78. The Relations expressed by Prepositions me— 
 I. Aifjectioe. u. Advtrbial. 
 
 79. A preposition expresses the Adjective relation 
 wlien it unites its obj(;ct to a noun or to a pronoun ; 
 a.s, a man of taste ; she with the black eyes. 
 
 80. A preposition expresses the Adverbial relation 
 when it unites its olyect to a verb, an adjective, or 
 an adverb ; as, he came in haste. 
 
 Exercise i6. 
 
 Say what Relation eacli Preposition ezpresses. 
 
 Vi ^ »® w-*" y^^^ ^^^ eray coat fell from the top of the 
 wall. 2. Wo rise at ar- i.i o'clock in the winter, and in sum- 
 mer .it six. 3. James \ I. of Scotland was the gre-t-LTand- 
 nephew of Henry VJI. , f England, the first of the Tu.Mrr line. 
 4. 1 here are many proois of the roundness of the earth 5 The 
 lead of the gang listened in silence to the roii.onstrancos of 
 his subordiuates. 6. His head had not been five seconds 
 under wateI^ when he rose to the surface, and swam towards 
 II ^'^ o 1 ■ *'"® rueful countenance answered without 
 
 ac ay. 8 As we walked acroos the bridge, we saw a number 
 ot lish in the pool beneath us. 
 
 VII.— The Conjunction. 
 
 81. Corjunctions are of two great kinds 
 
 I. Co-ordinative Conjunctions. II. Subordinative 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 82. Co-ordini tire Conjunctions join clauses of equal 
 rank or importance ; they also join words which stand 
 in the same relation to some other word in the sen- 
 
 A - 
 
 V'J I 4 \y 1, 
 

 3ft 
 
 *"^GUSH GRAMMAR. 
 
 TJ.r HHow was d..,,. .„/ a,, vii.ul was cold 
 .'ol... aWJauKs brought the wat»;r. 
 83. Somo Co-onli„ative (:o.,jun,-tion.s are used in 
 1-. un<l a.o called Corr.iat;.e (Jonjuuct.ns. ThuH ! 
 
 /•/M.r •• ,r ^f.^'7 J*; 1-' '';• Willie cli.l it. 
 
 ""r . . ...\al/„r the lM.r«e «.r tiic . arria-'o 
 ^; „ wasMjjurcd. "' 
 
 -^ ^^ ^ '""■'", '"^ Inart ble.l. .^.^ he kept 
 
 a oheeilul comitenauce 
 
 c-aL^o'l't-' .'T^"-''-'" J<"» dependent 
 
 ieared //m< he shoird faiJ. 
 
 fo't>fS:^S;rj^;;„^--tIve Adverbs have the 
 calls for me,. ^onjunctu na ; aa, , viill go «-/.«« he 
 
 X0TE3 ON THE CONJUNCTIOX. 
 
 as, Bread anU butt.r-brc^d ^rfrf* bSlto " """"^ ""* 
 use the flr3?roSsaK.5?74'o'^;;r°' 1° '1'^' 
 
 it' IB 
 
8UB :»IVlSIv>N OP TUB PMiTS OP 81'^KCH. 
 
 37 
 
 Ins <i shortened form of (jiy. frsm the Anglo Saxon verb gifnn 
 tofjivu (Cxcamj/-,,; ci grant; as, 1 shaU uo //you 
 lit m»- ^ra.it i/,ui yx,v ]etmc. 
 
 Dkoai'sk is compouri'lcd of Li/ and faM««. 
 
 A nu-^.W of v.-o:d8 that, taken together, have the 
 power of J. 11.-12^, forma Conn-.tdionai I'hrau ; as, in- 
 us'-iurh ".i, rs w".ll aj. as if, etc. 
 
 Than, followed l>^ xvhjvn, is a Preposition. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 ^tate v^hethrr the Conjun'ctions a>r Co-ordinative 
 
 or SUBOUDINATIVE. 
 1. Take heed lest ve fall. 2. I have cut tny finfrer there 
 fore I can not write. 3. I fear 1 sliall h il. but I Cha'il make 
 the attempt. 4. I shall make the attempt, though I fear I 
 8liiill fail. 5. He speaks so low that ho ean not°l;e heard 
 «;. Kemain where you are till I return. 7. He will neither 
 come, nor send an apology. 8. it is as cold as Iceland, y I 
 know not wliether to yo or rcnmin. 10. Ask James if he is 
 r. Mdy ; and if he is ready, tell liiin to follow as quickly as he 
 can. 11. He did not deserve to succeed ; for he made no 
 ttlcit, anil sliowed no interest. 12. I shall not go uukss \uu 
 call me, nor will 1 remain if 1 can avoid it. 
 
 Exercise i8. 
 
 NAME THE CLASS AND SUB-CLA.S.S. 
 MOD'L. 
 The paths of glory lead but to the ^ra: .-. 
 
 Tli^ an i.djcctivo dcinonstraiiea. 
 
 I'ali . .a noun, common. 
 
 </ a preposition. 
 
 Glorij. .a noun, common. 
 
 L<<t'l. ..A verb, intransitive. 
 
 But ....an adverb, of manner, ( = only). 
 
 To .... a jjreposition. 
 
 The . ..an adjective, demonstrative. 
 
 Grave a noun, common. 
 
 1. The grave i.s the ordeal of true afTection. 
 
 2. p:aeh thought on the •woman who loved him the be^t. 
 
 3. So hard a winter had not been known for years. 
 
 4. And still they gazed, .and .still tlie w..ii,lpr i/ret^, 
 iiiat one small head ould rarry all he knew. 
 
4' 
 
 *" KKGLISlf GItAMMAR, 
 
 CIIAPTEn III. 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 87 -Inflection treats of the chanm. .-^j. • 
 to eicpress various rcUaU,^ ImZT '" """" 
 
 Jass, a, , ^, when we n.ean more than one 
 
 moreth,.„oneasowne,as,6»,,.4:':,'°'''™^^'" 
 
 "^cartes ot tlio same quality. 
 
 When the b,.by lie., a.,leop we say, //,. ,fe„, . u„. 
 when he awaUe., we say, //. ,,,,, „^' j,;^::,^ 
 
 Iii/eclion enumerates and exnlifn, „ll ,u 
 forms of eaeh part of speech w J ^"""^'^ 
 
 rcr.nitisproprrtonserlh^rr.ar'rr''"'- 
 
 tin.e, however, th^ 1, 1^' trvT'"":^ '°"'°- 
 :.„,.,r. »'-'*' '"■"10 within the word 
 
 ■facif ; as man, mm: rise, rose. 
 
 S9. Of the eight nlnsses of words, three-the To^ 
 i""ot,on, the Preposition, and the InterLt on Z 
 
 I "'""'■ In ".ese there is, thereto,., ClUbX 
 
 to use a wrong form. The in0.c,cd V-,L of s, f 
 are five, namely, the Noun, the pIouI thf 4* 
 tive, the Verb, and the Ad erb ' ''^'^ 
 
INFLECTION. 3f 
 
 1- — The Noun. 
 
 00. Nouns are inflectea to express diflTeronces of 
 iV amhe ■, Geiuler, and Case. 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 91. Number is that change in the form of Nouns by 
 vhich we show whether we are speaking of one ob- 
 ject, or of more than one. 
 
 92. There are two Numbers, the Shuvdar Numb( r 
 iind the Plural Number. A noun is SiiKjnlar when 
 it names one thing, as boolc ; Plural when it names 
 more than one, as boola. 
 
 93. The Plural is generally formed by adding s to 
 the Singular ; as, book, hooks. 
 
 Ono class of Anglo-Saxon Nouns formed the plural in as, 
 whi h, m later English, became cs, and ultimately s. 
 
 94. Nouns ending in s, ch, soft, sh, x, and z, form 
 
 their plural by adding c.y/ glass, glass-es ; church, 
 
 churches ; fox, fox-es. 
 
 Tlie letter e before s aids in the pronunciation of these 
 words, by forming an additional syllablo. 
 
 95. Nouns ending in o or i after a consonant, form 
 their plural by adding cs ; as potato-e^, alkali-es. 
 
 TJie following nouns ending in o, take s only in 
 the plural, — domino, duodecimo, octavo, quarto, canto, 
 grotto, mosquito, rondo, solo, tyro, virtuoso ; also nouns 
 euding in o after a vowel, as folio. 
 
 93- Nouns ending in ?/, preceded by a consonant, 
 change the ij for i, and add ca for the plural ; as laJy, 
 ladies. 
 
 Koriiiorl V tlio?.?* wfivils fi!if^o.fl 
 ladie, diUie. 
 
 3i:;^i:i ;:, 
 
40 
 
 4 
 
 i:.V(,Ll.sil GRAMMAR. 
 
 97. When y at the enrl nf •> «,«.j • 
 
 y WW Ku>. ena oi a word is nrecprlori Kt> «> 
 
 vov,eJ the Plural U io^.i...om.,ZZt2"l 
 93. Some nonnsendics ia/„, f„toxm%-ho rl„.allv 
 
 »■» wolf , wolves ; vife^icma. 
 In A„8l„.s„o„ the »h,,.,„a,. „, the,e „„.,, o„,,od ■„ . ,. 
 99. Nouns cndin^- in nnf /r ^^ i r 
 
 Thcj j)lural of tfA^//' is >,•/,/,•/>.- ir/ /-i 
 
 100 Saxon K„„x,,._a f"v nouns of Sa.on onVin 
 
 !^:;. ^::':"t:;r-■^"•-•°---""e 
 ^:::;'wS'u^;l -s-s '5 ™' "■■s«" -,.. :5i J"? 
 
 101 Foiu^icv Kouxs.— ?.r 
 
 ^it nouns from for.-i.'ii 
 
 . ~- -■• >u null 
 
 languascs retain tlieir fo,eign pluml. 
 
 iLI.Uf^TItATlOXS. 
 1. Pure Latin nouns :— 
 
 '■■"";^r"T'l- '■'-■"',"./. a,. fo,.,,,r„or. 
 
 " rt '< .< .. .. "'' ^'^^ <l.'tum, djita. 
 
 <'i- (neuter .>..,„l,.,-i '.".'■"' '"''•' -^'' *<'iii<e.s. 
 " "''"'^ t/y,;a«,yenus, genera. 
 
 ^— .«•• 
 
INiLECTlON. 
 
 41 
 
 2. Pure Greek nouns : — 
 Nouns in in form the plural iuc.s; as, crisis, crises. 
 
 on 
 
 nonicui: 
 
 a; as, I'hcnonicnoji, phe- 
 
 Mi(is))tii lias mi:'.sina(a in the pluraL 
 
 o. Some words adopted from other sources retain their 
 ori^^inal plurals. Tlius — 
 
 J/i brcic. —Chcmh becomes cheruhim, 
 /';( /u7i.--l]eau " beaux, 
 
 y^a/'-ui.— Virtuoso " virtuosi. 
 
 102. Double Pluuals. — Certain nouns have two 
 forms of the plural, one regular, the other irregular. 
 These li.stinctive forms have usually ditierent mean- 
 
 nigs. 
 
 Thus— 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Brother ..brothers (by birth) brcthrcn(of a community). 
 
 Cloth. . . .cloth (kinds of cloth). . . .clothes (garments). 
 
 Die dicj (stamps for eoinii)g).diee (for play). 
 
 (jleiiius. ..{geniuses (men of talent), .genii (spirits). 
 
 Index . . .indexes (contents) indices (algebraic signs). 
 
 Tea pens (a number,as s/x^>eas)peas:e (collective, as a dhh 
 
 of pease). 
 Penny . ..j^ennies (a number of separate coins). pence(colleetive) 
 
 Stiitl' staves (common use) staffs (military term). 
 
 Shot shot (balls) shots (number of rounds). 
 
 Pish. . . .fish (collective) fishes (individuals). 
 
 103. .Nouns with two meanings in the plural : 
 
 Sh 1st Plural. 2nd Plural. 
 
 Pain pains (pnd'erings) p.iins (troubles). 
 
 Custom eustoni Jiabiis) custimis (revenue duties). 
 
 Letter.. . .letters (of the ali>habet).htters (literature). 
 
 104. Compound nouns generally form their pdural 
 by inflecting the i)rincipal noun ; a., sons-in-law ; 
 courts-martial ; mai servants. 
 
I 
 
 ENt;f.ISII GRAMMAlt. 
 
 '^waB;::^,!'''"""^^ '^^""^ 'theMosar,. Brown.' or 
 10"). The following peculiarities are :o ho noted : 
 1. NouPo uscil ■m]y in the Plural : 
 
 AnuixU. Tr„ +• Scissors. 
 
 Antipo,Icg. ""f""^' ^I'^'ara. 
 
 ^^•J'i^-^^3. Mating. , tS^- ■ 
 
 - inns. a; .,,1 iiianks. 
 
 i;^""-. Ko^^'- ?^''^"g^- 
 
 Billiard.. NmTtiala t""''' 
 
 Cal.-ih!,,. rVli • ^fHpera. 
 
 Crclentials. Si ,"'"^''* ,Y^^'V'=^'«- 
 
 Drt-3. V>; ^ Jt^iJs- 
 
 ^'"'■'^'^- Pantaloons. 
 
 formly singular ; as, ill news run. atl" 
 
 ftoation IS singular, anU in the j.h.ral Xn 
 the signilKatum is plural. We 4av sav 
 t/ns means or ^/<e.s« meaiia ^ ^ ^^' 
 
 f 7°^'°' ^'^^ * -S"^-. ^l-ived plural, .„.„,o«.«. 
 
 ^^ -is.plura! in form, but is really singular 
 
 Politics ^ ^""«^^^^"^^^^^-^t'^«AnsIo-«axLSS 
 
 pSScs: •.:::::: yX:S.ur'tf'y;?'^' ^^t are now treat. 
 
 Optics ( n« stud?' 'onf *^'i':*'*''' '^ *'^" '•"I"-"V- 
 
 Mathemntics. ) ^ ^' ^^^''' '* "'^ science, f light.' 
 
 2. Nouns the same in both numbers : 
 
 ?'''''"• Salmon. p„ 
 
 g.^'?«88. Sheep S^"T'^ 
 
 fish. «U7,J1 Percli. 
 
 Trout. H " P'"^^- 
 
 Series. Hcfhon. jVwl. 
 
If, "LECTION. 
 
 43 
 
 Some of these words have nlso regular plurals, with a tlis- 
 tributive meaning ; as, fishcf?, cannons, pikes. 
 
 3, Nouns with a different meaning in the Plural : 
 
 Compass. . compasses. 
 
 Corn corns. 
 
 Iron irons. 
 
 Salt .salts. 
 
 Domino dominoes. 
 
 Good good". 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 Write the Plural of the folio wing Nouns: 
 
 1. Pen, desk, book, knife, fox, ox, foot, foot-man. 
 
 2. Cantlle, map, cage, ca'.f, class, hat, sky, toy, cargo, 
 church, monarch, mufT, tyro, focus, I'asis, story, ilictuni, beau, 
 potato, cherub, nebula, chiranoy, automaton, goniu.s, proof, 
 .''.xis, criterion, child, woman, wife, kiss, stall. 
 
 Exercise 20- 
 
 Give the two plurals of die, with the meaning of each ; also 
 of brother, cloth, and 2^<!nnu. 
 
 Mention three other nouns thnt have two plurals dilTcrinj 
 in meaning. 
 
 Give three nouns used only iu the plural, ono signifying a 
 pair of things. , 
 
 What is peculiar in alms, pulitics, salts, and i)at?is f 
 
 How many meanings has the word letter in the singub.i* ? 
 How many in the plural ? 
 
 Mention six nouD? that have the same form iu both nuiu- 
 bcrs. 
 
 2.— Gender. 
 
 106. Living beings are diviclecl into two dasses or 
 sexeii, the male sex, and the female sex. Things with- 
 out life are not of cither sex. 
 
 By an inllection of nouns and pronouns called 
 gender, we indicate whether the thing named is of the 
 male sex, or of the female sex, or is without life, and 
 hence of neither sex, 
 
 i 
 
' ] 
 
 lU ' 
 
 4i 
 
 ENULI.SH (iUA.MMAU. 
 
 107. The name of anything of the male sex is eaid 
 to be maaculiue gender ; as. /a'//y, brother, J-mca. 
 
 loa The name of anything of the female sex is said 
 to be /em mine gender ; as queen, sister, Jane. 
 
 109. The name of anything of neither sex is said to 
 be iieuter gender, that is, neither gender; as, apple, 
 book, industry. 
 
 110. Some names of persons and animals do not 
 indicate the sex ; us, parent, servant, mouse. Nouns 
 of this sort are said to be of common gender. 
 
 111. When an inanimate object is represented as 
 a living person, it is said to be personilied. Thus 
 words of the neuter gender become masculine or 
 feminine : * 
 
 For Winter came : the wind was his whip. 
 One chopijy finder was on liis lip : 
 He hud torn the cataracts from the hills, 
 And they clanked at his girdle like manacles. 
 
 112. We often take no account of the sex of ani- 
 mals and young children, and hence refer to them by 
 means of neuter pronunns ; as, the child was crying for 
 its mother, 
 
 113. The English language is the simplest of all 
 languages in its rules for gender. We know the gen- 
 der of any noun by its sense. If it denotes a living 
 being, it is Masculine or it is Feminine, according to 
 the sex of the being. If not the name of a living 
 being, the noun is said to be Neuter ; that is, neither 
 Masculine nor Feminine. 
 
 ng;ira-.iv> j.-ioccsa of |iLr.souii"yiiiy iLin-^.-i wiilunu liie was 
 
 1 or 
 
 as m 
 
INKLECflON. 
 
 45 
 
 fxteiisive operation ; In- this tlic distinction of gciult-r was px- 
 tiudoil to nouns gcntr.illy, .•ind this witliout distinrtion of sex 
 —the tciinination of the noun dciidinrr itn fffndcr. This may 
 he called (jra//ima(ical ycndcr ; but we have in Kntjlisli no such 
 tiling'. 
 
 114. The word 5r«;?(?t'r is derived from the Latin 
 .<7''><?^s, *a kind or sort.' (londer is applied to nouns 
 ov names; sex rolatos to thhujs. Persons and ani- 
 mals are of the male or fninilr sex ; nouns are of the 
 rnascnVine, feminine, or neuh'r r/endcr, 
 
 115 In English, Sex is usually denoted by the use 
 of distinctive words to name the male and female ; 
 
 as,, father, mother ; brother, sinter; gander, goose ; hoy, 
 girl. r 
 
 116. There are certain suffixes used to turn Mascn- 
 liiie nouns into Feminines. 
 
 (1.) The most common Feminine suffix is ess; 
 as, aetor, actress; giant, giantess; heir, 
 heiress; lion, lio)iess ; jwrt, jyoeiess. 
 
 (2.) The suffix ?*a; is a Feminine inflection used 
 in a ffcw^ Latin derivatives, as administrator, 
 administratr/.r ; executor, executrix. 
 
 (3.) Tlic suffix ine is a feminine inflection in a 
 few words, as, hero, heroine; Joseph, 
 Josepli//ie; Paul, Faul/?ie. 
 
 NOTES ON PECULIARITIES OF GENDER. 
 
 {a) The suflix ,v/fr was the most common Old English femi- 
 nine inflection ; thus wchcrc meant a male weaver, and web- 
 .^/cr meant a female weaver. But sfer is now a masculine 
 termination. This sntfix is now used as a feminine only in the 
 word s;;///.s^or; seamstress = seam-f str-f ess is redundant, con- 
 taining both the Saxou inflection ster and the French ess. So 
 with songstress. 
 
46 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 V.- 
 
 f . 
 
 (6) The word vixm contains the sufFix inc. It ia roally Ttx- 
 ine = ix a]xe-fox, and huiico is apidied to a crosa, suurliug 
 woman. 
 
 (c) WiDoWKR. Wi'foin was in Old Eiif^Hsh both masculine 
 and feiiiinine. Afttiwurds it came to be used as feminine 
 only ; then the suilix er was added to denote the maaculine. 
 
 (d) BriDEonooM. The masculine of bride Is bridegroom. 
 The word groom is a corruption of Anglo-Saxon guma, man. 
 
 (e) Woman, the feminine of man, is composed of wi/ (from 
 the same root as * weave') and ma7i (which meant a human 
 being of either sex). The literal meaning, therefore, is she 
 that weaves, that is the weaver. The pronunciation of the 
 plural of woman preserves the old root wi/^ 
 
 (/) Lapy. The word lord comes from the Anglo-Saxon 
 /<Zrt/'-onZ-=. the loaf-giver. The y in lady ii a feminine suffix, 
 and the word means literally the female lonf-jivcr. 
 
 (g) Beau and Belle (masculine and feminine of the French 
 ailjective meaning beautiful) are not correlatives. Beau mt^aua 
 either a male sweetheart or a dandy, while belle means not a 
 female sweetheart, but a preeminently beautiful woman. 
 
 117. Sex is sometimes denoted by prefixing mascu- 
 line and feminine nouns or pronouns to nouns of 
 common gender ; as, nian-sei'va.n\ maid-sevvant, he- 
 goat, s/ie goat. 
 
 Exercise 2i. 
 
 Tell the Gender of the following Wonh: 
 
 1. Cow. Lass. Mistress. I'oet. Gander. 
 
 2. Widower. Aunt. Uncle. Priestess, Goddess. 
 
 3. Lamb. Horse. Cattle. Hogs. Pigs. Chickens. 
 
 4. Pauline. Bridegroom. Ship. Sun. Moon. 
 
 6. Husband. Wife. Steer. Heifer. Gentleman. Lady. 
 
 Answei' thefollowln'j Quealions: 
 
 1. Gender in English la what? What ia the difier«aci 
 between gender ftud aex ? 
 
 L 
 
INFLRflTlON. 
 
 2. Flow miny soxcs arc t cro J 
 Kiiglish Graiuinar? 
 
 How many genJerj in 
 
 3. JJ )w many ways are tlicre of distingrinhin;? soif 
 
 4. What is peculiar in seamstress and soijjs'rtjs / 
 
 5. WJiatis the most common termination f )r the feminine » 
 
 7. Name the masculine and feminine forms for lamb co-xt 
 
 3— Case. 
 
 118. Things of which we speak b/ ncuiis o^ nouns 
 stun 1 in various reUitions to other tliinrrj and to ac- 
 tions, and attributes. Consequently, when Ihose re- 
 intions are expressed in language, ncna h.v/o vai ions 
 rehitions to other wordj in the sentence. ] a Che sen- 
 tence, 'The horse eats tlie man's hay,' ;iorsc stan.ls for 
 that wliich does the action denoted by the \ erb ; hn>/ 
 stands for that upon which the action ;s performc ]; 
 inan's is used to indicats the person to whom the Iiay 
 belongs. 
 
 119. In some languages nouns assume f^ifferent ter- 
 minations, to indicate the various relations in wliich 
 they stand to other words. These different forms of 
 tlie noun are called cases. The word case is derived 
 from the Latin casus, falling. The ancient Gre.-k 
 grammarians took a fancy to represent that form of a 
 noun in which it is used when it is the subject of a 
 sentenc, by an upright line, and compared the otlier 
 forms to lines JuUinsf or sloping q/f from this upiight 
 line at different angles. Hence a collection of the 
 various forms which a noun might assume was called 
 the decUimou or sloping down of the noun. We apply 
 the term nominative case to that case which they r«, 
 presented by the upright line. 
 
48 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 
 
 i 
 
 ■ B 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 120. Case is the form in which a noun or pronoun is 
 ustdr to show the relation in which it stands to some 
 other word in the sentence- 
 
 l-l There ,re tlireo cases, — the Nominativo, the 
 Possetisivp. and the 'J<>jevfu'c. 
 
 12!*. The NoMiNAT'VE (?asf, is that form which a 
 noun has when it is the subject of a verb. 
 
 In the ^cntonce, 'fV':'a>' coiKjuored Caul,' tho noun 
 Cesar is iu thj nominativo case, because it is tlu; 
 subject or the verb coufju'ird. 
 
 123. Tho r )ssESsivE Case is that form of the notin 
 whicli is used to denote ownership. 
 
 In the sentence, 'Ciesar's cloak was torn,' tho noun 
 Ccesar'a is in the possessive case, to show that the cloak 
 belonged to Ca>sar. 
 
 124. The OujECTivr Case is used when the noun is 
 the object of a transitive verb or of a preposition. 
 The objective case of nouns is the same in Jorm a^ 
 the nominative case. 
 
 In the sentence, ' Brutus killed Caesar/ the iioim 
 C<jesar is in the objective case, because il is the object 
 of the verb killed. 
 
 125. The Possessive Singular is formed by adding 
 an apostrophe and the letter « to the nominative 
 singular ; as, Caisar, Ctesar's. 
 
 Sometimes for the sake of enpliony the letter s is omitted in 
 foriiiin.c the possessive of words ending iu s or cc ; as, ' Tor cou- 
 science' sake.* 
 
 126. If the plural ends in s, the possessive plural is 
 formed by writing an apostrophe after the nominative 
 
 «>\ 1 « « «•«» 1 «« #« I j7, . 
 
 . 1 .1 * I .-._ ' . I\w4> ^* ^\*fK •% fw^n { «^ n 4- iTVA 
 
 i'iiiifii*? ^Sy " v/vC £»vC^CC«*"u iJCC'iC^iy / Wi*V ii V£*v J^V«**^X 
 
IMFr.RCTIOJ^, 
 
 40 
 
 plural does not end in ,<<, the possessive plural is formed 
 by adding an apostrophe ana 8 to the nominatire 
 plural, Hs ' f/ir chih' en's hats: 
 
 I The apoatroplie and v placed after the nominative siijgular 
 
 of notins to form their jiosseHsive, marks a c(>n.^racti' :. (if en, 
 an old Enylisli infection of the jtos-sessive singular. 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 Write the deelcnslon of tl'^, f<. rimj lumiiti. 
 
 MouEi,. 
 
 
 Siiii^ilar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ao,H. 
 
 Pons. 
 Oh). 
 
 Man, 
 
 Man's, 
 
 Man, 
 
 Men- 
 Men's. 
 Men- 
 
 
 Sbiffular. 
 
 Pu'-tl. 
 
 Norn. 
 Poan. 
 Ob. 
 
 Lady, 
 
 Lady's, 
 
 Lady, 
 
 Ladir s. 
 Ladies- 
 Ladies. 
 
 Siiiijii/ar. 
 
 \o/n. Boy, 
 I*o.ss. Boys. 
 o/'i. Boy, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Noiii. Sheep, 
 Po.^s. Sheep's, 
 
 Oh:. 
 
 Sheep, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Boys 
 
 Boys'. 
 
 Boys. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Sheep- 
 
 SheeVs. 
 
 Sheep- 
 
 1. Child; prince; woman; king; cable ; tutor. 
 
 2. Peril ; mercy ; father ; Henry ; aunt ; cat. 
 
 3. Charles ; gardener ; brother ; poetess ; author ; painter. 
 
 4. Sculptor ; engraver ; sister ; Socrates ; princess ; bridge. 
 
 5. House ; Peter ; righteousness ; ox ; thief ; sheep. 
 
 Write the folloioing — changing the nouns ivith pre- 
 positiotis into Possessive nouns.. 
 
 Model. 
 
 The farm of my nncle. My uncle's farm. 
 
 1. A c&Tp of a boj/. 2. The mother 0/ J/iws. 3. The dresses 
 of the ladiex. 4. Tlie 9,on of the princens. 5. The pain-killer 
 of Davis, o. The wrath o/^cA/7/f.v. 7. The work o///(f ?//fn. 
 8. The wool o/^/ie.<t/ie(';;. 9. Tue \\a.\, of Mr. Jacob. 10. The 
 house of Mr. Jacobs. 11. The store of the Messrs. Woods. 
 
 •- 6 ' '■ V " ' •••■•••. lir. i li-. .-i-.-'^srS 
 
 of my sou-in-laic. 
 
\i 
 
 50 
 
 RNOLiSH GRAMMAR. 
 
 4. Persox. 
 127. Nouns are said to be of the first person when 
 they denote tfai speaker , of the second person when 
 they denote the person spoken to ; and of the third 
 person when they denote the person xpoken of. 
 
 ILLU8TIUTI0NS. 
 
 1. /, James, do promise to obey ray teacher. 
 
 2. James, Jo you promi.se to obey your teacher ] 
 
 3. James promises to obey lii.s teacher. 
 
 Explanation : — In the first sentence James is in the first 
 person ; in the second sentence, in l!ie second person ; and in 
 the third sentence, in the third person. 
 
 II.— The Pronoun. 
 
 I. — Personal 1*ronoun8. 
 
 128. Personal Pronouns are vaaed in form to de- 
 note number, })erson, ejider, and ca^3. 
 
 INFLKCTIONS OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Nominative. 
 First P -son, I, 
 
 ^Singular. 
 
 Pos.sgssife. 
 
 Objective. 
 
 Me. 
 
 My or Mine, 
 
 /^lural. 
 Nomiiiative. Foasessive. Objective. 
 
 FirM Person, We, Dur or ours, Us. 
 
 Singular. 
 JSloinlnative. Possessive. Objective. 
 
 Secoiui Person, Thou, Thy or Thine, Thee. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nominative. Possessive. Objective. 
 
 Second Person, You OT ye, Your or Yours, You. 
 
 Nomina ve. 
 i Mas. He, 
 Third, \ Ftm. Sne, 
 [Neut. It, 
 
 They, Their or Theirs, Them. 
 
 possessive. 
 
 Objective 
 
 His 
 
 Her or Hers, 
 Its, 
 
 Him, 
 
 Her, 
 
 It, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Pn-i^i?Sftir.f^ 
 
 OhiectiV' 
 
iNFLKfTIOV. 
 
 en 
 en 
 ird 
 
 rat 
 iu 
 
 le- 
 
 51 
 
 129. Kx.vj.t in the third purs.,.. sl„:,n,lar, i,, svhi h 
 we havo a ......rn.Iine, a fc.inino, an.I a .leutor fo,„. 
 
 the personal pron.Mins are not vaiitMl to denote ^'euder.' 
 m. The personal pronon.ia of the first a.i.I of the seeon.l 
 
 //''«..v; oar, ours, aim, the tlunl fe,ui„i„e ha. . hrr I ■ ' S 
 ..nner of each pair .« ..a.-d ,vhe,. the „,•,„ follows j • i " 
 latter ih used when the noun is omitted Thus ' 
 
 f my ■) 
 j her 
 This is [ our 
 
 ! your I 
 I th.ir i 
 
 I iiiino. I 
 
 iH.use. This honoris ; ours. \ 
 
 I yoiiiM. I 
 
 I tiieii-.s. ' 
 
 It is a remarkable fact that tl.e \inr,l ;n. i; r 
 
 K,.„ii,h ,„,,ii „u„t 250 ,..„,' .;:. "it pa :',.■;;' ;-»'" 
 
 h^u. „h„:l, wa, tl,. |,„,»,.i,e ,„^. „t /„v7,'e;':7";el','t' 
 
 an 
 
 3. 
 
 siN'ci'r.VR. 
 Myself, 
 
 P:iiy8elf, / 
 
 / ^ oursclf, \ 
 
 i Herself, 
 • Himself, > 
 ( Itself. j 
 
 / 
 
 pel 
 
 I'lJ IJ.M. 
 
 Ourselves. 
 Yourselves. 
 
 Theiiiaelve.s. 
 
 w exnre*; - Vf^ ^:-'^'f'''=J^'»<'>"nH, by means of which 
 Wf, express i.iut the object and the doer of an action ire th^ 
 same person cr thing ; as, He killed hc.nself ^^^^ 
 
 The word own. joined to the Possessive.^ both .AA. .^^u_-:. 
 ^n.. a , enex.ve mean.ng ; as, This is ruy'ou;;.:^;^^^ 
 
52 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 I 
 
 ;H 
 
 r 
 
 h ■ 
 
 ^ 2. — Rfi.ativk Puonouns. 
 
 1"2. The Rt'I itive Pronouns who and which have 
 no change of form for number, person, or gender, 
 hut they are varied to denote case. That and what 
 have no change of form. 
 
 tfho AND Which Declined. 
 Nam. Pot^s. Obj. 
 
 Who, 
 Which, 
 
 Whose, 
 Whose, 
 
 Whom, 
 Which. 
 
 133. Compound Relative Pronouns are formed by- 
 adding to the simi)le ])ronouns the affixes ^o, ever, and 
 soever ; as, john-so, iiihich-ever, whatsoever. 
 
 The general force of these affixes is to imply a universal cor- 
 relative ; as, ' JVho-so-ever hateth his brother is a murderer' = 
 Every iiimi iri/hovt exception that hateth, etc. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 Tell the Kind, Number, Gender, aiid Case of each 
 
 Pronoun. 
 
 1. She ; whose ; them ; its ; our ; me. 2. Their ; us ; he ; 
 hers ; they ; I. 3. Me ; whom; mine; yorrs ; who. 4. 
 They ; thee ; my ; him ; ye ; which. 5. Ours ; yours ; that ; 
 her; theirs. 6. We; you; his; it; what; her. 7. Her 
 father gave her a book. 8. The flower that you brought me 
 is fleail. 9. Whom call we gay ? 10. He shall not touch us. 
 11. These are our horses, those are theirs. 12. My brother 
 gave me that book a year ago. 
 
 III.— The Adjective. 
 
 134. Adjectives have but one inflection. This is 
 used to show difl'erences in the degree of quality, and 
 is called comparison. 
 
 The adjectives this and that are varied to denote number ; 
 thin, these; ihui, ihont. 
 
i 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 53 
 
 In Anglo-Saxon there were several inflections. Thus, the 
 adjective 'good,' used with a masculine noun, was godo, with 
 a feminine noun god«, and with a neuter noun godc ; and the 
 nominative plural was god«n. Our language gains in simpli- 
 city by discarding these adjective inflections, and loses only a 
 certain power of varying the order of words. 
 
 135. Adjectives admit of three varieties of form, 
 called Degree.^ of Comparison, These are the Positive 
 Degree, the Comparative Degree, and the Superlative 
 Degree. 
 
 136. The Positive Degree is the adjective in its 
 simple form; as, a tall man. 
 
 This form of the adjective is used when we ascribe 
 a quality to an object without comparison. 
 
 137. The Compaxative Degree is that form of the ad- 
 jective by which we denote that one of two objects 
 possesses a certain quality in a greater degree than 
 the other ; as, James is taller than John. 
 
 138. The Superlative Degree is that form of the ad- 
 jective which we use to denote that an object 
 possesses a certain quality in a greater degree than 
 two or 'more objects with which we compare it ; as 
 
 James, John, and William are tall boys ; but James 
 is the tallest. 
 
 139. Adjectives of one syllable generally form 
 their comparative by adding er to the positive, and 
 their superlative by adding est to the positive ; as, 
 
 tall^ tall-er, tall-est. 
 
 Adjectives ending in < mutt drop this letter before tr and 
 est, as, whitt, whiter, ivhitest. 
 
 140. Adjectives cf more than one syllable generally 
 form their comparative by prefixing more to the posi- 
 
 . „, .... -..ii-.i.-. s-^^-^iijiti V w Uj j^lvIiAiilti iliOSC it'J iiilCr 
 
 positive ; as, plateful, more playful, most playful. 
 
t 
 
 
 I ' 
 
 64 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 141. Adjectives Of two syUables ending in y, er, ox 
 Ue, also those which have the accent on the last 
 syllable, and some others, may be compared by adding 
 er and est, or by prefixing more and most; as, me,ry, 
 tender, able, polite, pleasant. 
 
 Uhl r y ^^^J.oQ the other hand, even a inonosvl- 
 iatisd; '■ '"'^ ^' '"'"^•'''"'^ ^y '"^'•^ "•• '"'''^■' if tJ'« ^^r be 
 
 fu/ni.Avr''*'"**'^;""^ a superlative of ,;;,«/««</.« are 
 
 Nori Jn Fr"J:!h'!T"^^« ""[ con.i,ari.son is derived from the 
 .>oiman-J^ie»ch ; the iiiHected mode is ohl Saxon. 
 
 U2. The following are Frreyuhir Coniparu 
 
 roMITIVE. 
 
 (iood, 
 
 Well, 
 
 Kvil, 
 
 Bad, 
 
 Little, 
 
 Many, 
 
 Much, 
 
 Far, 
 
 Near, 
 
 Late, 
 
 Old, 
 
 Hind, 
 
 Up. 
 
 Out, 
 
 t'OllPARATIVE. 
 
 Better, 
 
 Better, 
 
 Worse, 
 
 Worse, 
 
 L"ss, 
 
 More, 
 
 Mo.-e, 
 
 Farther, further, 
 
 Nearer, 
 
 Later or latter, 
 
 Older or elder, 
 
 Hinder, 
 
 Upper, 
 
 Utter, or outer 
 
 sons 
 
 Sr.-ERLATIVB. 
 
 Best. 
 
 Best. 
 
 Worst. 
 
 Worst. 
 
 Least. 
 
 Most. 
 
 Most. 
 
 Farthest, furthest. 
 
 Nearest or next. 
 
 Latest or last. 
 
 Oldest or eldest. 
 
 Hindinr,3t. 
 
 Upmost. 
 
 Utmost. 
 
 |j» 
 
 NOTES ON niK IKUK(;rLAU COM PABIHONS. 
 
 *'■' ^OOd:^,,,.,,»,dft^.v<Jbe^ the comparative and 
 
 syno:;^'^?:^;^ ' " '^'^^^^'^ Anglolxon M, a 
 
 ^"■* "^tfve ll^";;^''f'\'yf^^^^^^^n^^y^i\y^ and superla- 
 tn^^e o, the obsolete Anglo-Saxon n;or, a synonym of 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 55 
 
 (3. ) Old : The regular comparative and superlative are used 
 when old is contrasted with new; the irregular forms 
 vhcn it is contrasted with yoiin<> ; as, the older house 
 belon>ja to the ehh'r brother. But ohlfr and oldest are 
 often applied to animate beings ; cider and ddtst never 
 to inanimate. 
 
 ( 4. ) Late : The regular forms later and latest are opposed to 
 earlier and earlieHt ; the irregular forms latter and 
 last are opposed to 'former' and 'first.' Last is a 
 contraction of late-cst. 
 
 (5.) Farther, further: Farther, [romjur, means more dis- 
 tant, and is opposed to nearer ,• as I prefer the farther 
 house to the nearer one. Further, from /or^A," means 
 more advanced or additional; as, I shall mention a 
 further reason. 
 
 (<)•) Inner, inmost, have no positive ; down, downmost, and 
 top, topmost, have no comparative ; nether, nether- 
 most, are the comparative and superlative of neath. 
 «ar The sutKx most, in these superlatives, is not the 
 adverb 'most.' It is really a double sujierlative end- 
 ing, compounded of the two Anglo-Saxon endings am 
 a,nd ost, both^e.s/. Hence foremost=fore-t-ma-i-ost. 
 
 (7.) Certain comparatives in ior, derived from the Latin, a« 
 'interior,' 'exterior,' 'superior,' 'inferior.' 'anterior,' 
 'popterior,' ' prior,' ' ulterior,' ' senior,' 'junior,' 'ma- 
 jor,' 'minor,' are not proper English comparatives. 
 They have not the P^nglish ending ; nor are they fol- 
 lowed by ' than' in composition, but by ' to ;' thus we 
 do not say 'senior than his brother,' ' but senior to his 
 brother.' They share this peculiarity with a few ad- 
 jectives of Ando-Saxon origin ; as, former, elder, lat- 
 ter, hinder, under, inner, etc. 
 
 (S. ) Adjectives expressing (jualities that do not admit of 
 change of degree are not compared. Examplks : ' Cer- 
 tain,' 'dead,' 'empty,' ' •extreme/ 'false,' 'full,' 
 'infinite,' 'perfect,' 'complete,' 'supreme,' 'univer- 
 sal,' 'round,' 'straight,' 'square,' 'lend,' 'correct.' 
 
 Many of these Adjectives are compared in colloquial use and 
 even by good writers, and duch comparison is allowable on the 
 theory that these adjectives are nut used in their strict sense. 
 However, we can generally avoid such comnariaons, for ex- 
 ample, in place of saying ' more perfect,' say ' i-iore near' v 
 perfect.' 
 
ae 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 \n 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 
 Oire the Comparative a,id the Superlative /orm of 
 
 tJw. folloU-ilKJ A I ) J ECT I V ES. 
 
 1. Great ; good ; wise ; ill ; little ; short ; had ; late. 
 
 2. Near ; tore ; much ; old ; fru.'al ; few ; valuable ; niauy. 
 hea'v ^**''''"* ' '"'"''^^''' ' ^"°^ ' ^""^ > P'-^tty ; Wack ; rich ; 
 'ree " '^ ' '^''^""'''■°"'* ' *''''' • ^^^ ' S^^n^^e ; bright ; bitter ; 
 
 5. Calm ; gay ; hard ; useful ; red ; light ; truthful ; swift. 
 da?k ^'^'^^'^ ' ''"^^ ' ^'''"*^'^ ' *^''" ' '""'^^^* ' '"^^'"'■y ; rough ; 
 
 IV.— The Adverb. 
 
 143. Some Adverbs are inflected to express degrees 
 of comparison ; as, He calls oftnner than he writes. 
 
 144. The comparison of Adverbs follows the same 
 rules as that of Adjectives ; as, soon, sooner, soonest, 
 pkasanthj, vwrt pleasantly, most plensanthj. 
 
 Many Adverbs, from the nature of their meaning, can not 
 be compared ; as. then, nou; here. 
 
 145. The followinir Adverbs, like the Adjectives 
 with which they correspond, are irreyularbj compared : 
 inrll, lll^ Ixidly, much, Uttle, far, forth. 
 
 The Adverb m^/,<.r is the comparative of an Old English 
 Adjective rathe, meaning early ; thus— 
 
 The rathe primrose which forsaken dia^.— Milton. 
 
 .v.',f!'''*'ir'V"^'"'^ '"'■^'"" y'' ''■'"""' •■ ^ «^"»1J '•'^if^'^r read than 
 ■■■'i -■■■■■■■n ;-.;-.u than write. 
 
INFLECTION, 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 
 57 
 
 Give the Comparative and the Siperlative forms of 
 the following Adverbs : 
 
 1. Largely ; plainly ; badly ; wh(j]ly ; brightly. 
 
 2. Completely ; little ; possibly ; awectly ; far ; well. 
 
 B. 
 
 Distinguish between Adjectives and Adverbs, 
 remembering that adjectives limit nouns, and that 
 adverbs limit verbs, adjectives, and other ad- 
 verbs. 
 
 1. I have seen better faces. 
 
 2. He likes this better. 
 
 3. The more mildly I spoke, the wore insolent! v he an- 
 swereu, and therefore the more punishment he deserves. 
 
 4. I liave lon;f wished to see her. 
 
 5. I have a long letter from her. 
 
 6. Much fruit. I love him much. 
 
 v.— The Verb. 
 
 Ii6. The modifications of the verb are:— voice, 
 mood, tense, numher, and person. 
 
 Some of the modifications of the verb are made by 
 a change in the form of the w. rd ; others are made by 
 auxiliary or helping words. An example of the first 
 mode is the change of walk to walked, to denote past 
 time ; an example of the other mode is the use of will, 
 as will iralli-, to denote future time. 
 
58 
 
 w 
 
 i- < 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 I. Voice. 
 
 147. All transitive verba Jiave two forms, cue of 
 which has the word which names the doer of the act 
 for the subject ; the other J.as the word which names 
 the object of the act for its subject. 
 
 Finst/orm. Watt [dorr] invented the ateam-engine. 
 ventS'j;'vV^t '''' «*— »gi- lof^/ect of acao.] was in- 
 
 wp thnl°''?. ", *^\^°"^ °f *l^e verb by means of which 
 f^rtte / orf ?.' «fJectofthe sentence stands 
 by tSe verb *^ °^ *^^ *°*'°'' 'P°^^^ °^ 
 
 149. There are two voices, the Active Voice and the 
 / asfitve Voice. 
 
 WnrH/^V^°*'J^ ^°'^^ ^^ **^« ^«^°^ used When the 
 Word denoting the doer of the action is the subject of 
 the verb ; as, The hoy strikes the hall. 
 
 J3 /^r^^^^i^e Voice is the form used when the 
 subject of the verb; ■.^, The hall was struck by the boy. 
 
 152. The Passive Voice is formed by means of the 
 helping v.rb Be and the Past Participle of a transitive 
 verb. 
 
 nS^^f ? f^^ •*. ''^'■^ '''''' ^^^'^ ^t) object, and onlv the 
 Paisttdci"""'"^ ^■^'•'^^" •^^'^^''^^ the subject of tt 
 
 The sun shines — 
 
 —is 'jhone by the sun. 
 
 ^;im-en".:^^"^:T..''!!^^!!":.^^'« -^*'' ! ^att invented the 
 
 •^" -*to""^ »>"o iiiNtiiitd ry Uatt,' 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 59 
 
 and you will see thnt. shines being an intransitive verb, there 
 IS nothing to become its subject in the Passive. 
 
 153. When an intransitive verb is followed by a 
 phrase made up of a preposition and a noun, the in- 
 transitive verb may be used in the passive voice with 
 the preposition as an adverbial adjunct; as, 'I li..po 
 for reward,' ' Reward is hoped for.' 
 
 154. Some intransitive verbs have their perfect 
 tenses formed by means of tlie verb be, followed by the 
 past or perfect participle ; as, ' I am come,' ' He /* 
 arrived.' These forms must not be mistaken for pas- 
 sive verbs. The passive voice must have the jyast 
 ixti'tidple of a tramitive verb, joined to the verb to be. 
 
 2.— Mood. 
 
 155. There are several ways or modes in which we 
 may speak of an action in connection with its a"ent 
 or doer. Thus we may say : 
 
 John writes ; John ma?/ write ; 
 
 If John write ; John, ivrite ; 
 
 John is learning to write. 
 
 This modification of the verb by which we speak 
 of an action, in these difterent ways, is called moo>/, 
 that is mode or manner. 
 
 156. Mood is that modification of the verb which 
 marks the mode in which the action is viewed or 
 stated. 
 
 Verbs have //<;e moods : — 
 
 Inillaitiiy\ Suhjiinrtive. Pafi':- '/-/ 
 
 Imperuti re. Ivfinitioe. 
 
60 
 
 KNGJ.ISH (;KAMMAR. 
 
 fe 
 
 i ( 
 
 
 thL ^^ V® Indicative Mood includes those forms of 
 the verb used in speaking of an event or state of 
 things regarded as actual, and not as merely thought 
 
 oi , as, ./o/,n writes. 
 
 Tliis mood is also used in askincj questions. 
 
 IM. The Potential Mood is used to show that an 
 fw ° '\P°««;^le' or tl^at the agent is under some ob- 
 ligation to act ; as, John can write, John must write. 
 
 'n>ull"£ul,}:' '^"^'^'-■•-. -«^. can, ,nusf, mujkt, could, 
 
 the^o' cailTa Sn""""''"' ^'^ -'^ "" I'"*^"*»^l '""^^l' b«t regard 
 
 parse -irlr^n^ ^' J'"'"^'!'*"^^ ^^''^''- '^'^'^^ ^""1^1 «»'« 
 
 1^*!f M •' " *''® ^'""*' maimer as darr no. This is in- 
 deed, the more correct naethod. / can ,jo meL I am abkl 
 
 160. The Subjunctive Mood represents an event or 
 state of things as something merely thought of, and 
 not as matter of fact; as, ' Were John here he ^o^^ki 
 act ditierently.' ' If lie go, he will regret it.' 
 
 This mood generally supposes some condition on 
 which a state of things expressed by another verb in 
 the sentence depends, and :t is often preceded by such 
 conjunctions as, if, thouyh, that. 
 
 161. With the exception of the second and third 
 persons singular of the present and the present perfect 
 tenses, and of the present and past tenses of the verb 
 l>e, the subjunctive mood corresponds in form with 
 the indicative. The different forms are thus shown • 
 
 Indkative. 
 Thou luvest. Hi; lores. 
 
 SunJUNf'TIVE. 
 
 If thou lucr, [f he love. 
 Thou ha.t local, 1 1,- has land. TC thou have InvcL !f !- 
 
 Iiave loved. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 61 
 
 I (iiii, Thou art, itc. 
 r iniH, Thou inisf, itc. 
 
 If r hr, If thou hp, ttc. 
 If I j/v'/y, If thou ircre, <tc. 
 
 
 H)2. The subjunctive mood am generally be 
 changed into the indicative or the potential by sup- 
 plying .^lutll, .^]io,il<l, A'c. Thus, //• hf> (jn, may be 
 changed to, If lip shall (jo. 
 
 163. The Imperative Mood is that form of the verb 
 used in stating a command or request ; as, Go to bed 
 Lend mt a knife. ' 
 
 The imperative mood has only the present tense, 
 and it has no change in form for singiilar and plural. 
 As a direct command must be addressed to the per- 
 son who is to obey it, the imperative mood can be 
 used only in the second penson. In such sentences 
 as, ' Let us priy,' let is in the imperative mood, and 
 ^traij is in the infinitive. 
 
 In sucli expressions as, ' Some angel guide my pencil,' supply 
 M, may, or some word evidently implied. 
 
 164. The Infinitive Mood is chat form of the verb 
 which is used when the action or state that is denoted 
 by the verb is spoken of without reference to number 
 or person- 
 
 Tlie Infinitive is generally preceded by to ; as, ' Eoys 
 love to play: The Preposition to, as the sign of the 
 infinitive, is omitted after certain verbs ; as, hid, dare, 
 need, make, let ; thus, ' Let him go: ' Bid him rise: ' 
 
 Strictly .speaking, the Infinitive is not a Afood at all 
 Ihisforinof the verb has no limitations of number, person 
 or tmie. It can ni t make a statement. It has the force of a 
 noun, and it may be used either as the subject or as the object 
 of another verb; as, 'To read well is an accomnlishmpnt ' 
 •ioiiu loves to read. ' 
 
62 
 
 1. 
 
 ii^i 
 
 u- 
 
 f 
 
 a 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Participles and Gerunds. 
 
 Par,;- /''"' ,"7. ""•"■"'" '■"'""' <"■ "«' «'•'-. exile,! 
 ^o,M c,,.,.„.,e,, ,„„.ute of .,.e „at„.e of other pa,-., 
 
 1G8. Thove are two Partidples formed by i„«ectiou 
 -the Present or incomplete participle, as u,alking, 
 .fr. «„, and the Paat, or eo,„tMe participle, a, 
 walked, drawn. ^ ' ' 
 
 Participle oAheparsive voice '"''P''' ^"'"'"^ *^^ ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ] 09. The Present Participle in all verbs is made by 
 sufexing u»g to the root ; as, walk-in- 
 
 „ .';": .'^^; ''"»' P'"-«"pIe of all Kegular Verb., (see 
 
 ^</. The Past Parfcple of Irregular Verbs is formed 
 in some other way ; as, >,ruck, taken, cut. (See list of 
 Irregular Verbs, ff 224.) 
 
 171. In transitive verbs, the present participle is 
 active, as, dm,j,ji„,i. pmhi,,,, ; while the past parti- 
 ciple IS passive, ,«, ,,r„!,ged, pushed. In intransitive 
 verbs the only d= rence of meaning is that of Incom- 
 plete and comnhfp. 
 
INFLKr-TlOK. 
 
 G3 
 
 172. The Qenind is a verbal noun, ending in ing. 
 It is sometimes equivalent to an infinitive 
 
 Thus : — ' WaJIclini is l?ett'..- than runnlnrf,' is equal to 
 ' To lortl/,- is bettor than to run.' 
 
 173. The (ieruml difTtii-s from the partiiipli' of the s.iine form 
 in being, hke a noun, the subject or the object of a s.ntence. 
 It may be quahfied by nii luljective, and it may be j.r»iceded 
 by a possesaive : ' Vmir walking is ns fast as ;//v running.' 
 While governed by a preposition (like a nou,,), it may in turn 
 take a noun object (like a verb) ; as, ' In wrifnui a letter, at- 
 tention should be paid to punctuation.' 
 
 The word geruwl signifies rarn/ini/ on (Latin 
 (/erere). 
 
 3— Tense. 
 
 174. Tense is a modification of the verb, indicating 
 partly the time to which an action or event is referred, 
 and partly the completeness or incompleteness of the 
 action or event at the time indicated. 
 
 175. Tense is sometimes formed by a change in the 
 word, as walk; walked ; mrlte^ wrote ; and sometimes 
 by using auxiliary words, as harr walked, shall walk. 
 
 176. There are three natural divisions of time— 
 the present, the j>ast, and the fidiire. There are, there- 
 fore, three primary tm^ies—ihe Present Tenxe, the 
 Past Teme, and the Fiitnre Tense. 
 
 177. The present, past, and future tenses speak of 
 an event in an indefinite manner, without reference to 
 other events, with regard to which it is complete 01 
 incomplete. An action or event may also be spoken 
 of as complete with reference to some or^er action or 
 event. A tense which indicates this is called a perfect 
 
 ■ tense ; as. ' John ht 
 
 TlTXI^it £^f^ ri 1 CI 
 
 
■**^' ». . \\ 
 
 
 K 
 
 1^1 
 
 ri 
 
 i! 
 
 f »• 
 
 *n 
 
 04 
 
 ENOLISII ORAMMAR. 
 
 ' Jamea //a./ loft the house before I arrived' ; ' I ."Malf 
 ham gone when the train arrives.' 
 
 178. There are three tenses to express the com- 
 pleteness of the action or event with respect to some 
 other action or event— the Prosnit Perfect, the Past 
 Perfect, and the Future Perfect. 
 
 The verb has six ter> \s : — 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 Past Perfect. 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 1 79. An action or state may also be spoken of as 
 incompleee, or still going on in the past, present, or 
 future. This is denoted by the Progresdve Form of 
 the verb, as, / j«.,^ imlk'uuf ; I am umlkiny ; I shall 
 he walking. 
 
 Formation of Tenses. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 180. The Indicative Mood has all the six tenses. 
 
 181. ThePrese 'he .simple form of the verb : as, 
 walk. 
 
 18i. The Past is generally formed by adding ed to 
 the present, as, walk-ed. Some verbs form their past 
 tense by changing the % owel of the simple form or 
 root ; as, lorite, wrote. 
 
 183. The Future is formed by placing the auxiliary 
 shall or ivill before the present infinitive ; as, shall 
 walk^ will ivalk. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 65 
 
 1H4. The Present Perfect .h formed l,y placinj? the 
 ftuxili.iiy l„nu^ hrfore the past participle ; as, ha,,' 
 ,i'nlk,d. 
 
 IHr). The Past Perfect is formed by placing the 
 nuxih'ary h<„l before the past parti.-iple ; as, h,i,f 
 v'ltlkid. 
 
 180. The Future Perfect is formed by placng the 
 auxiliary sl„dl h.,ve or „u,'l have before the past par- 
 ticiple ; as, *•//«// hrtve „^,ilke,I, will have vmlkejl. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 187. The Potential Mood has four tenses,— ;>/•^^e/^^ 
 pant, pvesent perfect, fiast perfect. 
 
 I SS. The Present is formed by placing the auxiliary 
 ma,j, can, ovmust before tlie present infinitive ; as, may 
 walk: ,-aii waVc, muxt walk. 
 
 18!». The Past is for'ued by placing flie auxiliary 
 m,<iht, cjuU, w,ml,l, or should before the present irG 
 nitive ; as, miyht walk, (tr. 
 
 190. The Present Perfect is formed by placing the 
 auxiliary may have, can have, or must have, before the 
 past participle ; as, ma,f hai-e ivalked, dec. 
 
 IDl. The Past Perfect is formed by placing the aux- 
 iliary inhjht have, coidd have, would hac or shnuld 
 have before the past participle; as, mnjht hav,^ umlked 
 i(c. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 192. The tenses of the Subjunctive Mood are the 
 sa 3 in form as t.hf f>orrpsi"^r!!i'V'- *■ — -- -f *■> ^ .. 
 
\i' i 
 
 I!. 
 
 ('.(; 
 
 I'NCI |si[ (;|( VMM \i;. 
 
 i-Mwo Mu.mI, will, till! e.\r<«>>tioii u\ tlir s<-con<! an.l 
 third .siiigiiliii- uf tlio i)....s(.ut Jiud present porlbct. 
 'rinus : — 
 
 I inHraflri'. 
 
 Present \ '}}"]' '•'^'<''^t. 
 I iw loves. 
 
 rresr,nl\rfM j'/'ho'i lust love.l. 
 [Ho hast l(.vf<l. 
 
 /'/■'■sr/tf 
 /'/■(•s. It/ I'lrl'rl 
 
 Siibjinutici'. 
 
 (if) Thou lov... 
 [ (if; If.' love. 
 
 (if) Thou have loxcd. 
 (if) lie have love.l. 
 
 I '■>•"'. The oxplanatiou of these .linereiiees is, tliat in 
 \vh;it is eiille.l tho Suhjunctive Moo.l thoio is au au.\i 
 liary Idl out ; sneh as, milf, ni'ii/, no,., should. 
 
 ll.l.l S'I'UATIONS. 
 
 1. If he s,r tho signal, li(> will eoiuo, is tho same as, 
 If Im! ,sh<ui see tlu> signal, etc. 
 
 •J. Thon<,'h \u^sl<,;, me, yet will I trust in him, is 
 (ii(> same as, Though ho nimj .si;i\- Mie, 
 
 I'.U. llemH> wo see that tho Suujuiictiv-e Moo-l is 
 millii an nhhrcriatnl fuvni.^ eitiier of the /i/dlcifirr 
 Mood (if siiAF.i., is the word omitted) or of the Po/r.,. 
 Ii<(l .Mood (if MAY, CAN', oil siio: i.i), is Understood). 
 
 I!>.-.. In ino,lern Kiij^lisli. hut little iv-ar.l is pni.l t.. tii,- 
 im-o diatnictions fonii.'riy made l.etweou .smli f.,r:i,^ .is 'if !„• 
 l.-vt's and 'It he lov,..' In fart, tho Suhjui.otiv: M„.hI i-,' 
 raindly diMaiipsariii^' trom our lai.giiai,a\ 
 
 I (i<: Tl... 0..1 :... i r i- . 1 
 
IMI.KrTIitN. 
 
 t)7 
 
 its ow,. in all M,e parts of the |».o.so.it tense, a!.,l in 
 the singular of the past tense, as, 
 
 Preset) (. 
 
 (if) I be ) 
 Singular (if) thou ho. '- 
 (if) ho 1)6 j 
 
 (if) we bo. ) 
 
 riuial (if) you 1)0. V 
 
 (if) they be. j 
 
 PaM. 
 (if) I were, 
 (if) thou W(n-t. 
 (if) he were. 
 
 (if) we were, 
 (if) you were, 
 (if) they were. 
 
 Imperative Mrod- 
 
 l!)r. The Fniperative Mood has but one ttns.^: (1,p 
 Present, which has the sani^ form as the VwH-.-xi hi- 
 (licative. 
 
 Infinitive Mood- 
 
 108. The Infinitive Mood has two tenses : the Pre- 
 sent, whieh has the same form as the Presefit Indicn- 
 tive, and the Present Perfect, whieh is formed I.v 
 placing the auxiliary ha-e betore the past particii-h/; 
 as, to hare lored. 
 
 The Participle. 
 
 109. The Participle has three tenses: the Present, 
 formed by adding inn to the simple form of the vr.l,' 
 as waU-im, ; the past, generally formed by addin- , ,/ 
 to the simple form, as, ivfiUre,/, but sometimes foiMi.iI 
 irregularly, as, r/- rjow : write, trritfett ; and tli.- pre 
 sent perfect, formeci b- prefixing hnriwj to th(> past, 
 participle, as, h'irin>j iralkeif, /tdviii;/ ijovc. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 2()u. TlIK PuKStNT iNniOATIVK. 
 
 (1.) The Present Tense expresses v.hnt is, ov wiiat is takin-' 
 plaeo wlie.i the statement ia made ; as, 1 read. "" 
 
68 
 
 EX(;r.Fsn (jrammar. 
 
 
 : \ 
 
 w 
 
 l*f 
 
 »>l 
 
 '2. ) This tense is also used to express a fact universally true ; 
 as, The Greeks did not know that the earth « round.' 
 
 (3.) It li;if sometimes a future meaning; as, Duncan ronirs 
 here to-niglit. 
 
 (4.) The historic present is used when we wish to describe 
 vividly a past event as taking place in presint 
 time; as, Caesar cro.w/'j* the Rhine. 
 
 •201. The Past Indicative. 
 
 The Pabt Tense states a fact in a general way as belonging 
 to the past ; as, Columbus discovered America. 
 
 202. K' Tl-KE llfDICATIVE. 
 
 ^ha/l is used in the first pwson to express intention ; 
 thus. I shall write a letter, means I intend to write 
 , a letter. To express inteiUion in the second and 
 tliinl person, v:ill -s used ; as, You or he will write 
 :< letter, i.e., intend to write a letter. tVill, in the 
 lirst i)erson, denotes determination; as, I will go 
 to New York, means I am determined to go to New 
 York. Determiiuition, in the second and thinl 
 persons, is expressed by xhall ; as, You shall go 
 home. 
 
 [For a fuller explanation of 'shall' and ' will,' see Syntax.] 
 
 203. Present Perkect Ini/Icative. 
 
 The present perfe-t tense represents a past action with 
 reference to present time. I have lost my knife 
 means that I, at the present moment, am \n the 
 condition of having lost my knife. Hence, when 
 there is any reference of a past action to past time, 
 the i)ast tense, and not the present perfect, should 
 be used. This tense implies double time, that is, 
 the auxiliary exjjresses present time, and the parti- 
 ciple denotes the tinisliiiig of the act. 
 
 204. I'AST Perfect Indicative. 
 
 The past perfect tense represents a past event with refer- 
 ence to i)ast time ; as, I had eaten my dinner be- 
 fore he arrived. This tense may be called a correla- 
 
 ''""'', .J". "^''"" *'" ^° ""^"■i oiiiy 111 Cuuii^ciion with a 
 modifying statement. 
 
INFLECTION. 09 
 
 20o. FlTlRK PkKFKCT iNDlt'ATIVi;. 
 
 The lutiir.' pi-rfoct tt-iisf denotes an a-tion that will hupiien 
 before some other future action ; as, Dear brothe., 
 l^'cll harr. (jonr to Kurope before you reach home.' 
 This tense, also, is correlative. 
 
 •Jit.J. Of these six Tenses of the In.lxMtive, three express 
 xiiii/i/r time, and three denote ft/:o kiihls or y>o;«/.x of time. 
 
 HIMPI.K TIMK. 
 Namf.i. Forni.1. 
 
 Prrsrnt ; as I write. 
 
 /'''.s7 .• " ...I vs-n.le. 
 
 Fninvi' : " | shall write. 
 
 TWO KINKS on I>()1NIS OK TI IK 
 
 Kniiifx. Forim. 
 
 Pri-Hcnt Perfect I have w.itten. 
 
 Pa^f Perfect ] had written. 
 
 Future Perfect I shall have written. 
 
 The three Compound Tenses all involve a double notion of 
 time, and are therefore correlative tenses. The Present Per- 
 fect meana that an action begun in Faxt time is (inished at 
 the I'lesent time. The Past Perfect is used when we are 
 thiidving of t\ro polatfi of Post time. The P^iture Perfe<'t is 
 used when we are thinking of tin) points of Future tiiu: 
 
 207. POTF.NTIAI, PkksKNT. 
 
 (1.) The i)resent potential asserts chieily jiowei or leave to 
 do something. It also im|)Iies a notion oi'/nturit;/.- 
 as, / may ,jn to town. This comes from the literal 
 nu-aniuL' of the old verb fronnvhich may is derived, 
 and M'hich means to hare f/^e pcrer. I may go to 
 town literally signifies that 1 have the j'oirer vi 
 going to town. 
 
 (2.) The auxiliary mii.t (from the same root as //(ay) also 
 
 COnvevs the nnfinn <-.f /:...../. ^... »w, \...i. u -•„ e 
 
 ... j....,..^ i^-M!, 11 13 lui i;c 
 
 outside ofmc. I mmt go 1 1 town implies /onv that 
 compels me to go ; hen.'e tin- idea of ihUy. 
 
70 
 
 ^f 
 
 i'' 
 
 KNCLISH fJHAMMAH. 
 liO.S. I'oTKMIAI, I 'AST. 
 
 l//'////i.s originally the past tcnst. „f ,.,r,^ .- amhi ol cm, ; 
 
 U'.ttld of ,/t// ; and «//„/(/,/ „f ,s/,„//. 
 
 (1.) Ol.s.a-ve tl.atwhen .- sentence contains a verb in the 
 l)a.st p.,tcntial, it M'ill ahvay.s Jiave a conditional 
 claii.sc introd.icud by a conditional conjunction, and 
 the conditional clause will always be in the past 
 tense, 
 
 (•J.) I.itho conditional fonn of the past potential, it oft.n 
 happens that the conjunction //; etc., is omitted: 
 thus, Slundd I go to town if I should go to town. 
 Note tliat in this construction the subject comes 
 iiftrr the verb. 
 
 (:{.) The ].ast p..tential frequently implies /H/wr/V//; thus, I 
 should Mam „ext v.eek if I were to leave to-daj'. 
 
 200. Potential J'ast Perkect. 
 
 There is a pe.ndiar construction by which the past i)erft-ct 
 of the .ndim/ic serves to comey the sense of the past perfect 
 rofr.fnd .- thus, irthouhadst been here my brother //rtj not 
 dod (tliat IS, ir,..dd not /(itrc died). 
 
 NuMltKR AND F^r.USON. 
 
 210. Number and Person are modifications of the 
 verb, to correspond with the number and person of 
 Its subject. 
 
 The vo.l. is .SMiM to be of the siinjular or of tlie 
 /'/.,m/ nmnlnn- .•looonlin- us its subject is sin-uhir or 
 plunil. 
 
 In the sentence, The .loir ha.-ks, /w;-/,w is .suid to l.e 
 sin-M).ir to .a^Mce with its subject ,/,,;/ .• and in t!ie 
 H>'}i{vnvi^, . iic (iu-rs i.jiiK, /„,,/; ;« said to be pluml to 
 a^rrce with its subjoct i/(»/.s: 
 
INFLIXTION. 71 
 
 I'lJ. 'I'Ik! veil) is said to ))0 of tlie jir<i iinsoii, 
 ^ri-miil person, or third person, according as its sub 
 jict \y ■\st., sft'ontL or (/n'r<( })t'rson. 
 
 In tlie sentence, I walk, /m/k is said to he of the 
 lirst person to agree witli /. There are three persons 
 in each number. 
 
 lM2. The inflections of f]..i verb for number and 
 person in tlie present, past, and future tenses of tlie 
 Imlicative Mood are thus shown : — • 
 
 liKSKNT. 
 
 SilKj.'l/lfl 
 
 1. I walk. 
 
 •) Tl 
 
 ion wa 
 
 Ikcst. 
 
 ;5. ire walks. 
 
 r/iiral. 
 
 1. We walk. 
 
 2. You walk. 
 
 'n 
 
 lev walk. 
 
 1. I walked. 
 
 -. 'fliou walkcdst. 
 
 o. }fe walked. 
 
 AST. 
 
 1. We walk.Ml. 
 
 2. V 
 
 on waJkf'( 
 
 Ikf 
 
 TIh'V walked. 
 
 FliTl- 
 
 RK, 
 
 1. I shall oy will walk. 1. We shall nf will walk. 
 
 2. 'i'hou shalto/- wilt walk. 2. You shwll nr will walk. 
 • i. lie shall or will walk. ;). Thev .shall n/'will walk. 
 
 Not 
 
 i;. Oil.SOrVf tllilt ill Solllr (if tin.' tlMlSCS c'.lC Otllv C'l 
 
 or iiilloitidii for niiiul 
 
 KiiJi:L' 
 
 siiij^iilar, 1111(1 ill (.tlicr tci 
 siiitiiiliir. 
 
 iilxT and jM rsdii is in tlie sccon'l jKTSdi 
 iwi'-i in tlic >^('i'()ii(l and tlir tlilrd 
 
 !i:!. Tl.r ,„i 
 
 union fiirni of our second person .Hiiii,'iil;»r is 
 
 vc, an. I of our tliird person sinijnlar, He loves ;' hut 
 
 we 
 
 \'n\ 1( 
 
 ivtiiiii fi ,1 <H.l Kni^'lisli the fonns,'"riioii lowst, Ho loveU 
 
 lliese iii-u US..1 in p,.elry nii<l piMver, and are ealle.l tii 
 
 — iv.-:::: ;;: iliiriuni, FXVii . iill- lliiicellons CS/ a'Kl (f/l IWO I'O- 
 
 iiiaiiis of tlie Saxon inllpeliona ns/ [•2d. 
 p.'is. sing. J 
 
 pci'B. ,?iiig. j and (iff, [.'M 
 
72 
 
 KNCiLISlI (iRAMM.VIJ. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 itu'l pliinil, nr.'if, fierond, an,/ f/iinf persni/.'< of the follow 
 Leiirn, Talk, Love, Sail, Play, Cliop. 
 
 AUXILIARY VEUDS. 
 
 214. The verbs used to assist in forming certain 
 niootls and tenses, called <nuili<ir>i verbs are harp, 
 ■•ihall, irlll, niaii, nm, nuist. They are thus inllected 
 in the present and past tenses. 
 
 \r 
 
 i'iinynhir. 
 
 1. I have, 
 
 2. Thon hast, 
 .'5. He has. 
 
 >i)iiiijiiliir. 
 
 1. I had. 
 
 2. Thou hadst. 
 
 3. He had. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I shall. 
 
 2. Thon Shalt. 
 
 3. He shall. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I shonld. 
 
 2. Tuuu shouidst. 
 
 3. He shonld. 
 
 Have. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I'Asr. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We have, 
 
 2. Yon have, 
 
 3. They have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We had. 
 
 2. You had. 
 
 3. They had. 
 
 Shall. 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We shall. 
 
 2. You shall. 
 
 3. They shall. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We should. 
 ■J. ion shonld. 
 3. They should. 
 
INFLECTION, 
 
 7;^ 
 
 Siw/iifdr. 
 
 1. I will. 
 
 2. Thou wilt. 
 M. lie will. 
 
 Sing II Jar. 
 1. i would. 
 '_'. Thoii wouldst. 
 ;5. He would. 
 
 Sim/ii/tir. 
 
 1. I may. 
 
 2. Thou mayest. 
 
 3. He mav. 
 
 JSiiK/iilm'. 
 
 1. I might. 
 
 2. Thou niightest. 
 
 3. He might. 
 
 SiiKjiihir. 
 
 1. I can'. 
 
 2. Tliou canst. 
 
 3. He cnn. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I could. 
 
 2. Thou couldst, 
 
 3. He could. 
 
 wm. 
 
 I'llEHENT. 
 
 Phnnl. 
 
 1. We will. 
 
 2. Vou will. 
 
 3. They will. 
 
 Tast. 
 
 riiirnl. 
 
 1. AV'e would. 
 
 2. You would. 
 
 3. Tiiey would 
 
 May. 
 Vresent, 
 
 rivniJ. 
 
 1. We may. 
 
 2. You may. 
 
 3. Tl 
 
 ley may. 
 
 Past. 
 
 riunil 
 
 1. We might. 
 
 2. You might. 
 
 3. 'J'lufv might. 
 
 Can- 
 PR esent. 
 
 Pliirxl. 
 
 1. We cau. 
 
 2. You can. 
 
 3. Th 
 
 iiev can. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. Wo could. 
 
 2. You could. 
 
 3. They could. 
 
74 
 
 KKOLISH (JHAMMAR. 
 
 k 
 
 
 \n 
 
 J 1, 
 
 n. 
 
 It 
 
 ') 
 
 If! 
 
 Must. 
 
 Tl.i.s vo.l. l.as no changes of ibrn. lor t.-nse, nuni- 
 'xr, or poison. 
 
 rONJL'OATION. 
 
 215. Conjugating a verb is stating aU its forms, so 
 as to show Its voices, mood,, lemes, numbers, and 
 2)e}'Ho>:s. 
 
 210. Tlie principal parts of a verb are : 
 
 I. Prm-nt Indicalirr ; \\. P>(.s'f Indiotfire ; 
 HI. l'a,^t Partlciph;. ■ 
 
 Th.' present indicative is the simj)!.' form or root, 
 from which the other parts are derived. 
 \ 
 
 Il-LUSTRATION. 
 rre..rrd. Pnst. J'a.f Pariinph'. 
 
 Write. Wrcje. Written. 
 
 217. A^erbs are divided into two great cla.sse.s, dis- 
 tinguished l.y the way ill which they form tho'pa.st 
 tense and the i>ast participle. These are : 
 
 I -Regular Verbs. II. -Irregular Verbs. 
 
 218. A Regular Verb is one whose past tense and 
 past participle are formed by adding , ,/ to the root 
 or present indicative ; as 
 
 Prr.^nit huJIcdirc. r,i,l Tndinilin'. P,,. • Part!rlph> 
 Walk. Walked. Walked. 
 
 J^'l )^'^'^'\* "-T^ on.ls iiw, this letter Ih omitted l.efore 
 e , as love loo-o ; Hn,l the vowel v. after a consonant. ih 
 changed mto . before .;l, a. ;.//,/. ,,///.,/. S<,nn. verbs ,.,ul n^' 
 
 in a consonant double the linal eouHonant before e,L as ro," 
 Tooocd. ' 
 
 Ju,^^\ the four thou.s.ind verbs in the English language, 
 all i)ut about one humlreo .an,! ^\H^■ f,..-... fi....^ i. ^^°. " 
 
 are'lvI^A".*''^^'*'"'""''' "lie. that is, I'.y sntiixing-;;/;a'ml'henee 
 
INFI.ECTIOK. 
 
 75 
 
 (r{. ) Till' Miillix ('/, wliirli JM the inflt-rtioii nf tin- Past Ttiisc; 
 \H a cniitrivctiou of tin; wunl i/i/. Tims, IdvciI is '1 love did, 
 or, as we still siij, ' I i/iif love.' 
 
 219 An Irregular Verb is one that forms its past 
 tense and past participle, or either of these parts, 
 in some other mode than by adding ed to the pres 
 ent indicative ; ii.s 
 
 I'l'fsriif Iiiilicdflrc. Past Indlrntlrp. Pf(f<f Parliri j)],'. 
 
 See, Saw, Seen. 
 
 Know, Knew, Known 
 
 For the list of Irregular Verbs, with their principal iiarts, 
 sei' piige 8(i. 
 
 220. Miiny gnimniarians use tlie terms Wade Vtrh-: 
 :iM(l Sinniij Verht<,'u\ j)lace of Re«;uliir and Frrfj^ular. 
 
 221. Weak Verbs include— 
 
 1. All regular verhs -that is, all verbs that form their pa^t 
 tense and past particiide by adding cil. 
 
 '1. 'V\u).w. that I'hange the vowel ot the root, and add (/ or (, 
 
 ■,\A tli'f, jlfil : cri'cji, crrpt ; tell, hdtl. 
 
 'i. Tiiiisj that simply shorten the vowel of the root, as ficd, 
 ltd. 
 
 4 Thosi; that have the same form in the thtee principal parts, 
 or sueh as merely change d of the present into / in the 
 l>ast tense and p^st participle; as cast, cut, haUd. 
 
 222. Strong Verl)s are suoli as form their past teniae 
 by c-lianging the vowel ol tlie ]»resent ; as. irr'ttr. 
 wiotf ; hr(/in, he(jan. 
 
 Tile p:ist i)articiple of Strong Verbs fin'merly ended in oi ; 
 as ilntnhfii, ifrirnb. 'I'his ending has for the most part been 
 dropjied. 
 
 ('ONJUGATIOX OF A KeG^LAR YkHH. 
 
 Tiie learner can omit tiie Passive Voice until he 
 has conjugated thi' verb 7'u JJ<'. 
 
7« 
 
 :t; 
 
 I 
 
 KVOLI.MJ? OHAMMAH 
 
 Prfncifal Parts. 
 
 Love Loved 
 
 INDH'ATiv , MOOD. 
 A«TI\K. 
 
 1. I love. 1. VVp 
 
 L'. Thon lovosf. 2. Von 
 •■i. He lovos. ;{. TIh'v 
 
 I'ASSIVK. 
 
 1. T :iiu lovt'd. 1. \Vt> 
 
 '2. Tljou art loved. 2. You 
 .*{. Jfe is loved. '.i. They 
 
 r>(^ Tens,'. 
 
 Loved. 
 
 love. 
 
 !U«' loved. 
 
 APTIVK. 
 
 I . [ loved. 
 
 I. I lovect. 1. We ) 
 
 '1. Tliou lovedst. 2. You ' loved. 
 
 .?. He loved. ;{. Tliev ) 
 
 1. r was loved. 
 
 I'ASSIVK. 
 
 I was loved. 1. \Y(. \ 
 
 2. Thou wast love.l. 2. Yon were loved. 
 
 3. He was loved. :\. Tliev I 
 
 Fiifurr Tcit.'^i'. 
 
 ACTIVK. 
 
 1. r shall or will love. 1. We \ ^\x;([\ 
 
 •J. Thou shilt ()/• wilt love. 2. You ^or will 
 .{. Fie shall or will love. 3. Thev j love. 
 
 PASSIVK. 
 
 1. I shall or will be loved. 1. We ) shall or 
 
 1'. Thou shalt or wilt be loved. 2. You > will be 
 
 
 o. xfiey j iuvtjd. 
 
JNFI.KCTIoN. 
 
 )•''/"■ II 
 
 t r>',fn-f T'li.^^. 
 
 \ri IVK. 
 
 I I haxo. ) 
 
 2. Thou liiist ;- loved. 
 
 a. He hi 
 
 18 
 
 W 
 
 Oil 
 
 They j 
 
 have 
 loveil. 
 
 r.VHHIVK. 
 
 I. I h 
 
 av«( 
 
 •2. Thou hust 
 X He hus 
 
 heeli 
 loNcd. 
 
 1. We 
 
 2. Vou 
 ;{. Thev 
 
 )l 
 
 hiive 
 ')eeii 
 oved 
 
 I'a.4 rcrhrf Tn,,se. 
 
 Al rivK 
 
 1. I had 
 
 \V 
 
 o 
 3. 
 
 Thou liiidst loved. 
 Ho hud 
 
 OH 
 
 2. Y 
 
 3. They 
 
 had 
 loved. 
 
 1. 1 had 
 
 '1. Thou hadst 
 
 3. He liad 
 
 I'ASSI VK. 
 
 l)e(!n 
 loved. 
 
 1. \V( 
 -'. V 
 3. Ti 
 
 ou 
 
 ley 
 
 had 
 
 heeii 
 
 loved 
 
 Fntitri' Perfi'i't Tciix''. 
 
 ACTIVK. 
 
 ) , 1 . We ) .shall 
 
 2. Thou Shalt w wilt y,"", 2. You have 
 11 P^^^^ 3. They | loved. 
 
 1. I shall or will 
 
 2. Thou shalt or 
 .). He shall or wi 
 
 I'A-SSIVK. 
 
 1. I shall or will | have 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt \ been 
 
 3. He shall or will ) loved. 
 
 1. We \ shall or 
 
 2. You , will have 
 
 3. They j been loved. 
 
 POTKXTIAL MOOU. 
 
 Teachers wlio prefer a simpler mode of conjiigatieu can 
 omit the Potential Mood ; and in pursing consider the aiixili- 
 
 arv' aa a urinoii^nl \r<.rV> ami flio vorli f r>11nAA.-iiiir ;LSI an intini" 
 ^. .- .- ... ^ , , . ^,. ., ... ^ 
 
 tive without the sign tu. 
 
78 
 
 KNUI.IslI (;k.\mm\fi. 
 
 i,:!-, 
 
 
 
 1 
 It 
 
 i- 
 
 I 
 
 I'ri-<i lit 'I'l iisf, 
 
 .SIN<Jt :(,AU. 
 
 I. I iiiiiy, can, or must 
 
 '-*. 'I'liuii iiijiycst, canst, <„• niiint ' |„vo. 
 
 3. Il(! nmy, cun, /*/• must j 
 
 I'l.URAr.. 
 
 I. Wo j 
 
 -. ^ oil • niity, can, ,,,- must lovi". 
 ;». TJioy j 
 
 I. I ni.iy, can, »>/■ mnst, j 
 
 •2. Tlu.u may.'st, vanst, m- nmst ■ l,e Unml. 
 
 .'. Ilo may, can or must j 
 
 1. Wc 
 
 ri.CKAL. 
 
 I 
 
 J.'. Von nmy, can, or must l>e loved. 
 •"». They I 
 
 Past Tr„s.'. 
 A'-firr. 
 
 'I- 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. I Jiiight, could, would, or should j 
 
 '2. 'Ihou mightest, couldst, wouldst, o/' f 
 
 sliouldst / 
 
 3. Jfe might, could, would, or should I 
 
 -lo 
 
 ve. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. VVo I 
 
 7 rp,""' J ""'^'''t. could, would, ./• should love. 
 o. I hey j 
 
INKLKcriON. 
 
 SIN(ilII,.\|t. 
 
 I. I ini;,'lit, 'diild, would nr sliotiM 
 
 -'. TlicM mi'ditcst, couMst, wuuldsl /^r 
 
 Sl)OU 
 
 Idst 
 
 }. Ilo tiiii/Iit, could, Wuuld, or .slioi'K 
 
 )- 1 o loved. 
 
 s 
 
 1. \y 
 
 ] 
 
 I'J.UUAI 
 
 N'ou - niiglit, could, would, nr should lie lovtd 
 
 Th.yj 
 
 Vri'sciit Vi'ij'ii'l '1 
 
 Clt.-H'. 
 
 Art 
 
 Iff 
 
 SIN(iUI..*:i. 
 
 1 . I uijiy, can, or uiust 
 
 I 
 
 Thou Miiiycst, ciinst, "/• iiiu.st havo loved. 
 i !>■ "nay, can, or must j 
 
 1. We 
 
 We ) 
 
 \ OK niav, can, oi 
 
 They J 
 
 T*tif<sirf, 
 
 I'LUIUL 
 
 must have loved. 
 
 .) 'IM 
 
 SINCULAK. 
 
 f uiay, can. or must j 
 
 riiou luayest, canst, or must have been loved. 
 
 Jle may, c*ui, or must ) 
 
 W(! 
 
 Vol 
 
 Thev J must 
 
 PLUIt' '.. 
 
 ) 
 
 vye I may, 
 
 Vou I can, - ':ive been loved. 
 
 A rfire. 
 
 .SINGULAR. 
 
 I iiiight, could, would, or should \ 
 
 Thou mightest, couldst, wouldst, or ( have 
 
 shouidsl I 
 
 He might, could, would, or should } 
 
 ioveu. 
 
80 
 
 i 
 
 ■t 
 ! 
 
 It I: 
 
 EXGLIf+H GRAMMAH. 
 PLURAL. 
 
 iuin;lit, 
 could, 
 
 We I 
 
 .l*"" (would, /I'^^ve loved 
 
 / slii^uld / 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 I might, could, would, n,- .should \ 
 
 Thou uiightest, couldst, wouldst <>r f , J,^ 
 shouldst 
 
 ;}. 
 
 He might, coald, would, or .should 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 might. 
 
 been 
 I loved. 
 
 3. 
 
 We 
 
 Y^uu 
 The> 
 
 ) iiiig'it, j 
 
 ' could, ( 
 
 [ would, 1 
 
 ; should ) 
 
 ,-have been loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PfHsod Tensr.. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 
 1. 
 
 o 
 
 3. 
 
 Actin . 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 It thou ■ love. 
 If he j 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 If we ^ 
 
 If yon >love. 
 
 If they 3 
 
 Act ice. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 If I j 
 
 If tliou loNetl 
 If he J 
 
 Piisxiri\ 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Ifl ) 
 
 2. If thou I be loved. 
 ;5. If he j 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. If we ) 
 
 2. If you ' be loved. 
 
 3. If they) 
 
 Pass'n'c. 
 SINGULAR. 
 '1. Ifl I 
 
 2. If thou > Were loved. 
 
 3. If he I 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 81 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. If we J 
 
 2. If you Moved. 
 
 3. If they J 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. If we I 
 
 2. If you '^ were loved. 
 
 3. If they j 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 2. Love (thou or ye) [ 2. Be (thou or ye) loved. 
 
 INFINITIVES. 
 
 Present. To love. 
 Perfect. To have loved. 
 
 To be loved. 
 
 To have been loved. 
 
 particiiles. 
 
 Preset, t. Loving. 
 Perfect. Having loved. 
 
 Past. Loved. 
 Having been loved. 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 Loving. Having loved. | Having been loved. 
 
 CONJUQATION OF THE VERB To Be. 
 
 Auxiliary of the Passive Voice, and of the Progressive 
 
 Form. 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 Am. Was. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 L I am, 
 
 2. Thou art, 
 
 Been. 
 
 3. Ho i.s. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 L I was, 
 
 2. Thou wast, 
 
 3. He was. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 \. We are, 
 
 2, You are, 
 
 3. They are. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 L We were, 
 2. You were, 
 3= Thev were. 
 
82 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 
 'i 
 
 II 
 
 u 
 
 •I 
 
 I 
 
 ['I 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. I shall or will be, 
 
 2. Thou shalt or v/ilt be, 
 
 3. He shall or will be. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. "We shall or will be, 
 
 2. You shall or will be, 
 
 3. They si jail or will be. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. I have been, 
 
 2. Thou hast been, 
 
 3. He has been. 
 
 1. We have been, 
 
 2. You have been, 
 
 3. They have been. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. I had been, 
 
 2. Thou hadst been, 
 
 3. He had been. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. We had been, 
 
 2. You had been, 
 
 3. They had been. 
 
 Futurj Perfect Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. I shall or will have 1. We shall or will have 
 
 been, been, 
 
 2. Thou shalt or wilt have 2. You shall or will have 
 
 been, been, 
 
 3. He shall or will have 3. They shall or will 
 
 ^^^^- have been. 
 
 Potential mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. I may, can, or must be, 1. We ") may 
 
 2. Thou mayest, canst, or must be, 2. You f can, 'or 
 
 3. He may, can, or must be. 3. They J must be. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 83 
 
 Past Teme. 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 1. I might, could, would, or 
 
 should be, l w^ 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1 
 
 2. Thou mightest, couldst, 
 
 wouldst.orshouldst be, ' ^°^^ 
 
 3. Ho might, could, would, 3. They 
 
 or should be. 
 
 might, 
 could, 
 would, or 
 should be. 
 
 PrespMt Perfect Teme. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. f may, can, or m-ist have 
 
 been. 
 
 2. Thou niayest, rxust, or 
 
 must have been, 
 
 3. He may, can, or must 
 
 have been. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. We "^'^y' 
 
 I can, or 
 
 2. You [ must 
 
 3. Thev i !'^^« 
 
 been. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. I might, could, would, ur should have been, 
 
 2. Thou mightest, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have 
 
 been, 
 
 3. He might, could, would, ir should have born. 
 
 1. W 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 1. We ) 
 
 -• lou -mi 
 3. They j 
 
 ght, could, wouhl, or should have 1 
 
 >een. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Ten -■». 
 
 SINGULAR. l-LURAL. 
 
 2. If you be, 
 
 2. If thou be, 
 
 3. If he be. 
 
 3. If thev be. 
 
I 
 
 84 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Past Teime. 
 
 PLUKAL. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. It I were, j. If we were, 
 
 2. If thou were or wert, 2. If you were, 
 
 3. If he were, 3. if they were. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Be (thou — you). 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. Present Perfed. 
 
 -^^ ^^> To have been. 
 
 Present. 
 Being, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 P'lst. Present Perfect. 
 
 Being, 
 
 Been, 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 Having been. 
 
 Having been. 
 
 The learner may revise sections U7-152, and learn 
 the passive roice of the verb to love. 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 Writ, the conjtojation, active and passive voices, of 
 the verbs — 
 
 Wash, Like, Study. 
 
 Model for the (.Conjugation of Irregular or 
 
 Strong Verbs. 
 
 To Write. 
 
 PUINCIPAI, lAkTS. 
 
 Write ; Wrote ; Written. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 85 
 
 Prrxftit Tcnsr. 
 \ 
 
 We 
 You 
 They 
 
 Thou writest 
 He writes 
 
 write. 
 
 INDICATIVE MUOD. 
 Pa^l T>'nsr. 
 
 He ) 
 
 We [► wrote. 
 You I 
 They J 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 I^ ) 
 
 ^V e [ have 
 You ( written. 
 Thev 
 
 Tliou wrotest 
 
 Past. Pcrp'ct. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 I 
 
 He 
 
 We I shall (will) write. 
 You I 
 They \ 
 Thou shalt or wilt write. 
 
 I 
 
 He 
 
 We 
 
 You 
 Thcu hast written. Thev 
 
 1 
 
 had 
 written. 
 
 I 
 
 He 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 Yyr^ ! shall (will) 
 
 You 
 
 have written. 
 
 He has written. Thou hadst written. Thou shalt or wilt have 
 
 ^ written. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Pr-.^p.if Perfect 
 Presnit Tense. Past Teii-ie. Tcmic. 
 
 "^ I He I He ,' may 
 
 A\e >ay We ^^ might We [have 
 
 Past Perfect 
 Tense. 
 
 He I might 
 We !- hi.v. 
 
 lou , write. \ou | write. You I written. You writt'u 
 
 IlieyJ Theyj They J They J 
 
 Thou mayest Thou mightest Thou mayest Thou mightest 
 
 ""'"*®- write. have written, have written. 
 
 Subjunctive Moon. 
 
 The subjunctive mood has the same form as the indicative 
 except in the second and third persons singular of the present 
 ana ci the present perfect tense. 
 
 (If) thou V. rite. (If) thou have written. 
 
 ^ ' esenf .(In he >rrit:. Present Perfect : (If) he hare written. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Write. 
 
 Infinitives. 
 Present : To write. Perfect : To have written. 
 
 PaRTK II'T,E.S. 
 
 Prcsrni : Vv'nting. Perlcet : Having written. 
 
m 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
 ^6 ENGLISH (JKAMMAR. 
 
 (iERUNDS. 
 
 Writing, Having written. 
 
 223. The passive voice is formed by placing the past 
 participle vriuni after the various parts of the verb 
 
 lo be. 
 
 List of Irrecjular, or Strong Verbs. 
 
 224. The followim^ list contains most of the Irregii- 
 hir Verbs in I^nglish, grouped according to the nature 
 of their internal chanires. 
 
 I. 
 
 Root-voirrl m<>,i;ji('il for P»sf, mid -en or -u luhkil for 
 
 PaUTICII'LF. 
 
 Ptrsnit Tense. 
 15i(l 
 
 P'orbid* 
 Bite 
 Jircak 
 
 Speak 
 Bear (carry) 
 
 Forbear 
 Bear (-rive birth) 
 
 Wear, swear, tear 
 Blow blew 
 
 Fly, grow, throw know 
 
 I\w Tense. 
 bade (bad) 
 
 bit 
 l)roke 
 
 bore 
 
 bore (bare) 
 
 Cbide 
 
 Hide 
 Clioose 
 Drive 
 
 Strive, thrive 
 Draw 
 Fat 
 Fall 
 Freeze 
 (tet 
 
 Forget, beget 
 Give 
 
 Forgive 
 Hold 
 Lie 
 
 chid 
 
 chose 
 diove 
 
 drew 
 eat or ate 
 fell 
 froze 
 got 
 
 gave 
 
 held 
 lay 
 
 Past Part. 
 bidden (bid) 
 
 bitten (bit) 
 broken (broke) 
 
 borne 
 
 born 
 
 blown 
 
 chidden (chid) 
 
 chosen 
 ilriven 
 
 drawn 
 
 eaten 
 
 fallen 
 
 frozen 
 
 got (gotten) 
 
 given 
 
 held (holdcn) 
 lain 
 
 (olTw! ^ '"''" '"Rented are conjugated like tlu.se wl.ich ther immediately 
 

 INFLECTION. 
 
 87 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Ride 
 Stride 
 
 rode 
 
 
 ridden 
 
 Rise 
 Arise 
 
 rose 
 
 
 risen 
 
 Shake 
 Take, forsake 
 
 shook 
 
 
 shaken" 
 
 Shrink 
 Smite 
 Write 
 
 shrank 
 smote 
 
 (shrunk) 
 
 shrunk (shrunken) 
 smitten (smit) 
 
 Steal 
 
 stole 
 
 
 stolen 
 
 Strike 
 
 Slay 
 
 Tread 
 
 struck 
 slew- 
 trod 
 
 
 struck (stricken) 
 
 slain 
 
 trodden 
 
 Weave 
 
 wove 
 
 
 woven (wove) 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 abode 
 awoke 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 abode 
 awoke 
 
 Root-vowel modified for Past Tense, and no suffix in 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Abide 
 Awake* 
 
 Wake 
 Begin 
 
 Spin (no a) 
 Behold 
 Bind 
 
 Wind, grind, find 
 Bleed 
 
 Lead, feed, breed 
 Cling 
 
 began (begun) begun 
 
 beheld 
 bound 
 
 bled 
 
 clung 
 
 Wring, swing, sting, sling, fling 
 
 Come 
 
 Dig 
 
 Drink 
 
 came 
 
 dug 
 
 drank (drunk) 
 Slink (no a), stink, sink 
 Fight 
 iMeet 
 Head 
 
 fought 
 
 Ring 
 
 Spring, sing 
 Shine 
 Shoot 
 Sit 
 
 Spit 
 
 met 
 read 
 rang (rung) 
 
 ■hone 
 
 shot 
 
 sat 
 
 beheld 
 bound 
 
 bled 
 
 clung 
 
 come 
 
 dug 
 
 drunk 
 
 fought 
 met 
 read 
 rung 
 
 shone 
 
 shot 
 
 •at 
 
 'Those markfid with ftu asterisk are also wtctk. 
 
[T 
 
 
 88 
 
 Present Tense, 
 
 Slide 
 
 Stand 
 
 Stick 
 
 Win 
 
 Hang* 
 
 Light* 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Past Ten^e. 
 
 slid 
 
 stood 
 
 .stuck 
 
 Won 
 
 hung 
 
 lit ^ 
 
 III. 
 
 PnM Part. 
 slid 
 stood 
 sttick 
 won 
 hung 
 lit " 
 
 Rovt-vowel mocVfieil, <uh1 -t or -d added fi>r Past Tense 
 and I'lsf Participle. 
 
 Present Tensr. Pas; Tciuie. 
 
 Bereave* bereft 
 
 Heavp, leave, cleave (sjdit) 
 Beseech besought 
 
 ^ Work,* think, seek, buy, bring 
 Catch caught 
 
 Teach 
 Creep 
 
 Weep, sweep, sleep, keep 
 Deal 
 
 Mean,* leap, dream* 
 Feel 
 
 Kneel* 
 Flee 
 Hear 
 Lose 
 Say 
 Sell 
 
 Tell 
 Shoe 
 
 crept 
 
 .lealt 
 
 felt 
 
 fled 
 
 heard 
 
 lost 
 
 said 
 
 sold 
 
 PcM Part. 
 bereft 
 
 besought 
 
 caught 
 
 crept 
 
 dealt 
 
 fcit 
 
 ti,;d 
 
 heard 
 lost 
 said 
 sold 
 
 shod 
 
 shod 
 IV. 
 
 Weak in P,i,-<t Tensr ■ ..tnmg in Past Pirticlple. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Heave (to throw) 
 
 Pi/sf Tense. 
 
 _ , . / 1: caved 
 
 faf»« laded 
 
 Mov n„wed 
 
 Sew,* show,* sow,* strew,* strow' 
 '^aw» sawed 
 
 Kive rived 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 hoven (heaved) 
 
 laden 
 
 mown 
 
 sawn 
 riven 
 
 ' riK.si niarkud witli an asteriik arc also rtKular. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 89 
 
 Prf/>rnf Tense. 
 
 Wax 
 
 Grave 
 
 iSwell 
 
 Heethe 
 
 Pirsi'nt Tense. 
 Bid (offer to buy). 
 
 Bet ♦ burst, cast, cut, durst, hit, hui-t, knit,* let, put, rid, 
 set, sh-d, shred, shut, slit, spread, thrust, wed,* beat (past 
 part, also heaten). 
 
 VI. 
 
 Some Peculiar Irregula.i Verbs. 
 
 Pn^snit Indicative. past. Past Part. 
 
 ^- Go, went, gone. 
 
 The past indicative lo'nt is not formed from the root (jo .- it 
 IS really a contraction of u-cvdaL the past tense of the "Saxon 
 verb vntdan, to wend or go ; thus, he ^t^f/lt his way = he vend- 
 ed his .vay. 
 
 2- Have, had, had. 
 
 The past tense had is a, contraction of /(nm/ (Anglo-Saxon 
 
 haefde). • 
 
 3- Do, did, done. 
 
 With othiT verbs, do is used (1) to express emphasis ; as, I 
 do believe. (2) In negation; as, I donot think so. (,S) In m- 
 terrogation : as, Do you travel by rail ? 
 
 Do, as used in the expression, How do you do ■ is a totally 
 different verb : this ' do' comes from the Anglo-Saxon verb 
 dvijnn, to profit or prosper. Hence, How do you do ? means 
 How do you jnosper f 
 
 Make, 
 
 made, 
 
 made. 
 
 I'asi Tense. 
 
 J 'a St Part. 
 
 waxed 
 grave<l 
 swelled 
 seethed 
 
 waxed (waxen) 
 graved (graven) 
 swelled (swollen) 
 seethed (sodden) 
 
 V. 
 
 
 No Infect Ion. 9. 
 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 Fast Part. 
 
 bid. 
 
 bid. 
 
 "Those marked with an asterisk are also regular. 
 
00 
 
 K\<;r,isn ouammah. 
 
 I',*; 
 
 The past tonse ' made' is a contraction of the Anglo-Saxon 
 macoat'., that is, maked. 
 
 225. All Veihs of recent introduction into the lan- 
 ,i;ii!i^e are of the minlnr or iceak Conjugation ; indeed 
 tlu! present tendency of the language is to convert 
 iirci^MiIar verbs into regalnr. 
 
 vir. 
 
 l)('ji'cl!i\' \'i'rhK. 
 
 220. Verbs that are d.^ticient in any of their simple 
 forms are called lljWtir,' Vrrh.^ ,• as/ 
 
 Pa-sf Part. 
 
 '{fiiiifirr. 
 
 Present Trnsr. 
 
 
 J'dsf Tense. 
 
 1. 
 
 shall 
 
 
 shouhl 
 
 *> 
 
 will 
 
 
 would 
 
 3.— 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 niiiy 
 
 
 ini<;ht 
 
 
 
 must 
 
 can 
 
 
 could 
 
 6. Wit 
 
 wot 
 
 
 wist 
 
 7. Owe 
 
 owe 
 
 
 ought 
 
 S. 
 
 (nie)-thii 
 
 ks 
 
 (me)-thon<'ht 
 
 9, List 
 
 list 
 
 
 ^ O 
 
 10. Weather-verbs, suoii as it //7v,v,v, snows, haih, rains, 
 thund.rs, etc may bo called ' uniiiersoual verbs,' because 
 tlie.v are used only in tlie tiiinl person sin<rular. The subject 
 If, IS very in.Ietiiute, being merely a term used to introduce 
 the statement. 
 
 XoTKs ON THK Defkctivk V'e1{)W. 
 
 1 ^lutll: Tln.s verb is foun.l only in the present and in the 
 past tense It oriuinal meanin- was to owe; thus we use 
 shoHbIm the sense or ought : he should do so he ou^^htio do 
 so Hence sindl as an auxiliary, implies obligation or neces- 
 sity, as opposed to free-will or determination expressed by 
 ■ii at.' "'. ^'''^ '""'I'tio'iid, expresses contingent futurity 
 m the 6ut>)unctivr, a future condition. ' 
 
 2. yr*/^ • This verb has two separate meanings and use.-^ : 
 (1) Asanauxdiary, it expresses ,letermination with respect 
 to the tutun.^ i-2) As a principal verb, it denotes the exerciae 
 ot u-ill : as, 1 >rill, be thou clean. 
 
 ijf- 
 
INKLEdlON. 
 
 91 
 
 (1) As an auxiliary, it in found only in the present and past: 
 as, Will, would. 
 
 (2) As a principal veil), it is regular and oomi.I.tt; : I ni/f, 
 Ull/rtl, ir'tUiil, to irill, ir'tlliutj. 
 
 irou/i/, in the conditional, cxpresMcis tnntinj;* nt <ktiiniiii;i- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Mill/ Tins vcrh JH fuiind only in th« prest-nt ,iiid juist ; 
 iMptTs., /»(///«/, and miijlihsl m mitilil:.! : I'.d |h.ih , .sin;;., pre- 
 .sent, iinni. In eonjunetidu with ivnotluT verl>. mnii fxpreascs 
 {\) firrmiss'ion ; uh. 'you "ur// <,'o ;' ('!) roiinssimi ; as, lie ,/,,,,/ 
 slay me, Imt I will truHt in him : (.•{) with the .sul.ject tnins- 
 pdsrd, (/f.s/Vc ; ;i8 iiKii/ they lie luipj.y. 
 
 4. Afii.-,f : Only one torm of this verl» is used ; it is the past 
 teiiso ; hut it is ivlao used with ;i pri.'scnt and a future simiili- 
 eation; as, 1 )inisf yi.dd noir ; | „nisf go lo-hiormir. Under 
 vaiious mo.lilifations, //(('.s/ expresses the general idea of /i-r-.s'- 
 sitji ; as, he must. go. With the first person this often im- 
 plies (i-.tn-ininatitm .- 1 must advanee (I am so situated that 1 
 am ild>'rmi)if<l to advance). When it relates to a fact, it im- 
 plies crtinntji ; as, It must ho so : I'JaN), tlwm reasonest well. 
 — Atfilison. 
 
 ii. Can, lAkv shdil iuu\ mni/, is found only in the present 
 and in the past tense. The / is inserted in oni'il in imitalioii 
 of iroiild and should, hut it is a false analogy. Tlie old form is 
 rowlf. Can, with another verh, expresses ability ; I viiu 
 draw I am abkUt {\\a.\v. 
 
 fi. Wit, means to Inoir (A.S, u-i/-an). It is used in the in- 
 finitive, to irif namely. The present, >n>t, is found repeatedly 
 in the English Bihle, in both iiuml)ersaiid in all persons : " I 
 u-of that he whom thou hiessest is blessed." "My master 
 u-ottrth not what is with me in the house." And in Sliak- 
 speare, " More water glideth by the mill than urotsiha miller 
 of." The past, u-iat, is also fimnd in the Englisli lliblc ; a.«, 
 " Mo.ses vist not that his face shone." Ami in Shaksiieare' 
 " And if I u-isf, he did ; but let it rest . " 
 
 7. Ove : The earlier meaning of this word is to avu, to 
 have ; as, to throw away the dearest thing he meed.—- 
 Shakspcare. 
 
 Like hiur, it is sdso used in the sense of gcf ; as, 
 Say from whence 
 
 You OlCe thjs .<«traU(rp inff>lli<irr.nr>o C/. « 7.- . - ~-. . 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 ^/ 
 
 W 
 
 P. 
 
 /q 
 
 A 
 
 ^ 
 
 .^I-^ 
 
 
 6 
 
 = 
 
 IJ4 
 
 1.25 
 
 1^ lys |2.5 
 ■^ 1^ 12.2 
 
 - lii Hi- 
 
 t ... mil 2,0 
 
 •^ III 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 /^ 
 
 e^ 
 
 ^c^: 
 
 t.<^ 
 
 V 
 
 ^.v^' 
 
 vj^ .>;■ 
 
 /: 
 
 
 /A 
 
 PhotDgrapJiic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 a>^ 
 
 Q^' 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 <» 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 W^ 
 
 rv^ 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4J03 
 
 

>?;5=^r ** -.;SH*^fr-^:%^qs^ 
 
 
 iy\ 
 
 IS 
 
 ^2 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 But what we have got from another we are indebted for ; 
 hence arises the modem sense of the word to be indebt- 
 ed ; as, 
 
 What we shall say we have, and what we owc.—Shakspeare. 
 
 Ougtit is the proper past tense of owe ; but ' I ought ' has 
 come to be used as an independent verb (like must, 
 without distinctions of person, number, or tense) 
 with the meaning, it is my duty (what is due by me) 
 The ordinary past of owe is owed. 
 
 8, Methinka : The prefix me is the vlative of the pronoun. 
 Ihe subject of ihiuLf is the clause follov/ing it. The word 
 thinkn means seems (A.S, thincnn, to seem). 
 
 9. List means to phase ; The wind bloweth where it listeth. 
 It IS found only in the present tense. 
 
 VI. — Various Forms of the Verb. 
 
 227. Besides the simple forms of the verb, many of 
 the Tenses assume other formH—Prorjressive, Emphatic 
 or Expletive, Interrogatire, Negative. 
 
 1. The Progressive Form, which expresses the action 
 as going ov, is made by putting the Present Participle 
 Active after the parts of the Verb Bo ; as, I am strik- 
 ing ; he has been striking, etc. 
 
 2. The Emphatic Form, which is confined to the 
 Tenses without auxiliaries, that is the Present and 
 the Past Indicative, is made by putting do or did be- 
 fore the Infinitive ; as, I do strike ; He did go. 
 
 We make the other Tenses emphatic by laying 
 stress on the auxiliary ; as. We mag see him ; He 
 m'^jld have come. 
 
 3. The Interrogative Farm is two-fold . 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 93 
 
 (a) The older and more formal question in the 
 Present and Past Indicative simply places 
 the Verb before the Nominative ; as, Luvest 
 thou me? Ask we for flocks these shingles 
 drvl 
 
 (6) The common way of asking a question, if 
 there be no auxiliary, places do or did be- 
 fore the Nominative ; as, Do I look pale 1 
 Did you ^e^ him 1 
 
 If there be an auxiliary, it is simply placed 
 first ; as, ^w / looking pale 1 Will you take 
 this 1 
 
 4, The Negative Form is also two-fold : 
 
 (a) The older and more formal way, when there 
 is no auxiliarj'^, places not after the Verb ; 
 as, I saio not ; He opened not his eyes. 
 
 [h) The common way of denying, if there be no 
 auxiliary, uses do or did with not after it, 
 between the Nominative and the Verb ; as, 
 I do not know him. 
 
 If there be an auxiliary already in the Tense, 
 not is inserted after it ; as, / shall not see him. 
 
 Synopsis of a Verb Conjugated. 
 
 1. Negativelv ; 2. Interrogatively ; 3. Negative' 
 Interrogatively. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. 
 
 Present. I do not move. 
 
 Present Pro- I am not mov- 
 
 gressive. inj?. 
 
 Past empha- I did not move 
 
 tin. 
 
 2. 
 Do I move ? 
 Am I moving ? 
 
 Did I move ? 
 
 Do I not move ?* 
 Am I not mov- 
 
 ing? 
 Did 1 not 
 move? 
 
94 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Past progres- 
 sive. 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect pro- 
 
 ijreHsive. 
 Past perfect. 
 
 Past perfect 
 
 progressive. 
 Future. 
 
 Future p/o- 
 
 gressive. 
 Future perf. 
 
 Future perf. 
 progressive. 
 
 1. 
 
 I was not mov- 
 ing. 
 I have not 
 
 " I)V<i(l. 
 
 I have not been 
 
 moving. 
 I had not mov- 
 ed. 
 I had not been 
 
 moving. i 
 
 I shall not { 
 
 move. j 
 
 I sliall not be 
 
 moving. | 
 
 I shall not have 
 
 moved. I 
 
 I shall not have ; 
 
 been moving, j 
 
 Was I moving ? 
 Have I moved ? 
 
 Was I not 
 
 moving ? 
 Have I not 
 
 moved ? 
 Have 1 not been 
 
 moving ? 
 Had I moved ? ; Had I not 
 
 moved ? 
 Had I not been 
 
 moving ? 
 Shall I not 
 
 move ? 
 Shall I not be 
 
 Have I been 
 moving 
 
 Had I been 
 moving ? 
 Shall I move ? ' 
 
 Shall I be ; 
 
 moving? I 
 
 Shall I have 
 
 moved ? 
 Shall I have 
 
 been moving? 
 
 moving ? 
 Shall I not have 
 
 iiioved ? 
 Shall 1 not have 
 
 been m ' zing y 
 
 lOTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 Present. - 
 
 1. 
 
 -^ ™^y' / not 
 can, ,• 
 
 must ) 
 
 move. 
 
 PaM. — I uiif^ht, 
 could, 
 would, 
 should 
 
 not 
 move. 
 
 May, ) 
 Can, [ 
 Must ) 
 
 Might, 
 Could, 
 Would, 
 Should 
 
 I move ? 
 
 I 
 
 move ' 
 
 May, 
 
 Can, 
 
 Must 
 
 Might, 
 Could, 
 Would, 
 Should 
 
 I not 
 move ? 
 
 I not 
 
 move ? 
 
 There is another mode of placitv,' the negative; thus: 'Jo not I 
 move?' contracted into ' Don't I move?' This runs through al! .he tenses. 
 A distinction exists : If the negative is befori' ' I,' the phrase ii conversa- 
 tional or familiar ; as ' Do not I move?' or ' Doi-t I move?' If the nega- 
 tive is after ' 1.' the i)hrase is energetic or emphatic : ' Do 1 7iot move "" 
 
 Pres. 
 Psrf. 
 
 I 
 
 may 
 can, > 
 must ) 
 
 f no 
 
 t have 
 
 Past I might, 
 Perf. could, 
 wo-.ild, 
 should 
 
 niovea. 
 
 not 
 
 have 
 
 moved. 
 
 - , ) I have 
 Can > 1 
 
 ) moved. 
 
 Might, 
 Could, f I have 
 Would, ( moved. 
 Should 
 
 May, 
 Can, 
 
 ) I not 
 V have 
 ) moved. 
 
 Might, 
 Could, 
 Would, 
 Should 
 
 I not 
 have 
 moved ? 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 95 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 
 Write the follovlnrj Verhs in the 3d person, Singular 
 Number, Active Voice, Indicative Mood. 
 
 Spc.ik ; think : eat ; ]aun;h ; sit ; elet-p ; cry. 
 Dress ; rise ; sit. 
 
 B. 
 Write the Principal Pakts 0/ the follow inrj Verbs. 
 
 Pall; loose ; sing; work ; shine ; tell. 
 Ride ; put ; steal ; catch ; mean ; wear. 
 Hurt ; come ; go ; play ; tear ; set ; fly ; htar. 
 
 C. 
 
 Put the verbs in the following Sentences frst into Past, 
 and secondly into Future Tenses : 
 
 1. The sun gradually sink-s below the horizon. 
 
 2. The grain is ready to he harvested. 
 
 3. The steam-ship is sailing across the Pacific Oci m. 
 
 4. I have come to say good-hy to my friends. 
 
 5. It thunders and lightens terribly in the valley of the 
 
 Platte River. 
 
 D. 
 
 Write the following Verhs in the Indicatirc Mood^ 3d 
 Person, Singular Number, Passive Voice : 
 
 Strike ; eat ; catch ; lose ; hear ; pet ; choose ; bind. 
 
 E. 
 
 In the foUoicmg Sentences, transform the Indicative 
 Moods into Potential Moods : 
 
 1. No one becomes a scholar without hard study. 
 
 2. Worth makes the man, and want of it the fellow. 
 
90 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 N 
 
 3. We are going to Yokahama io the great Btoam-ship 
 
 Colorado . 
 
 4. 1 ihall go to school to-morrow. 
 
 6. Right whale are not able to cross the line of the equator. 
 
 6. It was impossible for me to go. 
 
 7. Bv the death of his father it was made impossible for 
 
 him to remain at school. 
 
 P. 
 
 Change the folloiclng Verbs from the Activb to the 
 Passive voice, making the object of the active voice the 
 subject of the passive, and preserving the full sense: 
 
 1. Dr. Livingstone has explored a large part of Africa. 
 
 2. Paul Revere ci\rried to Lexington the news of the intended 
 
 attack by the British. 
 
 3. The first fresh dawn awoke us. 
 
 4. The people of Lynn manufacture great quantities of shoes. 
 
 5. No one has yet reached the North Pole, 
 
 G. 
 
 Tell the Mood of each Verb. 
 
 1. I hear thee speak of the better land. — Hemans. 
 
 2. I hear a knocking at the south entry.— Shakspeare. 
 
 3. Get on your nightgown, lest occasion call us 
 And show us to be watchers. — Shakspeare. 
 
 4. If my standard-bearer fall . . . . 
 
 Press where ye see my white plume shine.— J/acawtey. 
 
 6. Where shall poverty reside, 
 
 To 'scape the pressure of contiguous pride ^.—Ooldsmith. 
 
 6. Thy kingdom come, Thy will be done— English BihU. 
 
 7. They that be whole need not a physician, but they that 
 
 are sick. — JPragriwA Bible. 
 
mmmiM^M 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 97 
 
 8. He made his final sally forth upon the world, hoping all 
 things, believing r.ll things, little anticipating the 
 checkered ills in store for him.- Irving. 
 
 n. Would I deaciibe a preacher, such as Paul- 
 Were he on eartii- would hear, approve, and own, 
 Paul should himself direct me.—Cowper. 
 
 10. Part we in friendship fronj your land. 
 And, noble earJ, receive my hand.— •S'co^^. 
 
 H. 
 Tell the Moods and the Tense« in the following 
 
 Sentences : 
 
 1. The general had taken his departure before the mail 
 
 arrived. 
 
 2. If nothing unforeseen occur, 1 shall leave home to-morrow. 
 
 3. 1 have heard you s<-.y that we shall see and know our 
 
 friends in heaven. 
 
 4. Had any thing unforeseen occurred, he would have written. 
 
 5. Let all the ends thou aimest at be thy God's, thy coun- 
 
 try's. 
 
 6. To be or not to be, that is the question. 
 
 VIII. Uninflected Parts of vSpeech. 
 
 228. 'J'he Preposition, the Conjunction, and the In- 
 terjection have no inflections. 
 
 (a) The Preposition and the Conjunction express relations 
 which do not admit of their ben modified. 
 
 (b) The Interjection, from its nature as a mere outcry, is 
 free from all grammatical lestraints. 
 
-i" 
 
 , 1 
 
 'JS 
 
 EMOIJSH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Tabular Review. 
 
 Nnrnher.. 
 
 Nouns ami Pronouns have 
 
 Gender 
 
 ersou. 
 
 /(ISP 
 
 Adiectives u.^. 
 Adverbs ^*''^- 
 
 Verbs, have • 
 
 f Singular. 
 • ] Plural. 
 i Ma.sculine. 
 \ Feminine. 
 ( Neuter. 
 
 i' Firrt. 
 Second. 
 Third. 
 
 Nominative. 
 Possessive. 
 Olijctive. 
 
 C Positive. 
 .Comiiarlsoa, < Comparative. 
 (^ Superlative. 
 
 ,r . { Active. 
 
 Voice. . . . < T, 
 
 ( x-^assive. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Potential. 
 Mood - Su Djunctivt 
 
 In perative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 ' Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Present Perf. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 Future Perf. 
 r Singular. 
 \ Plural. 
 i First. 
 Person..., < Second. 
 ( Third. 
 
 Parsing. 
 229. Complete parsing comprises a statement of 
 the etymology and syntax of each word, the etsnnology 
 
 Tense. 
 
 Number. 
 
n^ 
 
 ' 
 
 7e. 
 
 5. 
 
 srf. 
 ct. 
 'f. 
 
 of 
 
 INFLKCriON. 
 
 99 
 
 inoludinj,' tl.o rln.«s, loihda^s, and Inffrrfion, and the 
 syntax including the re/afi,>,i or use of the word and 
 the r/ifr. 
 
 .\ TB.-Wh.ls anyparticula. order of l>ars,„g mny l.e in 
 Itself no Ijetter than another that might ho ,! ,Hen, it is im- 
 portant that some or.ler he a.lopte.l »n.l clu.oly folh.we.l. 
 1 he learner wj 1 thus be trainc.1 in a systematic way of doing 
 things ; he will acquire the habit of g„ing on from one sten 
 to another without being constantly prompted by such (,uo8. 
 
 whLh "i''^^^* »«'•«« with?" Ac, *c.; and he will know 
 when he ha* fully parsed the word. Further, by having a 
 uniform method of parsing in our schools, a new teacher will 
 not require to spend weeks in teaching children to unlearn 
 what his predecessor has taught them. 
 
 Order of Parsing. 
 1. — The Noun. 
 
 1. Sub-class. — Common or proper. 
 
 2. Number. — Singular or plural. 
 
 3. Person.— First, second, or third. 
 
 4. Gender. — Masculine, feminine, or neuter. 
 
 5. Case.— Nominative, possessive, or objective. 
 
 I" If nominative, name the verb of 
 I which it is the subject ; or state 
 I how used. 
 
 6. Relation, j If possessive, name the word w hich 
 it limits. 
 
 If objective, name the verb or i)ie. 
 position on which it depend.s. 
 
 7. Rule.— State the rule which regulates the form 
 
 _ or use. 
 
 2. — The Pronoun. 
 
 1. Sub-class. — Personal or relative. 
 
 2. 3, 4, 5. — Like the noun. 
 
100 
 
 KN<il.lSII (IKAMMAK. 
 
 m 
 
 ■■ » 
 
 if' V 
 
 t 
 
 ,l!l > 
 
 C (((). Niiino tilt' noun or luitect'ilent 
 
 i 
 G. IfKLATiox. -! {h). If iioiiiiiiMtivo, possessive, or 
 
 ohjective, proceed as with the 
 
 noun ot" tin' siime case. 
 
 ('^) State the rule for agreement. 
 
 (/'.) State the rule for the case. 
 
 7. Rules..., 
 
 3. TllK AlMFX'TITR. 
 
 1. Sunci.As.s. — t^ualitative, limiting', or demonstra- 
 
 tive. 
 
 2. DixsKEK.— Positive, comparative, or su])erlative. 
 
 — If not compared, say invari((hh\ 
 ?,. 1\k:.at>()N'. — Name the noun limited. 
 4. Ui'LK. — State the rule for the use of adjectives. 
 
 4. — The Adveub. 
 
 1. Subclass. — Sim[)le or relative. 
 
 o Degree. — State the degree only when compara- 
 tive or .superlative. 
 
 3. Relation. — Name the verb, adjective, or ad- 
 
 verb which it describes. 
 4 KuLE. — State the rule for the use of adveibs. 
 
 5. — The Verb. 
 
 I (r/). Transitive or intransitive. 
 
 1. Sub CLASS.— | ^^.^ Regular or irregular. 
 
 Principal Parts Present, Past, I'ast Paiticiple. 
 
 2. Voice. — Active or passive. 
 Indicative, potential, subjunctive, or 
 
 I 
 
 3. Mood. — \. infinitive. 
 
 j participle or gerund. 
 
iNKLKCTlON. 
 
 101 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 , ™ I Present, jmst, future, [^resent perfect, 
 
 / past perfrct, or future perfect. 
 
 5. NuMBEH. — Singular or plural. 
 
 G. Person. — First, second, or Jiird. 
 
 7. Relation. — Name the subject. If infinitive, 
 
 state how governed. If participle, 
 name the noun to which it relates. 
 If gerund, state case Jind govern- 
 me. t. 
 
 8. Rule. — State the rule for the agreement or 
 
 government. 
 
 6. — The Pkeposition. 
 
 1. Office. — Name the words which it 'oins. 
 
 2. Rule. — State the rule for use of the prepositions. 
 
 7. — The Conjunction. 
 
 1. Subclass. — Co-ordinative or sub-cniinative. 
 
 2. Office. — State the clau.ses or words connected. 
 
 3. Rule. — Give the rule for the use of conjunctions. 
 
 8. — The Interjection. 
 Simply state that it is an interjection. 
 
 Abbreviations. 
 
 In written parsing use the following abbreviations : 
 
 Active, act. Conjunction, corj. 
 
 Adjective, adj. Demonstrative, demon. 
 
 Adverb, adv. Future, fiU. 
 
 Antecedent, ant. Gerund, qer. 
 
 Apposition, app. Imperative, imper. 
 
 Comparative, compar. Indicative, indie. 
 
 n/\ 
 
1U2 
 
 KNULIHII (mAM',:\K. 
 
 PiejKisuion, firoit. 
 Prosent, preg. 
 Pronoun, pron. 
 Qnalitativ'e, qnal. 
 Quantitative, qiiaut. 
 Kegular, rvij. 
 Relative, rel. 
 Singular, sIikj. 
 Subject, sab). 
 Subjunctive, suhjnuc. 
 Sui)erlative, suf)erl. 
 Transitive, traits. 
 
 Infinitive, inf. 
 Interjection, iuterj. 
 Intrannitive, infmtis. 
 Irreyuhir, /V/-^/. 
 Limiting, firnit. 
 Nominative, uimi. 
 Objective, ohj. 
 Part ciple, pati. 
 Passive, /xins. 
 iMiiriil, /;/. 
 Positive, />o)4. 
 Possessive, po/is. 
 Potential, fiot. 
 
 Various uses of a word. 
 230. Ih classifying words the learner must remem- 
 ber that the way in which a word is used determines 
 the cla.ss to which it belongs, and as the same word 
 may be used in different ways it is variously classified 
 according to its use. Thus the word cabit may be 
 u.sed, 
 
 1. As a noun — A t/rt^at calm fell on the sea. 
 
 2. As an adjective — !t was a calm, Irright day. 
 
 3. As a verb- -I did it to cahn his fears. 
 
 The following words are variously classified : — 
 But is originally a preposition, derived from the 
 
 imperative phrase be-on t — that is, take out, or except. 
 
 It is also used as an adverb and a conjunction; as. 
 
 Prep. All b}d him had ^edi=except. 
 Adv. I have bat three \eit=zonly. 
 Conj. He heard it, but he heeded not. 
 
 For and Since are also prepositions, conjunctions, 
 or adverbs, according to their use. 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 103 
 
 Adv. 1 was called /,r. I toM him long nnce. 
 
 Prep. Ig that for me ? Sincp his arrival. 
 
 Conj. He went, /or he AVn^e you are here, stay. 
 
 was ready. 
 Ab07e. Adverb. He lay abuce. 
 
 Prep. He was ranked above me. 
 
 NoTK.— TLe use of above as an adjective, as, the abow re- 
 marks, though condemned by grammariaDs, seems to he firmly 
 established. 
 
 . I shall call in an hour. 
 He could not hold t'n his horse, 
 or Prep. He fell off (his hor^e). 
 The off leader strained his leg. 
 I have no silver. 
 
 In the answer nc=not; TTe is no better. 
 You may stay, as it is raining. 
 My book is as clean as (conjunction) 
 
 yours. 
 An only son. 
 I have only two. 
 The very thing. 
 You are very late. 
 I saw him then. 
 Am I then to stay 1 
 
 Though he slay me, yet will I trust him. 
 Are you sleeping yet / 
 
 '\ Strictly adjectives of diial meaning, 
 >• these words are used as Assistant 
 3 Conjunctions. 
 
 '\ These adverbs are frequently used as 
 > conjunctions to introduce a new 
 ) sentence or paragraph. 
 
 
 In. Prep. 
 
 
 Adv. 
 
 
 0^ Adr. 
 
 3m- 
 
 Adj. 
 
 nes 
 
 No. Adj. 
 
 ord 
 
 Adv. 
 
 5ed 
 be 
 
 As. Conj. 
 Adr. 
 
 
 Only. Adj. 
 
 
 Adv. 
 
 
 Very. Adj. 
 
 
 Adv. 
 
 the 
 ^pt. 
 as. 
 
 Then. Adv. 
 Conj. 
 
 Yet. Conj. 
 
 
 Adv. 
 
 
 Either. 
 
 
 Neither. 
 
 
 Both. 
 
 ns. 
 
 However. 
 
 7 
 
 Meanwhile. 
 
 
 Moreover. 
 
 I 
 
L->r' 
 
 u4i 
 
 104 
 
 ^^' 
 
 '^^. 
 
 
 ■:0v 
 
 I 
 
 O 
 
 60 
 
 •a 
 o 
 
 ENGLISH (;KAMMAR. 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 H-4 
 
 
 mJ 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 , ^ 
 
 ►J • -^ 
 
 
 
 . NM N-* 
 
 • • • ^ • ■ ■ i> 
 
 1 
 
 
 -;_ „^_>i><i<5 
 
 ^><^ >< l:::>^E^ >i 
 
 
 ■*J 
 
 
 
 
 _ -* «» 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 O KJ TS 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 -M •»* ~ 
 
 'A 
 
 
 
 
 >> 
 
 1 " 
 
 
 a *- .« 
 
 CC 
 
 c 
 '< 
 
 
 3 ^ u^ % 
 
 1 
 
 t) 
 
 2 g'.v'^ -^r i 
 
 
 
 dv:^^.^^ ri -^ J 
 
 1 
 
 u 
 
 ^ . 5: - 
 
 
 K 
 
 ? .-s 1 t £ R 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 v^ ^ S X 
 
 . (u . .t: . ^ ,, 
 ,^ « •:r'-3 - - - 
 
 '5 aes i 
 
 gord. by 
 limits SU7 
 governed 
 (undert 
 joins /«» 
 and {J(77n 
 agrees wi 
 subject J 
 limits u-a 
 governed 
 governed 
 
 agrees wii 
 
 
 
 ou ej X 3 
 
 
 
 
 -d 
 
 
 
 r-- 
 
 .£: r-^- 
 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 ^ -*^ 
 
 ^ tC ij O 
 
 
 7, 
 
 o 
 
 00 _ to 
 
 
 
 ►4 
 
 
 
 
 U X 
 
 t^ k. •. . k ^ 2 h 
 
 
 '/; 
 
 • - ^- rt 
 
 •'-■-" >i; o ""L-.S"" 
 
 
 NH 
 
 -a 5 =1 
 
 J5 -a o;^ .a'tt-^^ 
 
 
 
 ^J c 
 
 -»j +i c ts +» a -^ 
 
 
 
 1^ •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 to i"l OD «" . «4 &r 5 f CO 
 
 >■ 
 
 
 
 .S 5.S -^ t3 § .S -i "S .S 
 
 v: 
 
 as 
 
 » 
 
 o 
 
 cc 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 IT. 
 
 prop. 
 
 (1) I'.itra 
 
 (2) itreg 
 manner 
 time 
 limit, 
 qual. 
 
 com 
 
 demon. 
 
 com. 
 
 co-ord. 
 
 (1) trans 
 
 (2) in eg, 
 limit, 
 com. 
 
 (1) trcns. 
 
 (2) reg. 
 
 . 1 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 S'f ±' >3-^ 
 
 2^§ § i ^5 i£ 
 
 
 5 
 
 O 3j T^ "3 'S '^ 
 
 
 
 S > c« ?• o! e« 
 
 acsc u > esa >a, 
 
 C 
 
 b 
 ^ 
 
 ..r> +J 
 
 
 ti 
 
 
 to L, b 
 
 
 -> 
 
 X '3 
 
 = « 4) ^ 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 9i = « = = ri 
 
 t^ ^^ I J M • ^^ CD 
 
 
 i 
 
 •-sfc. ►<uca,a::35 a +s <«ic 4S^| 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 105 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 03 
 
 0) 
 
 60 
 
 C 
 
 B 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 c>i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 4J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 >5 
 
 
 >■ 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 1— 1 
 
 •> 
 
 ^<«i 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 '-" >— !>■ •— 1 
 
 1— 1 •> 1— 1 -^ 
 
 >< ^- ^ >< >i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 x' 
 
 
 Ik 
 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 ■< 
 
 
 Ut 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 
 
 
 , **• 
 
 > 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 <J 
 
 
 
 ■Ki 
 
 «3 
 
 z; 
 
 •w <j 
 
 •^ c.- 
 
 ^ . 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 o 
 
 ■^ "^ 
 
 J^ -^ ■> -fi 
 
 
 s^ 
 
 
 
 
 •~ S» V, V 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 < 
 
 5?.-^" 
 |l^« 
 
 e s s 
 
 •:' •*■ ^ c 
 
 
 
 
 nJ 
 
 Si SJ V5 
 
 I" ^'3 ~ S 
 
 -J 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 S s 2 rt ~ " 
 = .5 s f* .5 3 
 
 S C S. J3 K-C 5 
 
 >» 
 
 Wi 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 i?11 
 
 
 5 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 '" ,« c -2 
 
 .5's >.S 
 
 C .5 ® O 
 
 •<t rr, ^ ^ W -, 
 
 n 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 si 
 
 
 
 .s,;r tc.S, 
 
 a JS X ^ 1— 1 ■<— < 
 
 cs — CD rt .— , rt J2 
 
 tJO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 s 1 
 
 § 1 
 
 e .-' '/ 
 
 C .3 CO 
 
 o - o 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 Si; 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 r 
 
 c 
 
 
 c 
 
 ■*i 
 
 ^ i' 
 
 4^ ^ "*~* 
 
 4^ 
 
 s 
 
 • ^4 
 
 
 H 
 
 9 
 
 3 . i^' 
 
 ^ 't; r 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 i/ 
 
 f3 k"^ 
 
 ^ -■ ^ 2 
 
 r-* 1 
 
 bo 
 
 
 U 
 
 s 
 
 .5: . 
 
 s ^ P 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 
 b 
 
 •"O 
 
 'S^ 2 
 
 
 c 
 
 •fH 
 
 
 I— 1 
 
 Sm4 
 
 .5 - c4 
 
 fc. _ rt — 
 
 
 {2 
 
 (4 
 
 
 
 
 •" ■>r a. • — 
 
 "♦J 
 
 PU 
 
 C 
 
 
 5d 
 
 > ^^■^"■^ i 
 
 
 tc 
 
 «<-■ 
 
 
 .S-Hh 
 
 r- .S -~^ 3 ® 
 
 .5 S c.s & 
 
 .SaS.S 3. 
 
 'S 
 
 o 
 
 yj 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 OI 
 
 
 
 
 
 1j 
 
 S 
 
 
 -W 
 
 «• «j 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 O 
 
 n 
 
 S g (3 
 
 
 iili i 
 
 q 
 
 
 
 « o o 
 
 -§s-^^§-s 
 
 _5-_. 
 
 
 ■A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 &- . s .• 
 
 .^5-2 .-^-S" 
 
 . S^ a = 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 _) 
 
 4J •!— s 3 > 
 
 ■^— ■-' t^ O C 
 
 w^ 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 »:-:= 0-3 
 
 r^' O 3 "3 O 
 
 — 2 i) t. ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 9-1 cj S c« 
 
 <S C > e4 ii 
 
 c," C > a ^1 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 01 
 
 
 
 
 q; 
 
 O 
 
 
 b 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 13 « 
 
 13 
 
 « « t- 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 « S ^ '? -w 
 
 « g t 'S 
 
 o 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 i -n -«-■ (4 f> 
 
 ■4J UU > M C3 
 
 
 • — ■' 
 
106 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^:^j 
 
 #* 
 
 * i. 
 
 I* 
 
 hi 
 
 ti ^ 
 
 pi ■ 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 Sentences for Parsing. 
 The relation and the ruh can be omitted at this stage. 
 
 A. 
 
 1. Holy and heavenly thoughts shall counsel hei.-Shak- 
 
 2. Tlien rose from sea to sky the wild farewell.— 5j/ron. 
 
 3. The better part of valor is discretion. -^JAa/t^p^are. 
 
 4. The boy stood on the burning deck, 
 Whence all but him had fled. —Hcmam. 
 
 5. The steed along the drawbridge flies. —;S'co«. 
 
 '■ ^ Tol^bTt afthi?^ '^;-^' ^^™ for not getting out some 
 ^..t . T • \*'™^. *'™^ ^^ ^i*" P"* tia hand in his 
 r-^cket and give him sixpence. -Spectator. 
 
 7. I long for a repose which ever is the same.- Word^oorth. 
 
 8. Thou knowest my praise of nature most sincere 
 And that my raptures are not conjured up 
 
 lo serve occasions of poetic pomp 
 
 But genuine, and art partner of them aW.—Cmvper. 
 
 9. There were two fathers in this ghastly crew.-Byron. 
 
 10. When he read the note from the two ladies he shook »-•« 
 
 the' u'tmoi^'"^^^' *'l* ^^ ^^^'^ «^ fijort de'rand;^^^ 
 the utmost circumspection.— G^oW^j^A. 
 
 B. 
 
 1. The gushing flood the tartans dyed.— ^fo«. 
 
 2. None but the brave deserves the f&ir. —Dryden. 
 
 3. The nurse sleeps sweetly, hired to watch the sick 
 Whom snoring she diatarhs. —Cowper. 
 
 4. Forth in the pleasing spring thy beauty walks. -Thomson. 
 
 5. Not to know Pie argues yourself unknown.— iTiZ^on. 
 
 6. The night had closed in hefnrp f.h» nn„fl;. 4. -_ +i-- v--. 
 
 begaa.-Macaulay. '""■ '''' '^^ ^""^" 
 
INFLECTION. 
 
 107 
 
 7. When kindness had his wants supplied, 
 And the old man was gratified, 
 
 Regan to rise his minstrel pride. — Scott. 
 
 8. . .t every draught more large and large they grew, 
 A bloated mass of rank, unwieldy woe ; 
 
 Till sapp'd their strength, and every part unsound, 
 Down, down they sink, and spread a ruin round. — Mac- 
 aid ay. 
 
 9. The friends thou hast and their adoption tried, 
 C^rapple them to thy soul with hooks of steel ; 
 But do not dull thy palm with entertainment 
 
 Of each new-hatch'd undedged comrade. — SliMkupeart. 
 
 I. 
 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Syntax. 
 
 231. Syntax (from Greek sun, together, and taxis, a 
 putting in order) treats of the Agreement, Govern- 
 ment, and Arrangement of words in sentences. 
 
 As the English language has l)ut few inflections, 
 words have but little variety of form dependent on 
 agreement and government, and the possibility of error 
 in this respect is proportionally limited. 
 
 Syntax of the Noun. 
 
 I. — How TO Parse Nouns. 
 
 232. There are eight functions that a Noun may 
 perform in a sentence. 
 
 It may be — 
 
 1. Subject of a Verb ; 
 
 2. Complement of an Intransitive or a Passive 
 
 IT 1 
 
 V eru 
 
IH" 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^B |4 
 
 tl 
 
 ^^^ ENGLISH GHAMMAR. 
 
 3. Object of a Transitive Verb ; 
 
 4. In the Objective Case after a Preposition ; 
 
 5. In the Possessive Case ; 
 
 6. In Apjjosition ; 
 
 7. Case Independent ; 
 
 8. Case Absolute. 
 
 J.OW to parse it .h.Tlnl'y o/^tLs "rd'tfo™^''' r/,i' ^'°" 
 noun represents the noun it^nay perfon^r^.f tut tio^- 
 
 Noun, Subject of a Verb. 
 
 Rule I. -The subject of a Verb is in the Nomina- 
 tive Case. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 My uncle is here ; he came yesterday. 
 Model for Parsing. 
 Uncle.. A noun, common, singular, third, neuter, 
 nominative, subjective of the verb " is," 
 according to Rule I. 
 
 ^"^ ^ pronoun, personal, singular, third, mas- 
 culine, nominative, .subjective of "came,'' 
 according to Kule I. 
 
 thf'SfecWve'Sse' "l!^^ »f «" i..«.utive, i, construed in 
 ' '""^ 4"''i-» piiiocivcd nim to be an en- 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 109 
 
 thusi.ist. This construction is not, strictly speaking, English 
 it ia ;vn imitation of a Latin idiom. Our English iiTi 
 
 — — p.._ lom won 
 
 turn such smtoncfs thus : * The queen perceived that Cuhnnl 
 
 Id 
 
 7/^ 
 
 •rns,' ' that he v<is,' etc. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 Par.-e (lie Subjects in the folio n hi ij sentences : 
 
 1. Water consists of two t^r-ises. 
 
 2. Napoleon went to Egypt with forty sail of the line. 
 0. Life's but a walking shadow. 
 
 4. The bujile's note and cannon's roar the deathlike silence 
 
 broke. 
 
 5. Seasons ret>iri>, but not to me returns 
 
 Day, or the sweet approach of even or morn, 
 O • sifiht of vernal bloom, or summer's rose, 
 Or Hocks, or herds, or human face divine, 
 — Milton. 
 
 233 — Eule I. is often vio*. '-.ed by using the objective. 
 
 Illustration 
 
 May John and me bring so'.ne water, should be, 
 May John and / &c. 
 
 This is a man whom I think deserves encourage- 
 ment. 
 
 Explanation.— Transposing the parenthetical expression, 
 I think, we have the sentence, ' I think this is a man whom 
 deserves encouragement.' You see, of course, that this is 
 wrong : 7vhom is designed to be -nbject of the verb dcHf.rvis, 
 and hence it should be icho deserves. 
 
 234, Violations of this rule most frequently occur 
 in elliptical sentences when the verb is omitted. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1 T^ 
 
 i- 11 
 
 cf lis Ljiii US ii'fi t — i^nok 
 
 sfJtatc. 
 
110 
 
 ENOLISII GRAMMAK. 
 
 2. She sufTers hourly more than me.—Sjn'/f. 
 
 3. The imtions not so blessed as thio.—Thnmson. 
 
 4. It is not for such as lu; to sit with the rulers of 
 the land— ,s.Vr Vuilter Scoff. 
 
 5. She was neither better nor wiser than you cr me, 
 — Thackcnnf. 
 
 Ex-LAVATiov -The above sentences, eaoli by a famous 
 
 author, i.U violate the rule. The blunder beccnies very plain 
 
 when we supply the ellipsis-thus, (1) « as tall as me am,^ 
 
 (2) more than n.e ^o.' (3) 'not so blessed as thee art' U) 
 
 such as us are,' (5^ than you or me arc' 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 Correct the foiioir!vg.~\. Is James as old as me? 
 2, Such a man as him cou'd never be President. .;. 
 He runs faster than me. 
 
 235. When a noun designed to be the subject of a verb 
 is employed, see that that noun has a verb of which 
 it is the subject. 
 
 Illustration. 
 " Two substantives, when they come together, and 
 do not signify the same thing, the fermer must be in 
 the genitive case." 
 
 Explanation.— The writer begins with the noun ' substan- 
 tives, which IS so placed that it can be only the subject of a 
 verb ; but, before he gets through, the word ' former' comes 
 in as the subject of the verb must be. The word of at the 
 beginning of the sentence—' 0/two substantives,' etc.— would 
 rectify the error. 
 
 236. Do not use both a noun and its pronoun as the 
 subject of the same verb. 
 
 In poetry the subject is sometimes repeated in the form of 
 tt prunouu u.jeu aioug with the noun ; as. The count h« was 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 HI 
 
 left to th3 vulture and hountl ; To be or not to be [phraso sub- 
 ject], that [pronoun-subject] is the question. But this is not 
 allowable in prose except where special emphasis is designed. 
 
 * M> father he laid that I must go' is incorrect. We might 
 however, say, ' A man that wears the livery of heaven to 
 serve the devil id, he is not to be trusted,' because hero 
 special emphasis is desired. 
 
 Predicate No*Tiinative. 
 
 Rule II. — A noun or a pronoup used as the comple- 
 ment of an intransitive or a passive verb, and referring 
 to the same thing as the subject, is in the nominative 
 
 caset 
 
 Illfjstration. 
 
 Tennyson is a poet. 
 
 He was made poet-laiiri'nte. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 
 Poet. — A noun, common, singular, third, masculine, 
 
 nominative, complement of ' is,' according 
 
 to Rule II. 
 Poet-laureate. — A noun, common, singular, third, 
 
 masculine, nominative, complement of 'was 
 
 made,' according to Rule II. 
 
 Note. — This nominative is often called i)xe predicate-nomi- 
 native. 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 Parse the Predicate-Nominatives. 
 
 1. He was a man, take him for all in all, I shall not look 
 upon his like again. 
 
 2. Our world is a planet. 
 
 3. It was he that secured our liberty. 
 
 4. Though a prisoner, Mary seemed still a quttn. 
 
 6. King William of Prussia became Emperor of Germany in 
 1871. 
 
112 
 
 KN(JLIHH 'JKAMMAR. 
 
 ^^11 ^ 
 
 I, 
 
 237. Do not violate Rule 11. by using the objective 
 case 6f the pronoun instead of the nominative. 
 
 In violation of this rule wc often I.e«r, in the onlinarv con- 
 
 IS It . »,.' > It was krr / « It is //i^-m .•• • It is ,/.».' In.h-e.| 
 Hom,. gra,«mar,n„8 (as Dem Alfor,l and Mr. Bain) .hfe.i.l 
 MHri'^Il '^ 7 u iowal.le l.»t there seems t.. be no HuIKcient 
 . .iHt.h.-atM M for these wnle departures from the re;r„lar .syn- 
 tax of our hm^niage. ■' 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 r<>h>f out fhr viohiiiovH of this rule in the following ■ 1 It is 
 Zl r.r; r ^"" "^^ ^" ^V^ ^''^'- ~^^'^'^-n- ^ U there is 
 
 SPK(7FAL RuLK. -A noun or pronoun used as the 
 complement of the infinitive mood of an intransitive 
 verb, or of the infinitive mood of a transitive verb in 
 the passive voice, agrees in case with the noun or pro- 
 noun that precedes the infinitive referring to the same 
 thing. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. We know him to be a good man. 
 
 2. I supposed the man to be him. 
 
 3. He wished Brown to bo chosen m.ayor. 
 
 In sentence (1) man is in the objective case, a<rreeinLr with 
 S-dr ""'""" ^'^ '-.'/--is in the objeettve. agreeing 
 Norx Object of a Ti:ans-tive Veru. 
 
 andTn".7^^'"'™^^' *''\* transitive verbs are incomplete, 
 make f?n ,!n^ ""^"t, "' *^' 'T'"^^''^ °^ ^ "^^-^ i" ^'^'^^ to 
 
 S a trl" > • ?■' ",?^ *'^** ^^- ""'"^ *« the complement 
 ot a transitive verb is called its ohJccL 
 
 KULE III. — ijijjQ obieot of fl. f.ratiaif i«.a «.«^K ,•„ ;„ 4.i.a 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 113 
 
 Illustration. 
 The hunter blew his horn. 
 The dogs heard him. 
 
 Model i-or Parsing. 
 Horn. — A noun, common, singular, third, neuter, 
 objective, object of the verb * blew,' accord- 
 ing to Rule III. 
 
 Him. — A pronoun, personal, singiilar, third, mascu- 
 line, objective, object of ' heard,' accord- 
 ing to Rule III. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 Parse the Subjects and Objects !n the tuUowlng 
 
 iSentences. 
 
 1. Their furrow oft the stubborn glebe has broke. — Gray. 
 
 2. Beaux banish beaux, and coaches coaches drive. — Pope. 
 
 3. The gushing flood the tartans dyed. — Scott. 
 
 4. The plowman homeward plods his weary way. — Oray. 
 
 5. Me he restored to mine office, and him he hanged. 
 
 6. Whom have you seen ? 
 
 Note 1. — Some transitive verbs admit of two ob- 
 jects, one direct and one indirect. 
 
 Illustration. 
 He promised him (indirect) a hnife (direct). 
 
 Note 2. — Verbs that admit of two objects in the 
 active voice are followed by the direct object in the 
 passive voice. 
 
 8 
 
n- 
 
 lU 
 
 ENGLISH ORaMMAR. 
 
 gg,.j ,•«.■>•; 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Ho was promised apples, (direct object) , tlieii he 
 was denied them (direct object). 
 
 23a Rule III. is often violated by using the nomi- 
 native case of the pronoun instead of the olyective 
 case. 
 
 Note.— This rule ia seldom violated when the pronoun im- 
 mediately follows the verb. It is only when the object is at 
 Bome distance from the verb, or when the sentence is elliptical 
 tliat the nominative form of the pnmoun is liable to be used, 
 •He that Hatters too much, do not believe,' for 'him that 
 flatters, etc. Here him is the object of the verb 'believe.' 
 
 , Exercise 35. 
 
 Point out the violations of this rule in the following : 
 
 1. My father allowed my brother and l to accompany him. 
 
 2. Let you and she advance. 
 
 3. Who should I meet but him. 
 
 4. I told somebody, but I do not know who. 
 
 NOUN WITH A PREPOSITION. 
 
 Rule IV.— A noun or pronoun depending on a pre- 
 position is in the objective case. Or -prepositions 
 govern the objective case. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 And here uj>on the ground I sit, 
 I sit and sing to them. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 Ground.. A noun, common, singular, third, neuter, 
 objective, depending on the preposition 
 
 " unon." aoo.nvfhucr fn Tl^^]a TV 
 i . -J — . . . 
 
 F 
 I* 
 
Tv':^:jm,r^^ 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 115 
 
 Them 
 
 ..A pruaouu, personal, plural, third, common 
 gender, objective, depending on the preposi- 
 tion " to," according to Rule IV. 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 Par.^e the Nouns (jocerned h,j Prepositfons, and the 
 N(jUN Subjects and Noun Objects in the 
 follncuKj Sentenc's : 
 
 1. The Hniiling daisies blow beneath the sun. 
 
 2. The army orossed the river by a bridge made ..f pontoons. 
 
 3 Forth in the pleasing spring thy beauty walks. — 7V«wt. 
 son. 
 
 4. He went to California on fccount of hia i^calth. 
 ;".. Across his brow his hand he drew. 
 <). My mind to me a kingdom is. 
 
 Correct the foUowlmj : 1. Between you and I, all is 
 not gold that glitters. 2. Who servest tliou under < 
 —iShakspeare. 3. So you must ride on liorseback 
 after we. 
 
 Noun in the Possessive Case. 
 
 IUlk v.-a noun or a proncun used to limit another 
 noun signifying a different thing, is in the possessive 
 case. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Vainly the fowler's eye 
 Might mark thy distant flight tod. thee wrong. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 Fowler's . .A noun, common, singular, third, mascu- 
 
 ' i - -'TiT-_, iiiiiii-iii^ eye, aOCOlxilUiJ 
 
 toKule^V. 
 
ENOLIHH GRAMMAR. 
 
 A proii )uii, pcrsoniil, singulu , .second, com- 
 mon gender, possessive, limiting "flight,'' 
 according to Rule V. 
 
 m 
 
 L 
 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 Piirnr the P0S8ESSIVES. 
 
 1. Let all tlie eiwls thou aim'stut he thy country's lends], thv 
 (< A H, ami truth's. 
 
 *J. My father anl mother's command was obeyed. 
 
 •• Quench the timber's falling ei .bers, 
 
 Quencli the red leaves in D.oember'* 
 
 Hoary rime iind chilliiijr spray. — /r/ti7/jVr. 
 
 i. Breathes there a man with .soul so dead, 
 
 Who never to himself hath said, 
 This is my own, my native land? 
 Whose heart hath ne'er within him burned, 
 As !iome his footsteps he hath turned. 
 From wandering on a foreign strand •;~Sc(>(f. 
 
 239. The sign of the possessive ('s) is never used in 
 writing the pronoun. Thus we have my, hi,, th,h; 
 
 whose, dr. 
 
 I, GTE. — Wlien two or more nouns in the posses- 
 sive, referring to the same thing, come together, the 
 sign of the pos.scssive ('s) is used with only one • 
 tliiis, — "^ * 
 
 I have read a i)laj of Shahspeare's the great English 
 
 lii'iiui'iJisf. 
 
 240. When in a succession of nouns, joint possession 
 IS meant, the sign of the possessive ('s) is used only 
 with the last ; as,— 
 
 John, William, and Mary's share was five thousand 
 dollars. 
 
 udcii and Scott's Dictionary . 
 
 ^ ; 1 
 
-T *i- Its- .'X*' -. - r--- •■ 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 241. When separate ownership is denoted by each 
 noun, the sign of the possessive is written after each • 
 
 as, ' 
 
 Smith's and Eaton's stores. 
 "W'bstei'sand VVorct'slcr's Dictionaries. 
 
 242. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of t^e noun 
 It nited by the possesbive 
 
 HxAMi'LE :— Whose is this iniaye and superscrip- 
 tion ? They suy unto hini, C(fimr'ii [image and super - 
 scription.j 
 
 243. Whenever the )ssessive phraseology is felt to 
 be awkward, we may avoid it by using the preposi- 
 tion, of or 1)1/. 
 
 Thus, instead of saying Alexander the (Jreat's con- 
 (|uest of Babylon, we may say the conquesi of Baby- 
 lon by Alexander the Great. Sometimes these forms 
 of expression have very different meaning's • as 
 
 This is my father's picture. 
 This is a picture of my father. 
 
 A plctntr. of lui/ father means a likeness of himself; >,n/ 
 Wihi'f .s- invture may mean simply a picture that belouL's to him 
 Nometnnes we have the possessive case preceded hy the 
 preposition oj ; as, a pirtur,' of my father's. This denotes 
 one picture ot my father's collection of pictures. The thin- 
 •spoken of in the singular number is always understood in the 
 pl.:ral number after the possessive. ' A house of my uncle's ' 
 = a house out of my uncle's houses. 
 
 244. The possessive nflection is used only when 
 «ome idea of ownership is present, and hence is limited 
 mainly to nouns denoting persons or personified ob- 
 jects. When we wish to denote merely an accompani- 
 ment of an object, we use the phrase-form with the 
 
118 
 
 ENOF.ISII GRAMMAR. 
 
 l\ 
 
 'I 
 
 I 
 
 preposition of. Th.is we may say 'The man's occu. 
 pation,' 'Timos' l.oiuy locks,' ' The President's mes- 
 Sii.i,'e,' ' Death's fatal arrow,' but not ' The house's 
 roof (the roof of tl»o h(Mi.se), ' The street's width,' 
 (the width of the street). 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 Conrrt tlif jnlloicituj EirorK : 
 1 . Webster and Worcester's Dictionaries. 
 '-'. I inuohased the coat at Siiiitli's and Brown's. 
 .'?. This opinion is Newton the Astronomer's. 
 4. They said the g.iods were t heir's. 
 
 No IN IN Ari'usrnoN. 
 
 KxM,ANATi()N.-A noun is said to be "in af.position " when 
 It denotes the same person or tiling as another noun or pro- 
 noun, i.n.l when both are in tlie subject or in the ..rclicate 
 l^XAMPLE : Ihomson, the iwf, was a contemporary of Hume 
 the /u.s/orunK Here ' pott ' expkins ' Tliomson,' and is said 
 to he in uppot^ition witli it. So willi ' historian ' and ' Hume.' 
 
 RiJLK VI.— A noun or pronoun in appositi. n agrees 
 m case with the noun or pronoun which it is used to 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Then out spake brave lioratius, 
 Tlie Ca/)f(i,// of the gate, 
 I, J(Jnt, K'dkj of England. 
 
 MODEL OF PARSING. 
 
 Captain.. A noun, common, singular, third, mascu- 
 line, nominative, in apposition with " Hor- 
 atius," accordijig to Ihile VI, 
 
 '^^'''" ^^ w^mu pioper, singular, lirst, nominative, 
 
 in HDposition witJi " 1 " a''''>i'li>i" ♦'. T-'.-l^ 
 
 VI. ■■ ■ "^ " ^"" 
 
SYNTAX, 119 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 Parse the Nomis in Apposition. 
 
 1. 'Tis I, Hamlet the Dane. 
 
 2. Ye eagles, playmates of the mountain storm, 
 Ye li<rhtnin<i8, the dread arrows of the clouds. 
 Ye signs and wonders of the elements, 
 Utter forth God ! 
 
 Noun Independent. 
 
 Explanation.— A noun is said to be independent wh^j it 
 has no grammatical relations with the other woids in the 
 sentence. Examplk : fforutius, saith the consul, as thou 
 sayest, ao let it be. Here ' Horatius ' has no grammatical 
 relation with any other word in the sentence, and hence is 
 said to be i)idcj)cndc)d. 
 
 liLLE VII.— A noun or pronoun denoting a person 
 or thing addressed is in the nominative independent- 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 0, save me, Hubert, save me ! 
 
 Give me three grains of corn, mother. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 Hubert,. A noun, proper, singular, second, mascu- 
 line, nominative, independent, according to 
 Eule VII. 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 Parse thi' Nouns Independent. 
 
 1 . Mary, your lilies are iu bloom. 
 
 2. False wizard, avaunt ! 
 
 3 . Out, out, brief candle. 
 
 4. Give me three grains of corn, mother. 
 
 5. Aud you \\eie all I had, Mary, my blessing and luy 
 
 pride. 
 

 :'^P-*==*i^^' 
 
 iA.A;.,r^ ^ 
 
 •.■— SI 
 
 .•"-• . 
 
 fe^ 
 
 120 
 
 ENGLISh ORAMMAK. 
 
 Nom.native Absolute. 
 Rule VIII._a noun or pronoun with a participle, 
 wncse case '^oes not depend on any other word in the 
 gentence. is in the nominative absolute. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION'. 
 
 '/e being absent, nothing coi, 
 
 iloue. 
 
 MoDKL FOR Parsing. 
 He..A prououn, personal, singular, tliird, mascu- 
 line, nominative, absolute, accoidins to Rule 
 VIII. 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 Pa)>-e thn Xorxs Absolute. 
 
 1. The^nver not being fordable, we had to make a great de- 
 
 2. A(lam, wedded to another five, shall live with her en- 
 
 joying, I (beu)g) extinct. 
 
 3. Thou away, the very birds are mute. 
 
 Note.— Sometimes the objective absolute is used 
 
 lllm destroijed for wbom all this was made. 
 All this will soon follow. — Milton 
 
 Syntax of the Verb. 
 
 Rule IX.— A Verb agrees with its subject in 
 number and person. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. I am with you once again. 
 
 2. Now ./;^A^. the glimmering landscape on the 
 
 sight. 
 
 3. The clouds, which rise with thunder, dake 
 
 uur thirsty souls with rain. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 131 
 
 Am 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 .a verb, intransitive, irregular; am, was, 
 hcu), indicative, present, singular, first, 
 agreeing with its sul.Ject "I," acccrding 
 to Rule IX. 
 
 Fades . .a verb, intransitive, regular : f,,.Ie, faded, 
 fadol, indicative, present, singular, third, 
 agreeing with its suHect " landscape," 
 according to Rule IX 
 
 Rise ... a verb, intransitive, irregular ; rise, ;u>r, 
 rtHen, indicative, present, plural, third, 
 agreeing with its subject " which," ac- 
 cording to Rule IX. 
 
 S^akc.a verb, transitive^ regular; slake, slaked, 
 slalcfd, active voice, indicative, present, 
 plural, third, agreeing with its subject 
 " clouds," according to Rule IX. 
 
 245. The «ubject of a verb may be — 
 
 A Noun, a Pronoun, an Infinitive, a Phrase, 
 o) a Clause. 
 
 The emperor Napoleon (noun-subject of verb 
 died), u)ho (pronoun-subject) was banished 
 to St. Helena, died in 1820. 
 
 To hesitate (infinitive-subject) is failure. 
 
 To reach the Indies, (phi-ase-subject) was the 
 object of Columbus. 
 
 Where De ,Sota icafS buried (clause-subject) 
 cannot be determined. 
 
:~.'.T»r" 
 
 1 
 
 ■I ^ 
 
 It 
 
 jii 
 
 ;! 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 /'anw the ^'ERBs i„ the following f^entences. 
 
 OrL.M'rr"'^^ '"" "'■'* """""■"« the 8un on the village of 
 2. Shell-fish cast their she'l once a year. 
 
 .nf o/^^ trSfeu:* *^^ •-•-^' -'^ ^bout the .i |. 
 
 eyrieJb^iM.'^' "' ''^ ^*"^'^ '^" ^'^'^^ -»^^ -^^""t^PS their 
 5, The air gets slowly changed in inha1)ited rooms. 
 
 V^^^S^^' *'^ '^^'^^^"^^ «^ ^ '^-k illustrates the 
 
 7. One morn a Fori at the gate of lieuvenatood disconsolate. 
 
 S. The preparations for the trial proceeded rapidly. 
 
 !>. On either side the river lie long fields of barley and rye. 
 
 10. Over the joyous feast the sudden darkness descended. 
 
 11. The green trees whispered low and mild. 
 
 Special Rule I.— A collective noun has a singular 
 verb when the individuals denoted by the noun are 
 taken together as one united whole, and a plural verb 
 when they are considered as acting separately. 
 
 illustrations. 
 The fleet was seen sailing up tJie channel. 
 The council were divided iu thuir opinion, 
 
 whol/-'fn*;r* ''"*',"'" i''" "?* ^^ eonsi<lered as a united 
 7^mLu • '"'Tl'^ lu"*^"'" tiie idea of separate individual. 
 
 18 made promment by the term " .!ivid..d." 
 
 w. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 123 
 
 Special Rule II.— When the subject consists of 
 two or more singular Nouns united by ' and,' the Verb 
 must be Plural. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. John and James are in the field. 
 
 Explanation— Here the subject is 'John' and 'James,' 
 two singular nouns united by awr/. Htnce the verb 'aie' is 
 [jlur.al. 
 
 2. Mfirs and Jupiter h((s been visible this week. 
 
 Explanation.-— Here the subject consists of two singular 
 nouns cfinnected by 'and;' so the verb should be plural. 
 Hence 'has b,en' sliould lie 'hare been.' 
 
 SPKCIAL ApPIJC'ATIoNS OK THE PlilNCIPLE. 
 
 (fi) The princij)le applies etiually if the conjunction 'and' be 
 understood. Thus, • Art, empire, earth itself to change are 
 
 doomed.' 
 
 (/') If the two nouns are names for the same oJiject, they are 
 not united oipuhitirdji, but merely in an c.rpJanator;/ way ; 
 henve there is no real plurality of subject, and the verb must 
 be singular. Example: " The spectator and historian of his 
 ex[iloit h<(s observed ;"' that is, a single person who was at 
 ouje 'spectator' and ' historian ' of his exploit. If two persons, 
 the one spectator, the other historian, were intended, the 
 article would l)e repeated, and then the verb would need to 
 be plural. Thus : ' The spectator aud the histoti,i.n of Ids ex- 
 ploit hair observed. ' 
 
 {r) Note that where trt'oor more si. gular subjects a'most 
 synonymous in meaning are employed foi'the sake of empnasis, 
 there is still a kind of unity in the subject ; hence the singular 
 verb is used ; as. " Tlie head and front ' ' his offending )ras 
 tiii.«." "To read and write «y<.s' once an honorary distinction." 
 
 ('/) Sometimes ' a.!id' is not a real conjoiner, but has the 
 sense of the preposition irifh. In such eases there is no plu- 
 rality of .subject, anil the verb n.ust be singular. Kxa.mplk.— 
 The v/heel iind axle i/-(r, out of -opair ; that is, the 'wheel 
 togi'thir with the axle.' We may say A needle and a thread 
 
 HV'/v given to her, but she could t ot tlirc-:iis the needle ine.a!!- 
 
 mg the needle and thread wtre given separately ; A needle 
 
'I ,.i 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 find thread van civpii tr. J.,.^ t a i 
 
 button.^.ea„i4 that "^ ^i^^T^!,::^ ^^^^^ ^ *'^- 
 
 t:£/S:;j;r"!s::;:^:,ii::s-«^^*-n-^ his .en .... 
 
 «H'«ular ; hence tl.eveSS Si' *^'V"''Ject 'captain' is 
 the ..... requires the plur i TJh l''".? *'"''"" [prisoner] ; but 
 18, if we mean to l.rimr^to nnfi V J^'"^'" ^^^ '" «"«h a casa 
 The captain .»' h s m^l^"" ^^^^^^^ »"«", to say 
 
 to make the captain 2ne mi.' f.t' Tr"!;';' "' "%^?'^« 
 prisoner with his men. """'^"'^' ^"^ cai)tain //•«« taken 
 
 well a,- m\k.I' .erer-m i ZS'^ '"° P™po«tio„,. -a. 
 there is Msential uStv„^tit°^,\'''''"l'"''•'''■ »» that 
 t- .jugular ; .., T"Zi:t& Sil^Tfr S' ""'•'' "'"•' 
 --aul] „.,„ gradually fa»h.o„ealriStir„7the .'apiS' "' 
 
 IlLVSTKATIONS. 
 
 1. He or his brother /if« the book. 
 
 2. Neither this nor that ,-.. the thi„. «.nted. 
 
 the Plural 4eo",llM°be Sli the^^ir ""■ """ 
 
 Ir LUSTRATION. 
 
 He or bts servants were to bhime. 
 
 tw^'T'f"" V._When a Verb is preceded by 
 two subjects, one affirmative and the other negl-ive 
 
 .t^.e. in Kun.bera.d in Person ,ith.heXr: 
 
SYNTAX. 1 25 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. He, and not I, is chosen. 
 
 2. I, and not they, run to (tq. 
 
 3. Not you, but Mmy, is the best scholar. 
 
 Special Rule VI— When the verb 'To Be' is 
 preceded and followed by a nominative, one singular 
 and the other plural, the verb agrees in number wUh 
 that which is more naturally the subject. 
 
 ILLUSTUATION. 
 
 His pavilion weio dark waters and thick clo'ids of 
 the sky. 
 
 ExPLANATio.v.-Here the real subject follows the verb. 
 
 Special J^ule Vll.-When two or more singular 
 subjects of different persons are connected by 'or' or 
 nor It is usual to make the verb agree in person 
 with the subject nearest to it. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 I or he is in thf wroinr. 
 Jane or / have the book. 
 
 nn^r.^P^ ""^ sentences exemplified in the preceding cases is 
 not to be commended as llIustratin^. the best usa5 sJch 
 sentences are common in collo.iuial use. It ,s bette^"t; write 
 
 nor a" /'""VfT '^'' ^T"' °^ ^'' ''■ ^^''^'^'^^ J«hn Z Tight ' 
 or a" if ^^J^^^^orltogo? Better thus, /.JaiuestoV; 
 
 Violations of Rule IX. 
 247. The verb has so few changes of form on 
 account of number and person, that with a little care 
 error is easily avoided. With the exception of the 
 verb To Be, which has more inflections, the present 
 tense has but iinee forms and the past tc ^se but two. 
 

 m 
 
 
 f 
 
 ' » 
 
 126 
 
 ENOLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The forms of these tenses as required by tiie diflFerent 
 numbers and pei-sons are thus shown : 
 
 I 
 
 We 
 
 I 
 
 Prtspnf. 
 
 walk. 
 
 Vou 
 They ; 
 Thou walkest. 
 //e Walks. 
 I am. 
 Thou art. 
 He is. 
 We I 
 You V : 
 They j 
 
 walked. 
 
 Past. 
 T 
 
 He 
 
 We 
 
 You 
 
 They ^ 
 
 Thou walkedst. 
 
 I was. 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 He was. 
 
 We j 
 
 \ au \- were. 
 
 Tliey J 
 
 ^iltf .^"^'''^ ^^^""^^ mistaking for the subject of the 
 verb a noun m an adjunct of the subject, standing 
 between it and the verb. •"uunf 
 
 •are 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. The union of two great rivers produces the 
 ivlississippi. 
 
 2. His reputation was great, and somewhat more 
 durable than that of similar poets have generally been. 
 
 the ve.b -have ' i^.C.^ iit'o^ t^^L^ n ^bTlf.lt^S^*' 
 but as the phrase ' of similar poets ' is a mereTS,S of "th«; ' 
 It can have no influence on tl,e number of tie verb! 
 
 249. When the immediate subject is a Relative Pro- 
 noun, the antecedent of the Pronoun dpt.«rmi-oo *i,« 
 dumber of the Verb. ' " """ '"'""' 
 

 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 127 
 
 Dkrll'JhJfn '*'''' pronouns have no peculiar form for tho 
 
 I 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Y.- stars, which are the poetry of hpaven. 
 Explanation.- Here the immediate subject is the relative 
 
 2 This is one of the most valuable books that has 
 appeared in any language. 
 
 bef'^^trsnh-^'^; -"t?"'' f ' "''^ '^^«' '« "> the wrong nurn- 
 ber. its subject is the relative i)ronoun ' that : but tais uro- 
 
 plural , therefore 'has aj-peared ' should be 'have appeared.* 
 
 When the antece.lent consists of a noun and a pronoun in 
 7Z^urin^",^:^"''V '''''' the number and the pe^.on of the 
 S7rson TU'' ^'"' ^«"^'^ "'*^^ '''' -^«'-^ i- that number 
 
 Ruf*/f%l'/r°tV"^''1' "'^''^ [\«t P«"«i^ singular] tell you to go. 
 But if the relative clause beloiigs to the noun rather than to 
 the pronoun, the relative is considere.l to be in the third per- 
 son, and the verb agrees with it in that person ; as, ^ 
 
 It is I, tha friend that loves you, who tell you to go. 
 The first sentence -I (your friend) tell you to g>. 
 The second -=1 (the friend that laves yua) tell you to go. 
 
 250. No eUipsis of an auxiliary verb should ba made 
 when the auxUiary, if supplied, would not agree with 
 Its subject. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 A bundle f papers was produced, and such par- 
 ticulars as the foliowiiiif ueLaiied. 
 
128 
 
 KNaMSil UllAMMAU 
 
 II 
 
 in 
 
 Explanation. —There is un ellipsis of the auxiliary before 
 the participle ' detailod.' but this ellipsis i^ improper, because, 
 wheu We coine to supply lOiu (expressed before 'produced';, 
 we iiave 'such particularb ii.uijt detailed,' which is ungraiu- 
 inatical. The auxiliary were should be supplied. 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 Correct tht toll4>iiuuij, and give the special rale. — 
 
 1. The conditioi: of tht; crops show that f'o country has 
 sullered Iroiu drouth. 1. Tiie .read of the Rocky Mouutains 
 are toward the South. 6. Tlie Church iiavc uo power to inllict 
 corj»oral puai.ihmeut. 4. A detachuienl of two hundred men 
 were inuueaialelv sent. 5. Tlie puLilu- is olten deceived by 
 false appearances, ti. It is an ill wuul that blow nobody good. 
 
 7. The strata tliat contains coal belong to tlie tertiary era. 
 
 8. tSuipa and steamers goes to sea. D. Ai niuent scholar and 
 judiciuUs critic have saitl. 10. Wherein uo sit the dread and 
 lear of kings, 11. Ihis wii e-aud-water are hot. 12. Sir 
 Kiohartl, witn several others, waiii cite-.l to the btar Chamber. 
 
 13. I'lauklin as well as Utis were born in Massachusetts. 
 
 14. Our wilJ aid not our .stars make us what we are. lo. 
 Every liou.sei )p and every steeple show thi Hag of the republic. 
 Itj. A word ur an epithet paint a wholo scene. 17. .Neither 
 tlie captain nor the sailors was saved. 
 
 Syntax of the Pronoun. 
 
 251. The Pronoun has tlie same functions as the 
 Noun ; that is, it may be — 
 
 1. Subject of a Verb. 
 
 2. Nominative after an Intransitive or a Passive 
 ^^erb. 
 
 3. Object of a Transitive Verb. 
 
 4. Governed by a Preposition. 
 
 5. In the Possessive Case, 
 t. In Apposition. 
 
 7. Independent. 
 
 8. Case Absolute. 
 
 252. The Pronoun, having the same use as the 
 Noun, is parsed in the same way as the Noun. The 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 129 
 
 Pronoun also has the .ui.litional rHution of agreement 
 as showi. hy l{„lft X. 
 
 »*"Iu view Ffow to I'ar«»> the N 
 
 oun. 
 
 KuLK X. A Pronoun agrees in number, person 
 and gender with its antecedent or with the Noun it 
 represents. " 
 
 Note ^- This in the most important practical principle in 
 
 nt;;t{;''.ro.:te.i'"""""^- '' '- ^'- •»- -- ^^^* - -J^ ^- 
 
 ILLUSTIIATIOX. 
 
 A man ,rhn (hM.icates ///.v life to knowledge becomes 
 liahitnated to pleasure, W^A-// carries witli if no 
 reproach. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 
 ^^'•'^ ^ pronoun, relative, singular, third, mas- 
 culine, nominativp, agreeing with "man" 
 and suhject of " detlicatc ?.," according to 
 linles X and I. 
 
 ^^"^ ^ pronoun, personal, singular, third, mas- 
 culine, possessive, agieeing with " man " 
 ar.d limiting " life," according to Kules 
 X and V. 
 
 Which.... A pronoun, relat! -e, singular, third, neu- 
 ter, nominative, agreeing with "pleasure'' 
 and subject of " c irries," according to 
 Rules X and I. 
 
 Ey \ Jse 44. 
 
 Parse the Pronouns in the follow in;/ lines. 
 
 I have sef-n 
 A curious child, who dwelt upon a tract 
 Of mland ground, applying to his ear 
 
 Tl. = 
 
 utioiia oi a smooth-lipped .shell 
 A" WHICH, in silence hushed, his very 
 Listened intensely ; — 
 
 1 
 
130 
 
 KN<;l.lH|| OI..,MMAR. 
 
 i,-^*'l 
 
 i3S 
 
 \ ■• 
 
 Spe<;ial KuLK I. When two or more nouns de- 
 no^ ng different things, are connected by am/, the 
 pronoun used to represent them must be in the plural 
 number. 
 
 IM.USTUATION. 
 
 James and Williiim n«i<,'leci,ed their Icshma and they 
 w<'ie koi>t in. 
 
 Special Hulk II. — When two or more Singular 
 nouns are connected by or, the pronoun used to repre- 
 sent them must be in the singular number. 
 
 ILLUSTKATION. 
 
 When he shoots a [tartridge, a woodcock, or a 
 pheasant, he gives it away. 
 
 Special Rulk lit. — Collective Nouns require sin- 
 gular or plural pronouns according as they convey the 
 idea of unit j or of plurality. 
 
 iLLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. The clergy begn.u to withdraw themselves. — 
 
 Blackstone. 
 *> Parliuuient is now m session ; it will rise next 
 
 week. 
 
 Remarks os the Use of Personal PaoNouNs. 
 2S3,. Such adjectives as each, every, and one are u.sed 
 with nouns in the singular number only, and hence 
 the pronouns wjiich represent such nouns must be 
 
 singular. 
 
 illustrations. 
 
 1. Franklin and Lawrence were distinguished 
 
 patriots ; each served their country well. 
 
 Explanation. — 'Each' here belongs to patriot or some 
 
 4.1. ..-. =-;;-..~i!~r ^-..-.1-.^ ?.. rs.'lj^raf.".."..'^ •.1—..-I Ksr-..-.ii =V..-.-.-.! J !.,. 
 
 ssnted by a singula" pronoun — * each served his country well.' 
 
8VNTAX. 
 
 131 
 
 2. Every person is the Jirchit«'ct of thrlr own 
 fortuiip. 
 
 Kxn.ANATfoN. ^Here th.^ pronoun 'their' is „se.l to repre- 
 sent the HinKular noun ' person.' and hence shonM he Hin-liLir 
 
 - the architect of his .,wn fortune.' What cauHea the"nu8 
 take IS the notion of phirality in tlie wonl 
 'every is always grammatically singular. 
 
 'eviry ■ ; hut 
 
 John and J.inioH have be i Lite for a wick ; if 
 rlthn- are absent from tinir seat at nine to. 
 morrow they will be kept in. 
 
 Explanation. -Here the pronouns 'their 'ami ' they ' are 
 used to represent 'either.' which i.s singular ; hence fiinmi'.ir 
 pronouns and the singular verh should he uJ-e.l. ' If either is 
 ahsent from h'm seat, h<- will,' etc. 
 
 4. OiiP is seldom at a loss wliat to do with tlnlr 
 monev. 
 
 E LANATiON.— As ' one ' is the represented word and .sin- 
 gular, his, instead of ' their.' shouhf he used. 
 
 5. Every boy and -ii 1 nmst learn tlwi'r le^ 
 
 son. 
 
 ITr^'l^r^V ''i"~ ' ^fi'tence represents a peculiaritv. 
 L ruler the verb we saw t:. at two .sin-.ular nouns couided hv 
 ami do not take the plunJ verb when preceded by mrl 
 Hence the pronoun reprecnting them should he siimuUr 
 also, and the sent Mice should read, 'Every boy and girl has 
 
 i?.oh J"' ?''""•' ^"* *'»« sentence presents a furthe; 
 pecuharity ; there are two genders to he represented. Xou- 
 m *.ngiish we have no pronouns of the common gemler in the 
 third person singular. In such cases it is customary to make 
 the ma-sculme pronoun stand for both genders. 
 
 6. Every teacher is required to make hi>< or hr 
 report. 
 
 ExPT,AXATioy -When -e wish specially to distincniish the 
 sexes we use the above form; but all' diHiculty°may he 
 avoided by employing the plural form of the noun ainl tlie 
 pronoun-thus, ' All teachers are required to make tluir re- 
 
:V2 
 
 KN(;I,|SII (IIIA.MMAU. 
 
 I 
 
 ;1 
 
 
 
 •_'."> t. 'I'lu' (ollDwiiii; cxMiDpIcs illustrate iinpioper 
 iis(; of the pioiioiiu : 
 
 I. lliid f/ii (>/)iiiiiiii ot' my (•('iisunis been iinani 
 p.ioiis, // iiii:;Iit li;i\»' <)\(>i-.s('t ii\y resolutions ; 
 hut s;iu(' I (iiul fliciii at variaiico witli (^acli 
 oIIk'i-, I can, williout scruple, nci^h'ct ///r;// [//], 
 and t'ollow my own imagination. - /)r. .hifni.'^oH. 
 
 I'aim,\n Aih N. Notice the jnoiumu tlutti. awA sec if ^-on 
 c;ui tell wliat, iKiuii it is iiic.uit to represent. A careful read- 
 iiijf of tlie seiiteiiee will sliow tli;it the iiroiiotni than was de- 
 siL'iied to st;ui<l for the word 'opiiiioii.' It is /' o/Jnioii that 
 was not uiianiiMoiis : hence tile writer correctly says ' it ['.''., 
 the opinion I might have overset my resolutions.' It was this 
 ' opinion ' that he could ncglc.t, not his 'censure-a,' which 
 he carclcs.-ly makes the rciirescntcd noun, ami liouco uses 
 ' them ' instead of ' it. ' 
 
 -. When a veil* o(,vcrns a relative j)rououn, if is 
 phiccd alter if C/i(tn//nrs\t (trmnnidr. 
 
 I'iMi.AN A noN. Tills sentence illustrates a careless u.;e of 
 ihc pronoun. It is not t'asy to tell which if represents ' verh ' 
 aiiil wliich ' prcmoun.' 
 
 ;5. Men look witli an evil eye upon the good tliat is 
 t in others, and think that fhcir ropntation ob- 
 
 scures ///r?H, and that their commendahle quali- 
 ties do stand in thiir li<j;ht ; and therefore 
 f/tci/ do what fhcy can to cast a cloud over 
 /Af»i, that the bright shining of their viitues 
 may not obscui-e fhem. — Bishop TiUofson. 
 
 Explanation. — The above sentence has two subjects, and 
 we can not tell from the construction to which of the two the 
 pronouns refer. In tact, the multiplicity of pronouns throws 
 the sentence into utter confusion. 
 
 The Pronoun 'It' 
 
 •J.")'). The fact that tlu pronoun it has two distinct 
 
SVNTAX. 
 
 13. J 
 
 iisrs - its ()nlin:ii-y us.-uiul its i.liu.uatic use; in iutrocluo- 
 m-,' :i sciitcnc." -is a ric(|ii..iit cuiis.! of )iinl)i-uity. 
 
 IM.r.STKATIo.NS. 
 
 1. r •iiu -.)iu- to ineiitioii tli.^ matter. // is ri-lit 
 tliiit // slioiild 1)0 iiiuutiuiKMl. 
 
 KxnvNA.u.N Tl... (ir.st i/ h.ro iMtr.Mluco.s tl.r .rutvur,. 
 (i.l.u.nat.o use ; the sc.o...l refers tu • tl.e umttcr,' ua.l «oiue 
 cciHiNiuM results Irom tlu; -Inul.lo rofeicice. 
 
 L'. It is a si<,'n of^M-oat |)ru(l('iu;(; to I)r willi.i^^r to vc 
 crJV(! instruction; the most iatelligont p.-r- 
 sons somotiincs stand in n(!e(l of //. 
 
 KxPLANATiMN. ^-This senton.^e w..m1.1 I.o hotter iUnn usi„.r 
 a noui, in place of the hrst ' .t :' ' Willin^M.cs.s to n-o-ive u" 
 Htruclion IS a si-n <,f ;rreat i.ru«len«e ; the ni ,t intelli.rent 
 per8(.i,s sometunes stand in iiee.l of //. ' ^i-'o„( nt 
 
 Each Other and One Another. 
 
 I'-'iO. • Kuvh otlier ' is used when vv«^ are spoakinjr of 
 f'ro iKM-Hons ; ' one anotlier ' wl.en we speak of Zn-r 
 than t/vo. 
 
 ILLUSTltATloxs. 
 
 1. Ri-liteousness and pciace liase kissed mr/> othn: 
 -'. U (Jod so loved us, we ought to love onv another. 
 
 Politeness in Pronouns. 
 
 -'^1. In using singuhir pronouns of different per- 
 sons, put he or she before /, and t/ou before /, or hr 
 01- ^h. : as, lie and / will go. You and he vvill ..o' 
 My cousin and / will go. You or James will go. " 
 
 2o8. AVith the plural pronouns, *oe ha« the first 
 place, yo« the second, and they the third; as. wc and 
 tiity start to-morrow. 
 
134 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 } 
 
 ][ 
 
 •i 
 
 \l- 
 
 \ 
 
 t ■ 
 
 \ ' 
 
 us 
 
 'J 
 
 Kxi'r.AN.VTioN,— There;tson of the (litfereiiceiu tlie {((.altioii 
 (.!' the singular ami of the pluml pnmfiiins is tliis : fii the 
 Mi^Milar ihuuIk;-, tlio KjK.'akiT ( / ) jaits himself after tlie per- 
 sdii .sp«)l;Lii to and the iinsoii spoken of, as a matter of polite- 
 ness. }?ut in the plural number, for tlie same reason, he jiuts 
 tliose who are most intimately assoeiated with him in the first 
 plaee (unavoidably including "himself and making 'we'), then 
 the persons spoken to, and then those spoken of. 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 (Jorrecf the erroi-f^ iit fhe folloioiiifi ><entewef' : 
 
 1. The multitude, with all its means of instruction. 
 
 2. The army dragged themselves along through the mud. 
 
 3. Every one must judge of their own feelings. — Byron. 
 
 4. Had the doctor been contented to take my dining-tables, 
 
 as any body in their senses would have done. — Miss 
 Austin. 
 
 k). Not on outward charms should man or woman build their 
 pretensions to please. — Ojne. 
 
 (5. Man is not such a machine as a watch or a clock, which 
 move merely as they are moved. 
 
 7. As Time devours his children, so they endeavour to de- 
 vour eai'h other. — Bacun. 
 
 8.— Did we (mankind) but love each other, it would be 
 something. — Gohlstnith. 
 
 Spkcial Rules for thi: Use of Helatives. 
 
 Specia lluLE T. — To prevent ambiguity, th<» rela- 
 tive pronoun should be placed as near as possible to 
 its antecedent- 
 
 In ordinary cases the first noun that precedes the relative 
 should be its antecedent. 
 
 illustration. 
 s^ii- -jitivi iTiio viiaOuu viju lily umour was punisiied 
 for the offence. 
 
SYNT \. 
 
 135 
 
 Exi'LANATiON.— The antecedent of 'who' is 'sohlier,' and 
 the pronoun is correitly i)hiced next ti. tliat antecedent ; but 
 the sentence wouM be inelegant if m<' shouhl say, ' The sol- 
 dier was punished for the ofl'tuee, who disobeyed' his ofHcer." 
 
 Special Rule II. — When an adjunct noun, or a 
 noun in apposition, is likely to cause ambiguity as to 
 the real antecedent, ivho or which refers to the princi- 
 pal noun, and that to the adjunct noun. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Solomon, tlie son of David, xoho built tho Temple. 
 
 ExPLANATinN. — The noun immediately preceding the rela- 
 tive ' who ' is David ; but the real antecedent is Solomon, not 
 David. 
 
 Now, \l we wish to make a referei ee to the explanatory 
 v'ord, the pronoun 'that,' may be used instead of who ; as, 
 Solomon, the son of David that slew Gi^'-ath, built the 
 Temple ; or use who, following its a' seeder without the iu- 
 ter\ ntion of a comma . 
 
 The Indians constructed huts covered with the 
 skins of wild animals, which formed their rude 
 habitations. 
 
 Explanation. — The noun immediately preceding the re- 
 lative v-hich is ♦ animals : ' but the real antecedent is huts, not 
 'animals.' 
 
 If we wish to make the relative refer to the adjunct nouns, 
 we must use that instead of iHto or vhich. Thus we might say, 
 ' The Indians constructed huts covered with the t^lkins of vdld 
 animals that they killed in the cliase.' In such cases, do not 
 separate 'that' from its antecedent l)y a comma. 
 
 Special Rule III — TfA'/ relates to persons only; 
 which relates to the lower animals and things without 
 life. 
 
 illustrations. 
 
 mi 1 T11.1 ... . .... 
 
 iiiu uuy lijfio naa Uie piluher siiouic his beau. 
 
HI 
 ill' 
 
 'A 
 
 I 
 
 1^^ KNUI.l:^!! GUAM.MAK. 
 
 That sorrow which leaves no lio4)e was in his look. 
 
 Note.— /;7//o//. iind not ic/i >, is use.l when tlie aiitecedent 
 18 ;i collective noun fxprcsrtin;,' uniti/ of idea ; as, 
 
 The party lohih he eiittulaiued yesterday was /ery 
 numerous. 
 
 Note '2.~ir/io,^r, pi(.)KTly tlie possessive of irho, is often 
 used, especially in i-ootry, as tlie possessive of which, the 
 latter having no possessive of its own. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 That undiscovered country 
 Fromiohose bourne no traveller returns.— ^^Aa%;eare. 
 
 Special Rule J \^ -The relative //la/ is used instead 
 of ivho or which in the following constructions :— 
 
 1. That is used when there are two antecedents, one 
 denoting j)ersons, the other animals or tiiings ; as, 
 
 The )uan and the do(/ that we saw. 
 
 2. The relative that is used tc introduce clauses in- 
 tended to restrict the meaning of the noun imme- 
 diately preceding. 
 
 Note 1.— Explanatory clauses are introduced by 
 who or which. 
 
 ILLUSTUATIONS. 
 
 1 . ' A sjiirit more amiable but less vigorous than 
 Luther's, would have shrunk back from the 
 dangers that he braved and surmounted.' 
 
 ExFLANATiON.— The relative ' that' is correctly used to in- 
 tr.Kluce the cliuse he hraved and surmounted,' because it is 
 not dangers in general that are spoken of, but the particular 
 dangers that he braved and surmounted.' 
 
8TXTAX. 
 
 137 
 
 2. Words, which are n^^nn of idoas, may be divided 
 
 into nine Parts of Speech. 
 
 Kxri.ANATiON. —Compare tliis with the fiiat sentcnco. You 
 will ser that in the secon.l sentence the relative is not restric- 
 tive, hut fxp/aaator!/. The nentence means 'all wor.ls (o.nd 
 
 : niol'T'*''"' ''^ '1^"''''^ '"^^ '^^ *^'""^^''^'' ^^'- The sentence 
 IS tner»!fore correct. 
 
 3. All words which are the signs of complex ideas 
 
 furnish matter of miatxke.—Murrai/s Gram- 
 mar. 
 
 Explanation-.— It is not intended in this sentence to say 
 uU words furnish matter of mistake,' but only such wonls as 
 are signs of complex ideas.' The clause, 'which are sicnis of 
 complex ideas, restricts or limits the meaning of ' all words ' 
 and hence the relative that should be used. 
 
 i. Age, that lessens the enjoyment of life, increases 
 our desire oni\ing.—GohhiuUh. 
 
 E-y-LANATioN.— Here that is incorrectly used instead of 
 /r/uc/i .the clause 'that lessens the enjoyment of life' is not 
 restrictive, but is exjdanatoru ; lience ' age, 'which lestens,' etc. 
 
 5. And do you now strew flowers in his way, 
 That comes in triumph over Pompey's blood ? 
 
 ,, .. Shakspearc. 
 
 .Substitute who for that. 
 
 Note 2. —Restrictive clauses introduced by that 
 often follow adjectives in the Superlative degree ; also, 
 that is used after the adjectives iianie, all, anij, some, 
 and after the interrogative who. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 (1) This is the best book that I know of (clause restrictive of 
 tiupcrlaticc degree). 
 
 (-) Tlu^^isthe same hook that I bought (restrictive clause 
 
 t'-TliVITilil 
 
 iU u 
 
 t.4J\^4^bAV« ^U/ZCCy. 
 
138 
 
 EXGLISII CIRAMMAR. 
 
 K* 
 
 n 
 
 (3) AU that \w has; Aini iiiau thn' says so; Some people 
 tinit were then; (clauses rcHtricUvo after the a<ljec- 
 
 (i\t'S ((//, ((/(//. Siiiiir). 
 
 'S. The relative tJuit is often used insteiul of who or 
 jchlrh for the sake of eiipliony and effect. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. He is the stranger of vhom you told me=He is 
 the stranger that yoii told me of. 
 
 2. The musquito is good for nothing that I know of. 
 
 This is much less pompous than, The musquito is good 
 for nothing of which I know. 
 
 219. When the relative that is governed by a pre- 
 position, the preposition is phiced after the relative ; 
 as. The boat that I went up the river in was sunk. 
 
 260. The prepositions governinc: whom and which 
 may also be placed at the end of the clause, but 
 modern usage prefers placing them immediately he- 
 fore the relatives. 
 
 Illustration.— Thus it is deemed more elegant to say ' The 
 steamer in xchlch I went up the river,' than ' The steamer which 
 1 went up the river iu.' 
 
 201. When the pronoun which has been u.sed to in- 
 troduce one relative clause, that should not be up \ to 
 introduce another clause of the same kind in the same 
 sentence. 
 
 Illustration. 
 It is remarkable that Holland, against which the 
 war was undertaken, and that, in the very beginning, 
 was reduced to the lirinb- r>f /loof ».nf.+i/^»> i^«+ .^^i.-ui 
 
SY.VTAX. 
 
 130 
 
 KxiLAN.VTKi.N. - Hen' tlit- relative n-hirh in tlic first clauHc 
 slioiil.l nut liave heeii eliaii^'tMi for Ihut ': tlie st eoud clause. 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 
 L'li((ii(ji' llti relatlcm in il,e J'olloirinij : 
 
 1. Tlif sul)jc(;t, ill ti-hh-lt I liatl ociasioji to apeak, is a most 
 nn]iortaiit one. i? He sold me the house of wliich you have 
 heard. .S. It i.s the .straiif,'est story of which I ever heard. 4. 
 riiere was nothing' upon which a beetle could hiive lunched. 
 
 'As'— a Relative- 
 
 202. Tiie word as is u.sed as a relative wlieu the 
 antecedent is limited by xnch, some, and so much. 
 
 Illustratio\h. 
 
 1. 1 wi.sh all men in the world did heartily believe 
 xo much of this as is true. — Jeremy Taylor. 
 
 2. Avoid sncli com])anions as those are. 
 
 3. We are siicli stuff as dreams are made of.— 
 
 Sfaiks/icafe. 
 
 Here ^M is a relative go' -od by the preposition o/ at the 
 end ol tiie clause. 
 
 Ellipsis of the Relative. 
 
 2G;5. In conversational style the relative is often 
 omitted. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1 . Tlie family I lived with has removed, Here the relative 
 '/'(It is understood. 
 
 2. I have sent you everything [thatj you ordered, 
 
 3. He can not tell all [that] he knows. 
 
 4. 1 have no money [that is] worth talking about. 
 
 5. Men must reap the thi;— > [that] they ^ow. —Shelley. 
 
uo 
 
 KNliLlSlI (iUAMMAR. 
 
 xa'/-/^^'*" '^ "* ""'^^"^ ^'''**^ ^'"''^'' '''''"'"* ^^'^ bauk.— .S;,a/t«- 
 
 7. I may .1,, that rwhicli] I shall he soriy/u/-. -S/niLy.arr. 
 
 8. I am iiHuiarch of a]l[thatj I survey.— fo,/y;, ,-. 
 
 a. la tliia 'tis (;..,! [who] .lirects, in that 'tia man -Pojk: 
 10. [Ilejwho .steals my purse, ^t":ih trash.^~Shahj.eare. 
 
 Important General Caution. 
 
 2G4. When the use of a pronoun would cause the 
 slightest ambiguity or obscurity in the sense, the noun 
 itself should be repeated. 
 
 Noi-K.— The best moaern writers pay no attention to the 
 old maxim aKauist repeating a word. Kverything must give 
 way to perspicuity. •> t> s 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Ji^ [Philip] wrote to that distinguished philoso- 
 pher [Aristotle] in terms the most j 'ite and 
 flattering, begging of ////// [Aristotle] to undei-- 
 take hi,s [Alexander's] education, and to bestow 
 ui»on hint [Alexander] those useful lessons 
 which /iis [Philip's] numerous avocations would 
 not allow him [Philip] to hoHto^y. -GohhmM^ 
 
 Explanation. -The sentence may be corrected th.,, • 
 ; P/uUp wrote to AristoiU' in terms the^nost polite and Hatter' 
 "ig, begging of that distinguished M/.W/i^rto umlertaS 
 
 fui'Solithtr':;:''"*' '^ '^^^^^^ "'^^'^ ^''^ *"- '- 
 
 AJi to bestow """ ""'"''^'"^ --oo.tiou. would not allow 
 
 Misused Relatives. 
 
 2G5. The following sentence illustrates an incorrect 
 use of the relat''-e. 
 
 1. Be diligent; without which vou can never 
 succeed. 
 
SYM AX. 
 
 141 
 
 l.xrLAN-ATioN In tins sont.-nco tl.o only antecedent that 
 the relat.ve winrh can refer to is the a.ljeetive Mil- 'cnt ;' hut 
 from Its very nature a relative can represent only a ,mm,, or 
 soine expression o-iuivalent to a noun. Tsv, ,„ Jacr of Ihr re- 
 n>,rrnn ohslroct ,n.>nt r.rjn-r.sshn, fhr q„„/>f>, uo ,,lial it, fir 
 'i,ll'<t,n: Or snhstitute oti„- r,r>.sr ior ^ vithdit ,rhirh ' Tlio 
 sentenee eoneeted -tan-I.s thus : • He .liligent ; for without 
 '////'/. «<r 3 ou cannot succeed.' 
 
 Syntax of the Adjective. 
 
 Rule XI.— Adjectives modify or limit nouns and 
 pronouns. 
 
 lM,tSTRAT10N.S, 
 
 Wise mm ; ton lu.ys ; tlii.s hoise. 
 
 2GG. The adjective has tuo uso.s It inuy he closely 
 attjicl.ed to the noun ; or it niay he connected with 
 the noun by means of .some intransicive verh, as A^, 
 ■-''ni,^ Inoh; of which it forms the complement. In the' 
 first case, the connection l)etwecn the attribute denoted 
 by the adjective and the thini- denoted by the noun, is 
 assumed, and the adjective is said to be "used attrihu- 
 fivrh/. In the second case, this connection is assei-ted, 
 and the adjective is said to be yxaeOprediratirrli/. 
 
 Illustrations, 
 
 1. O tenderly ihe hia,r////^ day fills his blue urn 
 with fire. 
 
 2. The consul's brow was .<iafL 
 
 3. The rose r:Mells .'^ireff. 
 
 The adje.L'.-es 'haughty' and 'blue' are here u.sed 
 attributively; 'sad' and '.sweet' are used prcdica- 
 tively. 
 
 Model for Pvrsing. 
 Tiauyhty._An adjective, qualitative, positive, modi- 
 fies ' day,' according to Rule XI. 
 
I? 
 
 ^f 
 
 142 
 
 Sw(H't. 
 
 i:N<i|,IS|| (,li\.\lM\u. 
 
 All !i(lic<ti\t', iju ilitjitivc, jMisitivc, uscmI pro. 
 'licjitivcly, rornplctin;: (lie vril> •sinclls,' 
 Mild modifying tlif iiuiiii ' lo.so,' according 
 to IJuIc XI. 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 /'(irsr ///<> Adjk'-i. , i:s. 
 
 Around tlie tin on intrj- niylit 
 
 The f;iriiRT'.s rosy (.■liildivi! sat. 
 
 Tlic; .stately liomca .)!' Kii;;laii(l, 
 
 Hi \v hcautifid th(!y stand. 
 
 My otreiicj i.s rark. 
 
 Mis hidr is crisp, and l)la(k, and lonu;. 
 
 Were never folk.s so ;^liul. 
 
 Now tlie l)rij,'lit morning star, day's iiarbingvr, 
 
 •'onie dancinL,' from the East. 
 Cloves smell aromatic. 
 
 SpK(i.\i. Rri.i. I. -When two objects are compared the 
 adjective is used in the comparative degree ; when 
 more than two, in the superlative. 
 
 ILI rSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Ontario and Qiudxic are largo provinces; but 
 
 t^)iiebec is the larger of the two. 
 
 2. Driti.sh Columbia is the largest of the seven 
 
 provinces. 
 
 NoTi': 1. — When a person or a thing is compared 
 with others belonging to the same class, ti;e adjective 
 in the comparative degree must be followed by some 
 phrase that will exclude the thing compared ; such 
 as, ' than any other,' ' than all other.' 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Bismarck is greater than any German statesman. 
 
HVNTAX. 
 
 143 
 
 Kmi.anatk.n ||„H woiil.l he inodrnct, because, as His- 
 n.ank .8 hnnnelf a <;eri.ia;. .stateH.i an. the Henteiue would 
 at.:rm that he is greuter than himself. It shouhl lea.l, 
 
 'Bi»mai<k is great.-i tlian any o///, /■ [„r than all other! 
 dernian statesmen.' 
 
 The i.hrase tlmn ,„n, ,.//,.,■ exeludts r.ismank from the class 
 
 with whnl. he IS conipan.l. We can ,..oi,eily sav, I'.ismarck 
 
 s greater tnan any Ch.n.se stateMnan, hecanse Hismau k, 
 
 I'l'ng a Gennan, ,loes not l.dorg to the cla.s, of ( hintse 
 
 statesmen. 
 
 NoTi: L'. — A void such enois as, " He rcul the two 
 first .yUnzas of the liymn." Say " tlic lirst two," 
 (that is the first and semml). In speaking of two sets 
 of objects we might .say, " the two Hrst," to designate 
 the first of each series. 
 
 Special Adjectives. 
 
 This and That.— The demonstrative adjectives this 
 and that must be used only with .lingular nouns; 
 ///'w and thosr with plural noun.s. 
 
 Note. -Never use the personal pronoun them for the ad- 
 jective tliosc ; • them books ' for ' thus,-, books.' 
 
 Either and Neither.— iL'i7//e/- and neithor proi)erly 
 ai)i)ly to i,nc of two objects— not mo.e than two. 
 
 f,)yf"/'.^ '* \^ .''?"*''=* *'' ^''y ''^f'hn, James, and Henry are 
 faithful hoy.s ? 'ither lad will carry the message ?' ^ 
 
 Such.— The adjective s,ir.h is often improperly used 
 for the adverb ' so.' 
 
 ' She is such an extravagant woman ' should be ' she 
 
 ^3-traraga)tt a woman.' 
 
 18 SO 
 
 Explanation 
 
 >hich is 
 
 -Such dennt.pa I-ln,! 
 
 ^f«» 
 
 idea to be expressed. 
 
 j^ 
 
Ml 
 
 KN(!I.ISH (!liAMM\U. 
 
 Like. — Tlio a.ljcftive //7,v is somotiriHvs iinpiop.ilv 
 used tor ,is. Victdiy must end in possession ///,- toil 
 iti sleep. - f;hi'/sfn,„'. Thi.s 'should l.e, ' Vietoi V i.miM 
 eud in possession, 'is (does) toil in sleep.' 
 
 The Artirlcs. 
 
 A or .1 '/ and T/i>'. 
 si-K. lAj, III IK. The article should be repeated before 
 each of a series of nouns representing diflFerent things, 
 but not before each of several nount^ denoting the 
 same thing. 
 
 |{EM AUK -Tlio artii I.' is reiieatf.! lu-fo-o ji series of adje.- 
 tivea descrd.uiij .iitterent things ; l.ut it is i..>t repeated whe,„ 
 tile Hdjeetivea (lescrilie the s;ui;e tiling. 
 
 ILLtSTIlATIOXS. 
 
 1. \n A(;fc of Parliiiinont requires the assent of f/ir 
 
 Queen, f/n^ I.ords, and f/ic Commons. 
 
 2. Fte was the founder an<l |»ati-on of the insti v 
 
 tion. 
 
 .'5. I dislike the \ow^, rambling, ai c ohseure sen- 
 tences of that author. 
 
 4. We saw a red, white, and 1)1 ue fli" 
 
 Exn.vNATroN' — This means, we saw one flai? having the 
 three colcrs, red, white, and blue. 
 
 f). We saw a red, a white, and a blue fla^r 
 
 Exrr.Ax.vTio.v. -This means that wc saw three difTo.cnt 
 
 flt'lgS. 
 
 G. Both a noun and pronoun may be the subject of 
 a verb. Either a noun or pronoun is the sub- 
 ject of a verb. 
 
N V.N TAX. 
 
 14; 
 
 hxn AN.viiuN. riu-m.. sent.-n.eHari. incrnTt. Tl... rti.i.. 
 sUuM be niHert..! ... ea.1. inHtance In-f.-n- the hcc.,,,,1 ,{ t\, 
 no.m ." f'h ^'""'"' '" -"'»t'-"^-*^'"" = Hoth a n.„„, a,..i . ,, - 
 
 . .i^es iH, that when there is a close connectior between 
 two nouns, indicated by the correlative either o? 
 neither nor. both and, the article must be repeated ' 
 
 I ..• 8a ne prmnplc app).... wlu-n the .nt....luciny .ofrtuufc 
 
 7. A man, woman, and infant » (!r • ridin" in 
 
 tli( 
 
 cai-s. 
 
 lip 
 
 I 
 
 Kxrr,ANATic)N.--T)u.s s.-ntenre is incorre.t. The aifide n 
 may he un,lerHtcM,<l before the Hee.m.l „o„n, .nnn.nu 1m t who 
 
 U^pr^^erS'^^^ '^^"^^ ^^"^ '''''''" '"^^'^^ '^ ^ ^^^^ 
 
 H. An adjecvive or participle must h.dong to some 
 noun or pronoun. 
 
 KXPLAXATI'KV- -Supplying, th.-elJipsis, we have 'Anadjec- 
 
 tm- and an part.c.ple.' It shouhl he • An ad.ject.ve or . .ar- 
 
 up.e A simple way of avoi.lu.K the dimiulty a« to the 
 
 use of the ar ,cie .s to nse the phiral form of the nouns? and 
 
 '■'pk'H must belong to some noun t r pronoun.' 
 
 'J. The variation, or deviation of the compass was 
 first observed by Columbus. 
 
 Explanation.— This sentence is strictly correct. ' Devia 
 
 tion ,8 use.l to explain ' variation,' and is .synonymons with 
 
 It, and hfnce It is not necessary to rn>"nt the article. When 
 
 he c«mj»nction or connects two nouns, the second of which 
 
 peXd '-"^''''"^^"'"y "^ *^'« «"*• *J'« a'-ti^-le niust not iTe re 
 
 Note.— Mr. xMoon (Bad Enr/Ush, p. 31) takes f in.llpv 
 Murray to task for using the expres'si L ' an oration odfs"^ 
 course Moon's object- •, is that if the ellii^sis we^e sup- 
 plied the expression woul .ad • An oration or fan] di.-course ' 
 lint there is really no elHp , to be supplied, since ii accord 
 anoe with the above pi-u..i,.:e, the aiL'cle is L, tn h. "J!!?!'! 
 tiie secon mquu being explanatory ci the first ^ '"" '' 
 
 10 
 
.it 
 
 i 
 
 ill 
 
 146 
 
 EN(iLI.SH GRAMMA R. 
 
 MF When hoo nouns arc thus connected in an crplanatoru 
 way, a comiiia should he 2^fnced after the first. 
 
 10. He is a better statesman than soldier. 
 
 Explanation. — In sentences like this — sentences in which 
 the two nouns denote the same person, the article is not re- 
 peated before the noun following than or as. Repeating the 
 article before soldier will entirely change the meaning of the 
 sentence. ' A lawyer may be as good a man as a clergyman.' 
 Here the article is repeated because the comparison is made 
 between two different persons. 
 
 Exceptions. — It is not necessary to repeat the 
 article when no ambiguity would result from its 
 omission, as, " We saw the King and Queen." 
 
 On the other hand, infractions of the strict rule are 
 sometimes allowable in the repetition of the article, 
 as, " lie rose a sadder and a wiser man." 
 
 Exercise 48. 
 
 Correct the Mistales in the U'-^e of the Article. 
 
 1. The importance of obtaining in early life a good education 
 
 and ample stock of ideas. 
 
 2. Tlie oral or written forms of a language. 
 
 3. An adjective in the comparative or superlative degree 
 
 must precede an adjective modified by more or most. 
 
 4. The dash is mostly used to denote an unexpected or em- 
 
 phatic pause of variable length. 
 
 o. No figures will render a cold or empty composition inter- 
 esting. — Blair. 
 
 6. When an adverb qualifies an adjective, participle, or in- 
 
 finitive, it is generally placed befure it. 
 
 7. The object of a transitive verb is a noun or a pronoun 
 
 which <lenotes the person or thing that the agent or 
 doer acts upon or controls. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 147 
 
 8. A noun or pronoun, used as the predicate of a pr-^position 
 18 m the nominative case. ^ tJosiiion, 
 
 t». Specifying a.ljective8 should be so used as clearly to 
 signify the real intention of the speaker or writer 
 
 ''• ^^htitrelo'ngr^"^^^ '^"^"'^^ *^'^ -^^^-tive to 
 
 ''• ^t4i:4ernl:!:r "^^ " -^e aneworaccep. 
 
 12. The liberty of capitalizing is carried to a great and al 
 most indefinite extent. ^ *^' 
 
 Syntax of the Adverb. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Speak c/t'ar/?/, if you speak at all. 
 
 2. Sweet day, so cool, ,sy> bright ! 
 
 3. How sweetly does the moonbeam smile ! 
 
 ■^"Tr \~J^^ adverb sometimes modifies a whole senfpnn« 
 
 s;;[^r^:::;^;s:^? ^^^ ^^'^^^ ^^*^- ^*-*« ^^^^^^^-t 
 
 some word that the adverb may mo,lif;. eS4 "ThZ 
 IS none that is righteous. No, [there is] not one^ "« n 
 like poetry ? [1 Tike it] very inich.' ■■ "'' ^'' >'«" 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 
 nearly.. .An adverb of manner, modifying " speak," 
 according to Rule XII. 
 
 ^'' ^" adverb, degree, modifying "coul," accord- 
 ing to Kule XII. 
 
 How. . . . An adveib, degree, modifying " sweetly," ac 
 cording to Rule XII. 
 
M{ 
 
 148 
 
 ENliLISII (iKAMMKR. 
 
 NoiK '2. -Cnimeitivc advc.'ibs join clauses ; as, We watchud 
 tvhilf he slept. 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 J\ir.se t/ir folloinhuj Advkrhs. 
 1 . Slowly and sadly m'c laiil him down, 
 ii. Ai;d now a bubble bursts, an<l now a world 
 '.\. For them no more the blazing hearth shall burn. 
 
 4. The enemy was completely in my power. 
 
 5. Nothin<( is too gross or too rclined, too cruel or too 
 
 trihiug, to be practised. 
 
 Practical Syntax of the Adveub. 
 
 207. Adverbs and adverbial phrasffs should be so 
 
 placed with reference to the words they are intended 
 
 to modify as to bring out the meaning clearly, and to 
 
 round the seiitence agreeably. Hence the foUo'ving — 
 
 (irKNKUAi. liui.E OK rosmoN.— All adveib should be 
 placed in close proximity to the word that it modifies. 
 
 The adverb is usually j)laced hcjnre adjectives and 
 other adverbs, and aftvr verbs. 
 
 illistrations. 
 The weather is nitensehj cold. 
 She speaks very distiiidli/. 
 The horse ran ><t"ijtly. 
 
 NorK 1.— The adverb is frequently placed between 
 the auxiliary and the principal verb ; as, 
 
 The sea was grcvhail/i/ gaining on the buildings. 
 
 NoTK. 2. Adverbs are often made more emphatic by 
 n1a.rinff them before the verb : as : — 
 
 Sloioly and sadly we laid hiir^ 'ijvn. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 140 
 
 tri I he proper plucmg of advcrba i« a matter of iiicc tast- 
 ami of kcon ju.lgnunt. 'I'l.r art -.vill h.'«t be learne.l, not l.y 
 Ht.i. yii.g nilcH that are H.il.ject to imiiiberle«.s exceptionH, l.iit 
 l>y (lealmg with actual exainpIcH. 
 
 ILLL'STitATION.S. 
 
 1. We can not d(,>,..ivo them of merit w/mJ/,/, 
 
 Exi-LANATioN The adverb •wh<.lly' i.s inelegantly placed. 
 It .8 meant to relate to the verb ' ,Icp,ive.' and the interven- 
 tion (,f the wordH 'them <.f ni.-Hf between the adverb and the 
 verb obscures the relation. It si, ,uld b.-, We can not irhofh/ 
 ileprive them of merit. 
 
 2. I lioi)o N,d nnirh to tiro those I shall not happen 
 
 to j.lease. — /;/•. Johnsim. 
 
 KxPLANATioN.— Doctor Johnson did not mean to aav that 
 
 he ihA uoi much hope to tire, but thut he hoped not to tire 
 
 marit . fhe sentence should be constructed in this manner • 
 
 I hope I shall not much tire those whom I shall [or mayl not 
 
 liiippen to pleafu. "'^ 
 
 X This mode of e.x|)res,«iori rather suits familiar 
 than grave style.— Jf//m?y's (!ru„nn>ir. 
 
 Exi'LANATio.N'.— As the comparison is not intfud.-d to be 
 between suitim, and not .suidn;/, but between suiting one kind 
 ot style (namely, ' a familiar) in preference to ,uwtL r. the 
 ii.lverhol comparison should be placed, not before the verb 
 _ .suit which it IS not meant to cpialify, but Ix-forc; the adjective 
 aniiliar, to which it is intendcMl to relate. MakiiiL/ this 
 alteration, the .sentence b.-comes, 'This mode of cxjyression 
 suits mAz-r familiar than grave style.' But the sentence is 
 still taulty. A particular kind of style, and not style in gene- 
 ral, is spoken of; hence the indelinite article should be used 
 Fu ly corrected, the sentence reads, 'This mode of expn-ssion 
 suits riifhtr a familiar than a grave stylo. 
 
 4. The colon may bo //roy;er6/ applied in the follow- 
 ing CAseH.—Mtfrraij's (Grammar. 
 
 Exi ' \NATi..N.- -The vriter did not mean that the colon may 
 
 oe applied in a prop,-, vntntirr, but that it in proper to annlv 
 
 nc C01..U ; jience it iiiioiild b«i, ' may properly be applied,' etc. 
 

 150 
 
 EN(JL1SII ORAMMAR, 
 
 5. It is ;i lVi;»|ueut iiiid ciiititiil cnoi- In tin; \viitinj,'s 
 er>'n ot'soiiitf dlstinguisheil iuitliors. — Mamii/s 
 (f'riiminar. 
 
 t 
 
 m 
 
 Explanation.— ^Tho position of 'even' oonfuscs the sense l)j' 
 suggesting a (jUiililieation of 'writings.' 'Even' sliould ]w 
 eiuric'l to the other side of tlie preiiosition ; the sentence will 
 then read thus : 'in the writings of < ecu some distinguished 
 authors. ' 
 
 C. A mastcr-iuiiul was c/ziall// ,/iiiiting in the cabi- 
 net and in the fiehl. 
 
 ExPLANATrox.— This should bo, ' Was wanting e(/iiallt/ in 
 tlie calnnet,' ete. Take notice that in this example, as in 
 Illustration;}, the adverh Uhh ii mi.rctl n'/i-niiiy. 'Equally' 
 modifies innitinij, hut it has reference also to the phrase ' in 
 the cabinet and in the fiehl.' T!.e principle in such cases is. 
 
 that the adverb should be placed between the two 
 words or expressions to which it has reference. 
 
 7. I liavo been disappointed (jreaflt/ at your conduct. 
 
 Exn.ANATiON.— Here the adverb (jri'iif/i/ is not correctly 
 ]tlaced. The sentence should read thus : '1 have been ijriathi 
 disappointed,' etc. 
 
 8. He u.sed to nftcii come. 
 
 I wislied to rculJtj know. 
 
 Explanation. —With the infiuite simjtlo tens'?, the adverb 
 must never separate the sign to from the verb ; it must either 
 l»reccde or it must follow the */7<o/(; infinitive form. Thus, 
 
 • He used often to con ,' or ' to come oflin.' ' I wished rrnll'i 
 to know,' or ' to know realbi With the intuiitive compound 
 tenses, of course, the same rule ai)plies as in other compouml 
 tenses. We say, ' It is believed to have oftm happened ; ' 
 
 • He is thought to be vdl informed on that suhject.' In these 
 examples the preposition to is not t?evercd from its infinitive. 
 
 208. The varieties of position and of reference in the 
 
 O I 
 
.SYNTAX. 
 
 151 
 
 1. Hi >i,i:t !),»'.< sIhj .v/y*.7.s- .. (at other times she m/r/s). 
 'J. Shr. souietliiK'.^ !siii<rs. . (at other times he aings). 
 3. She sings sometimes, .(but not freipienthj). 
 
 Only. 
 200. The most trouhlesoino of all our English ad- 
 verbs is the word ' only.' 
 
 According to the i>osition of ' only; the very same 
 word may Ije made to express several very different 
 iiicanings. The following examples will illustrate tiiis : 
 
 1. 'O/i/^/ he mourned for his brother.' 0«//y here expresses 
 
 an antithetical relation equivalent to "'but.' He was 
 generally a eold-hearteil man, ontti (hut, as an evjeption 
 to Ins general character) he mourned for his brother. 
 
 2. 'He-o)!/// (alone) mourned for his brother.' No one else 
 
 mourned for him. 
 
 .3. ' He on/^-mourned for his brother.' He did nothing else. 
 
 4. ' He mourned o?i^?/ for Ids brother.' And «"or no other 
 reason. 
 
 r>. ' He mourned for liis only brother.' His single brother • 
 only, an adjective. * 
 
 <!. ' He mourned for his brotlier o/t///' (alone) -and for no 
 one else. 
 
 ILLUSTRATI()N.S. 
 
 1. A term which only implies the idea of persons. 
 
 KxiM.ANATioN.— The force of exclusion possessed by 'only' 
 IS not meant to npply to the word 'implies,' but to the 
 word ' persons.' It should be ' which implies the idea of per- 
 sons oii/y.' * 
 
 2. I can only regard them as Scotticisms.— Z)mr? 
 
 Alford. 
 
 ExPLAVATiON.— The force of exclusioa in the word ' only 
 Ks iiul meant to apply to the verb 'regard,' but to the noun 
 
i 
 
 |]i: 
 
 i 
 
 ir>2 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ' SccttuisiuM. • 'I'he stniU'me shouM he, 'Jam rminl tbem 
 «///// aa .ScotticisniH.' 
 
 3. VVIien the article stands i>nfj/ before the first of 
 
 two or more connected nouns. 
 
 Ex PLANATioK. -This .should he, 'When the article stands 
 betore on/y the first,' etc. 
 
 4. The negroes are to appear at churcli onJi/ in boots. 
 
 Explanation. This means tliat when the .ler'roes no to 
 church they are to luive no clothing hut hoots. ' 
 
 The negroes are to appear on. y at church in hoots. 
 
 Tins niight mean that they are not to appear any where hut 
 at church, whether in hoots or out of tlicm. The proper ar- 
 rangement would he to connect 'in hoots' with its verb 'ap- 
 pear, and make 'only' qualify 'at church,' and no more. 
 I bus, the negroes are to appear in hoots onlij at church.' 
 
 Not Only. 
 270. The same difficulty in met \Titli in the use of 
 ' not only.' The following sentences will serve as- 
 ill ustrations : 
 
 1. By greatness I nut onh/ mean the bulk of any 
 
 single object, but the largeness of the whole 
 view. 
 
 This should read, ' By greatness I mean not unlu the hulk ' 
 etc. • ' 
 
 2. Thales was not ^^/t/// famous for his knowledge of 
 
 nature, but for his moral wisdom. — KnJiAd. 
 
 This sentence should read. 'Thales was famous not ouhi for 
 his knowledge of nature, hat also for his moral wis.lom. " 
 
 Alone. 
 271. Alone, when used adver))ially, should be placed 
 immediately after the verb that it modifies. As, The 
 teacher was sittituj alotie in th.- school-room. 
 
K 
 
 XI>LANAri(».N. 
 
 SYNTAX. 153 
 
 . . . '" thia seiiteiice the iiieaiiii.L' is, 'The 
 
 tt'iicher was aittm« Inj himsd/ in the .srliool-n.oin. ' It we said 
 the te:i.-aer r/A;//< wivs sittiii^ in the school -n.om,' we sho.iM 
 .•ouvey the ijlea that noboibj ds. was sitting in the sehool-rooni. 
 Here alone is an adjoetive limiting 'teacher.' It would be 
 l>ctter to say only the teacher,' etc. 
 
 Some Misused Adverbs- 
 
 -^72. Where . This Relative Adverb must not be 
 used in introducing clauses unless the reference is to 
 literal place. 
 
 ILI.rSTKATIONS. 
 
 1. Franklin lived in Philadelphia, whre the Decla- 
 
 ration of Independence was signed. 
 
 ExiM.AXATioN. -This is correct; hut we can not propeily 
 say, J he Americans aihlressed the king in a petition where 
 th-y asked for the liberties of British subjects.' Here 'in a 
 petition (loos not denote li/eral jilace, but merely pb-^e figura- 
 tively, and in all such cases the relative phrase 'in a-hlch' 
 must be used. 
 
 2. The only sentence which I can call to mind where 
 
 the words * so — as' are proper when speaking 
 affirmatively, are those in which the last of the 
 said words precedes a verb in the Infinitive 
 Mood.— .1/oon's Bad English, j). 139. 
 
 ,, ^^y y<'"n. though a discriminating critic, is guilty of 'liad 
 English m this sentence. Any scholar can see that the re- 
 ference made by the relative adverb where is to the noun 
 sentence," and, therefore, that the clause should be intrn 
 • need by m which. Thus ' The only sentences which [better 
 'ii"t\ 1 can call to mind in which the words,' etc. 
 
 273. How. . .This Relative Adverb must not be used 
 111 introducing clauses unless the reference is to literal 
 manner. Hence it can relate only to a verb, and can 
 
 llnf. I'al.lfr. i^, 
 
 v 
 
• i 
 
 154 
 
 EKGLTSII GRAMMAR. 
 
 ll-LLSritATIO.N. 
 
 I do not know how it may be done. 
 
 Kxn.A NATION. -This is correct; Imt wc can not properly 
 say, I know of no rule hoir it may he done, fn all such cases, 
 /'7/uA, with its api)ropriate prt'p<>sition, must be uaetl 'us: 
 J know of no rule l>i/ wliuli it may be done. 
 
 Tliere is .another misuse of hov^ illustrated by the followiuf; 
 scnu'nce : He said luxr he intended to buy a horse. Here it is 
 plain that the the proper connective is tiie conjunction that. 
 ' How that' and 'as how' are often wrongly used instead of 
 thul. 
 
 274. When... This Ad veil) cannot refer to a siiecific 
 noun ; it relates only to phrases, to clauses, or to 
 statements. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 The time is approaching [statement] wliea we shall 
 be free. 
 
 Expr.ANATtoy. — Tliis is correct ; but we cannot properly 
 say 'The hour iclun wc shall be free is aj>proaching,' because 
 in the latter form the reference is to tiie specific noun ' hour.' 
 In all such cases, irhkli, with its appropriate preposition, must 
 be used. 
 
 275. Whence — hence — thence. ...The preposition 
 /mm. is frecjuently used before these adverbs, but this 
 use is redundant, as (lirertlon from is imi>liod in the 
 adverbs themselves ; ivhriice being e((ual to from 
 ivhert; hence=frum here; thence=from there. 
 
 27G. So... A common misuse of this adverb is il- 
 lustrated by the following sentence : I will answer 
 his letter so soon as I receive it. 
 
 U 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 155 
 
 Kxi'i.ANAi ION. Tlic i.iop.T u.s«' of SO is I,. inlml„ce a cum- 
 lian.so.i (.f iiieciuality. We say 'John is not „j brave as Jatn.-s.' 
 To introduce a comparison of equatif!/, we use lui. Thus, John 
 is as strong (m James. T!ie sentence al.ove should read, I will 
 answer his letter as soon as I receive it. 
 
 277. Intransitive verbs cannot take adverbs as their 
 complement ; the complement of quality must belong, 
 to the subject, and consequently must be an adjective. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 The rose smells sinct. 
 
 Mary looks cold. 
 
 278. Would you .say 'the velvet feels smoofh .?' or 
 ' teels smooth/ 1/ /' 
 
 Would you say '|{uttuials sound harshly r or -sound 
 loirah r 
 
 Would you say ' the dog suiells ^Visayreeahl if r or 
 'smells (llmijreeohle ^ 
 
 Would you say 'slie looks p'ne J >/^ ' or ' lookn Jine V 
 
 Kxi'i.ANATio.v.— We say, ' Marj /ooZ.s cold' [she is cold], 
 liwause what we wisli is, not to mark the mamur of looking, 
 Imt to denote a qnalitu of Mary. If M-e change the intransi- 
 tive verb into a transitive verb by the addition of a preposi- 
 tion, and say, « Mary looks on John coldly; tht- expression is 
 ' orrect, because, in this instance we wish to denote the man- 
 nn- of her lookiwj-on, and /. i quality of Mary, 
 
t 
 
 i 
 
 150 
 
 i ' 
 
 'f 
 
 I 
 
 ■I* 
 
 
 ENGLISH OKAMMAR. 
 
 Double Negatives. 
 
 279. Two negatives must not be used when a nega- 
 tive statement is intended- 
 Two nni^iitivcs are ecjual to an atKiniative. 
 
 II.LISTKATIONS. 
 
 1. I liave tii)t done iintliltiij. 
 
 This meuns ' 1 have done sumrf/t/iiij.' If you ineiui a nega- 
 tive, say * 1 li;ive done iiof/uii'/,' or ' J have not done a in/ 
 tfiiny.' 
 
 2. He has eaten no bread i/<>r drunk i/n water these 
 two days. 
 
 Explanation. -The negative in nor ( not or), together with 
 the word no hefore irafrr, makes a douhle negati^e. Correct 
 tlius : He lias eaten no bread ami he has drunk no water ; or. 
 He has neither eaten ani/ bread nor has he drunk atu/ water, 
 etc. 
 
 280. But double negatives are elegantly used to 
 exjn-ess an affirmative, thus : "Nor did tliey not per- 
 ceive the evil plight in which they were, or the fierce 
 pains not feel." In place of saying, I am somewhat 
 actjuainted with his virtues, the sentence might be 
 turned tlius : 1 am nof ///^-acquainted with his vir- 
 tues. 
 
 , The principal negative prefixes are itii, dis, and //( (with its 
 various forms il, oj, in), ir, etc.) 
 
 Distribution of Adverbs. 
 
 281. When a sentence contains a number of ad" 
 verbs and of adverbial phrases, thev should be appro- 
 priately distributed in the sentence. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Cromwell called a council of his chief omoers secretly, 
 
SYNI AX. 
 
 157 
 
 II f Wiiulxor, lit till sNf/ij,:-<fi,,ii of Iiutoit, to tU'liljoriitu 
 coiueining the settlement of the nation. 
 
 Kxi-r.AN \TtoN.-— Here the adverbs anil a<lver1ti;il phraseH are 
 iiowiled together in tlie eeiitre. They sliouUl l)e (listrilmted 
 thus: .// tite. sinj,/<s/i,,n <>/ In fun, Cnutiwell sicrif/i/ oulh-d a 
 r.iniicil of his chief olHcerH (/< H'itn/.sor to delilierate concern- 
 ing tin- settlement of tlie nation. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 /// fin' fnlloiriiHi sci/fn/res, sec In In no hikhii ill(}'irt'iif 
 /xisi/ifiii.-t t/oii nni [ihiri' the Advkkhs, dinl till irliat ilif- 
 hnuo'tlic fhniKje of ixisitimi irll' hkiIi; In the ineatiuiij 
 of rtich - itcnce. 
 
 \. We used to see them very frecjuently. 
 
 2. Sometimes he returns home very late. 
 
 3. We may probably go there to-morrow. 
 
 4. The winter in pant ; already th« trees and herbs begin to 
 unfold their tender green. 
 
 T). At last he opened his mnuth and spoke. 
 
 <!. He rescdved immediately ti make an apology. 
 
 7. I went immetliately to his assistance, and never shall I 
 fiiryet the Scene. 
 
 Syntax of Prepositions. 
 
 282. Prepositions express certain relations between 
 things and other things, between things and actions, 
 or between things and attributes. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. - 
 
 1 James has a, jj/'cfitrt- of the r(ithpitiid. 
 
 2. Tlie fox ran frohi the ilixj. 
 
 o. The emperor was eager for war. 
 
 I ■» 
 
V)S 
 
 KN(il,|Si| liKAMMAH. 
 
 ■I 
 
 1 
 
 •I: 
 
 '" f 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 'f 
 
 ',1 
 
 ■ 
 
 Kxri-ANATioN.— (1). Tlij preposition '((f iiiarlvH thu n-Ia- 
 tion hetwc'cn tlie tilings (tenotod l>y '••itlie<lral and pifturu. 
 fj). 'From' inaika tlie relation of thj <'»joct din/ ami the 
 action expressed hy 'ran.' ' For' marks .,n' relation !)etween 
 tlie tliinj^ denoted by the noun ' war' and the attribute ex- 
 pressed by the adjective ' eager.' 
 
 KuLE XIII. — Prepo8ition3 join the nouns and pro- 
 nouns which they govern to other nouns, or to verbs, 
 or to adjectives. 
 
 Around the rugged rocks the ragged rascal ran. 
 
 Model fou rAiisiNc. 
 
 Around. — A preposition, joining 'locks' and * ran,' 
 according to KuleXlU. 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 parse i/te Prepositions. 
 
 1. The smiling daisies blow beneath the sun. 
 
 '2. We crossed the river by a bridge v 'e of ropes. 
 
 3. They sat them down upon the yellow sand. 
 
 4. We visited the ruins of the great Thebes. 
 
 5. How fresh the meadows look al)ove the river. 
 
 (). The mocking-bird loses little of its energy by conlinc- 
 ment. 
 
 7. The deer across their greensward bound. 
 
 8. I saw a wearied man dismount from his hot steed. 
 
 9. She waited underneath the dawning hills. 
 
 10. The noise of battle rolled among the mountains by the 
 winter sea. 
 
 Position of Prepositions, 
 and positio, a placing) is be/ore the words they govern. 
 
iSVMAX. 
 
 15U 
 
 -'HI. In i>o<'t»y tho pioposition frcquoiitly follows 
 the word it governs ; as, 
 
 The rattling crags (imnng. — liijroii. 
 
 2H5. 'Jiio preposition sliould not l.o separated by an 
 intermediate phrase from ''<" word it governs. 
 
 ' Appears Lausanne, irith at its feet tlw Utth' riJlnj,; 
 ct Ouchy,' should be h the little village,' etc. 
 
 286. When <'ithrr is followed by "'•. neithrr by ni.,- or 
 hull, by and, a piepositlon coming aft^r the flrnl of the 
 pair must be repeated after the secc 
 
 ILLUSTKATIori. 
 
 i. Mary is neither in the house nor In the garden. 
 
 2. This, in philosophical writing, has a disagreeable 
 effect, both ui^on tiie memory and upon the 
 understanding of the reader. 
 
 c. Theciio' /" prefixes or suffixes is determined 
 n ly by their meaning, but, etc. 
 
 KxPi.ANATioN. — Better, Theohcice o/-prcfixe8 o. ■ suffixes 
 etc. ; because, when the correlative both, rithn; or /,. ither i!s 
 plainly implied, the pnnciple given aliove lioMs good. 
 
 T/iat is applied to j^ersons as well as [fu] thing j. 
 
 KxrLANATiox. —The preposition used before the fir .-f two 
 nouns jomed by the connective as well as, should ' o used 
 l>cture the second also. 
 
 Between and Among. 
 
 287. Betireen literally signifies hij tn-aiv, that is, by 
 twos. Hence it can not apply to innre 'han two. We 
 may say, Mother divided the apple between tister and 
 
 i> -H 
 
100 
 
 K.\(;i,isii (;kammau. 
 
 hi 
 
 f ■ 
 
 ///<^, hut not Ixitwecn ./o////, ./(itiie.-<, uml MurtlKt. The 
 preposition (Diuhkj or (imoiHjd is used to denote dis- 
 tribution applied to more than two. The booty was 
 divided ainomj the forty tliieves. 
 
 Rhetoric of PrepositionR. 
 
 2S8. A statement is sometimes made ellectlve by 
 repeating the jireposition before each word of a series, 
 Thus, 1 will buy //•//// you, sell vlfh you talk iritli you, 
 walk miih you ; but 1 will not eat . ' you, drink 
 irii!) you, nor pi'ay witii you. — Shdli'^pt n'c. 
 
 , Appropriate Prepositions. 
 
 *J8i). riiere are many words that can be followed by 
 but one i)reposi'?ion ; there are other words that ad- 
 mit different prepositions, the sense greatly varying 
 with eacli. 
 
 Care shoul'', be taken to select the prer-osition ex- 
 actly adapted to express the relation intended 
 
 1. Making sense of ifxdf. — MnrniiJ^ (iraiitimir. 
 
 ohould be //// ifficJf. 
 
 2. Tn respect of time. — Mnrraij. Should be WIHi 
 
 r(''<ped to time. 
 
 o. W;.' T> T was deliberating o/what new qualifica. 
 tions 1 should asi)ire, should be. When I was 
 delib')rating irith regard to what new, etc. 
 
 Ask for. —If he ask for bread, will he give him a stone ? 
 Biblr. 
 
 Ask ./>(>?». -We ('.'-■/• not snch froit thee. H'DKnis. 
 
 Ask <;/'. — Itutofthii never-dyinjf soul «.s^- things that cauuot 
 
fiVNTix. ij, 
 
 ■^'"Viir"'-"""""'' '"' »«"« ™ '"-■"■" fro.. We.- 
 Avcrse l<y.~A,r,:i.: to all innovation. 
 
 ''""y'lU™'"*-"" '"''""' '•"- '" c»«»< hi, h„u.e.- 
 (.Mil t,.rf- (rUrart).-Will not call back ki, wor.l.,.-TO.. 
 
 O.I1 „,.,n (l,ra>)._e„,, „^„ „„ („ j,,^, ,,^^^, trouble. -&,,,, 
 
 fomparo (o (as illustration). —Ho mmmLl r„.. , .. 
 
 anu fancy („ a metoor.- /XX' " '" "■" »""• 
 
 Comp,„^„,,« ,i,. ,„ality,._e„,,,„„ „„i, ,„„,i,.^_^ _^ .^^^ ^.^ 
 
 '''''°tiL3.::!:°^^^^^^^^^^^ ■' »> --"'-« ^ c<„,„..., ,. 
 
 ""tlCy^^t;*;,:™" '""" ^■°"'" ~-"/P>ains .„„ 
 0,„,«t ,,.,» (a,„eo).-„o»lth „,„«, „.,v/, temperance alone.- 
 
 '""SS;™""' »""-l«)-Co«to.; »„.,-«thy val„r._ 
 OmtonJ „■,•,* ,a per,on). -Neither .,ml,n.l. .,-Uh them. -yy,„,, 
 '"'Vert '" •'■'"""1''<''-««™1 "-".oa to have ,,,^„, 
 
 f 
 
 
 i^rSv;"' '' i^^'ni..;.-A painter copies from the life.- 
 
 11 
 
162 
 
 ENQLlSn GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^1. 
 
 .;• 
 
 Defend (others) from. —Ho drf^'Uih them from danger. 
 
 Defend (ourselves) a;/(ti««<.— The queen is ahle to defeiul her- 
 self against all hor enemies. — Sivij't. 
 
 Die o/" (disease).— She dkd oj scarbt fever. 
 
 Differ from (in (iuality).— Nor how the hero difftrs from the 
 brute. 
 
 Differ i'/iV^ (in opinion). —Those \i\\o differ u'ith you in their 
 sentiments. — Addi-tun. 
 
 Disappointed in (what fs had). — He was disappointed m hi? 
 friend. 
 
 Disappointed o/ (what <,s not had).— Tii^.n to he disappointed of 
 what we have only the expectation. — Adam Smith. 
 
 Divide amongst or among (three or more).— Divide it amongftt 
 the men. 
 
 Divide hetireen (two).— It was divided beiiceen her heart and 
 lips. 
 
 Exception from (a rule or law). 
 
 Exception to (rule or law).— That proud exception to all nature's 
 laws. — ro2)c. 
 
 Indulge in (habitual).— We indahje ourselves in the gratifica- 
 tions, etc.— Attcrbury. 
 
 Indulge icith (occasional). 
 
 Lean against (a wall).— Leaning agalmt a^iillAr.—reacharn. 
 
 Lean on (■■< ':taff).— 1 lean no more on superhuman aid.— 
 Byr0n. 
 
 Lean to (an opinion).— i-'ft^mgr to either side. — ^r«^;s. 
 
 Lean to (\nas). — ''i:aned to virtue's sulc — GohJsmith. 
 
 Listen for {expected sound).— He listened for the traveller's 
 tread. 
 
 Listen to {present aoniul).— Listen to the noise.— Dtwu*. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 163 
 
 //r<w.^ a snial] t..wn ; ^V. i,i [.on.loi. ; AV, in France AIv 
 father Imd at Hleuheiin then.- .SoH//ni/. ^ 
 
 Live o^— Who lice at home at ca.ac.—Uomt. 
 
 Live in (state).— He Herd and died in poverty. 
 
 Live >'j.ou (food).-They live vpon other v^niin-ols. - A rhuth not. 
 
 Live »/. to (rules).-Z/rc- .7. ^0 the dictates of vi^t^Hon.-Addlson. 
 
 Live <r///, (a person). -Then //a' «■///,, nie.-,S7,,jZsy,e«^(.. 
 
 Look at (to regard).- As if it looked at ^omQth[u..Stcrne. 
 
 Lo< k/«r (what is lost or expected).-ZooAv,; /;.>• death with 
 the same expectation ^i,for victory. -Southri/. 
 
 Look on (see). -I'll be candle-holder, and look on.-ShaLy.mrc. 
 
 Look to (guard).— Look well to thy herda.—IJiblc. 
 
 Look vjHm.-Look not «y)o« me thus reproachfully. _Z?^ro«. 
 
 Look up to (heaven). -Let us look up to God.—Bacon. 
 
 Prevail on ) 
 
 Prevail iij^m [ (persuade). -/Vtm/^ upon some judicious friend 
 Prevail with ) — S'.'-ift. 
 
 .Sink beneath (a sword). -Worlds must sink beneath the stroke. 
 Sink doicn (penetrate, faint). 
 
 ^'""^ n'ilron''^'' ^^"^ ^"^ «''«*'"^h)--He sinks into tliy depths. - 
 
 Sink,j..<>. (a burden). -A nation sinkin<j under its doUa.- 
 
 '"'"''/Sai^''""'''^' '^^^«'»)--He sank upon my breast. - 
 Start at (dreadf',! sight). -He .-.(-ar/., at sin.- Dryden. 
 .Start /nj//i (a nlacG^.— .^hall -'"'•' a.-.. 
 
 i'- 
 
 4. 
 
n 
 
 
 164 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Start W(V/( (;i ci'iupauiou). \ 
 
 Sv up (spring). — Shirt up from the dead. — Popf. 
 
 Strive a(jaiiid ) a i)cison or ) Private pity strove trith public 
 Strive with \ ob8t"cle. \ hate. — Denkam. 
 
 Strive/or (an object). — Pretenders oft fur empire strice. — 
 Druihn. 
 
 Struggle /or (an object) 
 
 Struggle xritk (a person). 
 
 Taateyo/' (inclination). — A ta sir for wit and sense. — Sin'/t. 
 
 Taste of (morsel, flavor. ) The taste of it was like wafers. 
 
 Weary iii. — IVcari/ in well-doing. 
 
 Weary 0/ (task, duty). — Society grown wcari/ 0/ the load. — 
 
 Cou-2)cr, 
 
 Weary wit/i. — Not to be weary withyon. — Shakspcari--, 
 Wait at (table). — Made him wait at table. — Swift. 
 \Vait/o»' (an expectation). — And waited for his prey. — Soxithey, 
 Wait on (a person). — 1 will ivait on him. — Shakspeare. 
 
 Syntax of the Conjunction. 
 
 Rule XIV. — Con junctions connect words, phrases, 
 and clauses- 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1, With many a weary step and many a groan, 
 Up the liigh hill he heaves a huge round stone, 
 
 ii.ere ' and' connects the phrases — tcith rtmny a weary step 
 •and many a groan. 
 
 spoke not a word of sorrow. 
 
 ,.., ;,i ,,,.,7 ...« 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 165 
 
 ' And' in the first line connects/ >r and sJwrf^ ; in the aecond 
 se"coml.''°"''*' '^'''^"'' "^ *^'' "^"^ ^'"« ^^'th that of the 
 Model for Parsing. 
 
 And.— A conjunction, co-ordinative, connecting the 
 words ' few' and ' short,' according to 
 Rule XIV. 
 
 290. In parsing correlative conjunctions, as hot/i, 
 n>,<1, neither, nor, say that the first serves to introduce 
 the second. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 
 Parse the Conjunctions. 
 1. He has some money, but you have none. 
 
 2. 
 
 Twas noon, 
 vnd Helon knelt beside a stagnant pool 
 In the lone wilderness. 
 
 3. The trees have lost their foliage because autumn has 
 come. 
 
 4. Though deep, yet clear ; though gentle, yet not dull, 
 to'sit''^'^ ^'""^ breathes so very hard that we find it impossible 
 
 t). Neither the horse nor the carriage was injured. 
 
 PiiACTioAL Syntax of the Conjunction. 
 
 Note.— The Syntax of Conjunctions has been 
 treated incidentally in connection with other parts of 
 •speech. Conjunctions have very little syntax of their 
 own. They indeed exercise an important influence 
 over wor<h associated with the words that they conjoin; 
 hut this influence has already been considered under 
 the Verb, the Adjective, etc. The following are th.^ 
 l»nncipal points relating to conjunctions themselves : 
 
 
i 
 
 4 
 
 166 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAK. 
 
 
 .i 
 
 '■ I 
 
 V 
 
 ■ I 
 
 ■ t 
 
 And. or Or. 
 
 2'i»l. The Copulative '///'/ is soini'tiiiies wrongly used 
 in place of th<! DiKJiinctivo or. Also, or is often mis 
 used for and. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Tt is obvious that a language like tlio CJreek <ni(l 
 I^tin, etc. 
 
 Explanation. — Here tlie fit oonjunctiou is 'or.' Moreover, 
 the definite artirle slioulil be repeated with the .sceond noun. 
 The expression eorrectly v, rittt-u stands thus : It is obvious 
 that a language like the Greek or the Latin, ete. 
 
 2. A perfect Alphabet of the English language, 
 
 and, indeed, of evert/ ot/i'r language, would 
 contain a number of letters prejist^ly equal to 
 ,the number of single articulate words belong- 
 ing to the language. — Murraijs Grammar. 
 
 KxPi.AXATiON. — Tlie same error is found here. The author 
 sliould have written, A ])ertect alphabet of the English lan- 
 guage, or, indeed, of (/«.'/ other language, wouM, etc. 
 
 3. Adjectives relate to nouns or pronouns. 
 
 Exi'LANATlcx. — The conjunction (ovl would here better 
 serve 'o make the connection intended : * Eelate to nouns and 
 to pronouns.' 
 
 Or— its double use. 
 
 292. The conjunction or has two uses : its use in 
 joining two parts of an alternative, and its use in 
 uniting synonyms. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 Christ or John the r.a])tist=Christ, or (what is 
 another |»erson) John the l!iii)tist ; Christ, or the l^Fos- 
 siiih=:l'hrist, or (wiiar is the same person ) the Ale^j 
 siah. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 167 
 
 In the lan<?uagc of law, the latter use of or is expressed l.y 
 ahn^ (literally, at anofhr fitnr) ■ as, Ileenan aliaa the Beiii- 
 ( la Boy. 
 
 Not— or and Not -nor. 
 
 29.3. When, of two members that are disjoined, the 
 hrst is a negative, the contrast may be made either 
 by or or by nor. Thus, The king, whose character 
 was not sufficiently vigorous, nor [or or] decisive, as- 
 sented to the measure. — Hame. The nor is more 
 emphatic, as it repeats the negative of the first term. 
 
 So -that. 
 
 294. In constructions requiring that as the cor- 
 relative of 80, the relative pronoun v^ho should not be 
 used in place of the conjunctions ' that ' or ' as.' 
 
 ILLUSTRATION. 
 
 At Bunker Hill there was no one so sanguine but 
 ivho feared defeat. 
 
 ExPLANATTOK. — ' Who' oan not fill tho office of a correlative 
 to 'so.' Either 'that' or 'so' should be eiiiploved. Tuns, 
 ' There was no one so san<?uine that he diil not fear defeat,' or, 
 ' no one so sanguine as not to fear defeat. ' 
 
 Doubt,— but, or that. 
 
 295. The verb doubt is followed by either that or 
 hut. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. I can not doubt that I have contributed some- 
 
 thing to the general literature of my country. 
 
 — Hal lam. 
 
 » 
 
 2. It is not doulited hut the bishops were constitu- 
 
 ent members of this council. — Huny. 
 
 I 
 
 Caution.— Be careful 
 
 but irJidt, 
 
 not to follow 'doubt' l>y but that oj- 
 
Wt-iWA.- 
 
 J 68 
 
 ENOLISH GRAMM.^R. 
 
 As— as ; So as, 
 
 296. *As — as' is used in affirmative comparison ; 
 'so — as' in negative comparison. Example; Mine is 
 as good a-s' yours ; but his is not so good as either. 
 
 And -and ; No— nor. 
 
 297. In poetry, 'and — and' is often used for ' both 
 — and;' 'nor — nor' for 'neither — nor.' Examfi-k ; 
 *'And trump a/"^ timbrel answered keen." — iScutt. " I 
 whom 7i()r avarice nor pleasure moves." 
 
 Neither— nor ; Either— or ; Whether— or. 
 
 298. These may be called alternative conjimdions. 
 An alternative is a choice between two, and onlij two : 
 hence these conjunctions must not be used to unite 
 more than two terms. ' Either — or' denotes one thintr 
 with a choice of another; 'neither' means simply not 
 either; 'whether — or' means literally ivhlch of the 
 two — or. This principle is constantly lost sight of. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. These rules should be kept in mind as aids, 
 either for speaking, composing, or parsing cor- 
 rectly. — Morrell's firammar. 
 
 Explanation. 
 • either. ' 
 
 -Incorrect. liectify it by omitting the 
 
 2. Neither in France, in Spain, in Italy, nor in 
 Germany, is this false and absurd appellation 
 in use. — C>>hbett's Grm/nnar. 
 
 Correct thus : ' This false aiul aljsnrd appellation is not in 
 use in i-rauce, .Spain, Italy, or Uormany.' 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 Now. 
 
 169 
 
 209. There is a peculiar use of the adverb * now,' 
 that renders it in certain cases a, conjunction. Ex- 
 ample : He was promised a holiday if he executed 
 his task ; now, he has done his task ; hence he is en- 
 titled to the holiday. 
 
 Connection of Terms. 
 
 300. Any two terms connected by a conjunction 
 should be the same in kind or quality, not different 
 or heterogeneous. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. — Macaulay wrote the history of England with 
 the two-fold purpose of clearing the name of 
 the Whigs from the chai'ges made by Hume, 
 and to set forth the real life of the English 
 people. 
 
 Explanation. — Notice the two expressions joined by the 
 conjunction ' and.' 'The purpose of clearint; the name,' etc., 
 and 'tlie purpose [understood] to set forth,' etc. The two 
 terms are different or heterogeneous — the one being a par- 
 ticipial construction, the other an infinitive construction, and 
 accordingly the sentence violates the rule. Correct it thus : 
 The purpose of clearing the name, etc., and of settiiuj forth 
 the real life, etc. 
 
 2. There are many persons who have the means of 
 
 doing good, hit have not the desire to do good. 
 
 Explanation. — This sentence produces an unpleasant ef- 
 fect, owing to the fact that the two phrases of iloin<i and to 
 do are not of the same kind, but are heterogeneous. The sen- 
 tence may be bettor constructed thus : Alaiiy persons have 
 the moans of doing good, but have not the desire of doing 
 good ; or, better still, Many persons have tlie means, with- 
 out tho rtpsii'fi. of doini? L'ood. . 
 
 3. I would do as m> -h or more work than John. 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 ■''■ ' > 
 
 - ■ {',■ :■ 
 ft.' 
 
 kk 
 
170 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 '.'#> 
 
 «y. 
 
 ^^ Explanation. — "Ah much " should !>€ followed by as, and 
 "more" hy than f 'orrect by comnhtiug the first statement, 
 and makinc the second elliptical, thus : * I would do as much 
 work as John, or more. 
 
 Ellipsis of Conjunctions. 
 301. Some conjunctions are often proiHJily gup- 
 pressed. .Such are : 
 
 1. — Awf and or before all but the last of several 
 words, phrases, or clauses of the same kind in 
 a series, and in the elevated style of writing, 
 even before the last. Example : Science has 
 now left her retreats, [and] her shades, [and] 
 her selected company of votaries. 
 
 2. Either before or, and ruifher before nor. Ex- 
 
 ample : None of them [either] returned his 
 gaze, or seemed to notice it. — Dickens. 
 
 3. That when the connecting word between the 
 
 principal member and the dependent proposi- 
 tion of a sentence. Example : But Brutus 
 says [that] he was ambitious. — Shaks^ re. 
 " You're sure [that] you did not, sir," said 
 Mr. Winkle. — Dkkens. 
 
 4. Yat after though. Example : Though he fall, 
 
 [yet] he shall not be utterly cast down. 
 
 The Rhetoric of Conjunctions. 
 302. A rhetorical effect may be produced by omit- 
 ting conjunctions. In like manner, a rhetorical effect 
 is produced by supplying conjunctions where they 
 would ordinarily be omitted. In each case it in de- 
 parture from the common pract -e that produces the 
 effect. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 171 
 
 Tlli'STHAtion — (Jonjiinrtion onn'fteiL 
 
 Throu^rh many a «lark and dn-ary vale 
 They paHsed, and inaiiv a region doloinus ; 
 O'er many a frozen, many a liery Alp, 
 Jiock-n, cdirn, lairs, j'tns, bona, dins, and xhivhs of drath, 
 A universe vf death.— Milton. 
 
 IkLUSTRATION — CoilJuHcflotl.s- in full. 
 
 Seasons return, but not to me returnn 
 Day, or the sweet approach of even or morn, 
 Or sight of vernal hloom, or summer's rose. 
 Or Hoiks, or herds, or human faee divine. J/<7/on. 
 
 Syntax of the Infinitive. 
 
 1. Parsing. 
 
 Hulk XV, — 1- The Infinitive mood is go verned by 
 the verb, noun, or adjective whica it limits. 
 
 2. The infinitive is often used as a noun, either as 
 the subject or as the object of a finite verb. 
 
 Note 1. — The infinitive sometimes modifies a whole sen- 
 tence. 
 
 Note 2.— The infinitive, as the object of a transitive verb, 
 should be distinguished from its use as the complement of an 
 intransitive verb. Compare illustrations 1 and 5. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. I ro77ie to hiirij Cicsar, (infin. limits v. '' come.") 
 
 2. There is a time to thoirc. (limits noun " time.") 
 
 3. The boy was laiafile to escape, (limits adj. 
 
 " umible.") 
 
 4. To err /x human, (subject of verb " is.") 
 
 5. He loves to travel, (object of transitive \prb 
 
 " travel.') 
 
 6. To speak plainly, he was to be blamed, (limits 
 
 senience.y 
 
 S- 
 
 c 
 

 ,"_ >WT ^- * ». 
 
 ^r'^ 
 
 I; 
 
 i 
 
 ■ 
 
 , ft- 
 
 I 
 
 ^^^ ENGLISH ORAMMAK. 
 
 MODKL For PaR8IN(i. 
 
 To bury (1). .a verb, transitive. ._-■ active, infi- 
 
 nitive, present, ^-veru-ju by the verb 
 "come," accord ni^ v T' le XV. 
 
 To err (4).. A verb, intransiti.e, u^Jar, infinitive, 
 present, used as - ,.n, -nominative, 
 subject of verb " ia ' according to "iule 
 XV. and I. 
 
 2. Practical Syntax. 
 
 Special RuLE.--ro, the sign cf the inflnitive is 
 omitted after those wovds which pre used as auxili- 
 aries to form certain moods and tenses; as, ahaU 
 wilt, nvhj, can, muat. 
 
 To is also generaUy omitted after the verbs hhl, 
 ilaro, need, malce, sec, perceive, ohserce, here, feel, let, 
 anc some others. 
 
 The passive voice of these verbs is generaUy fol- 
 lowed by to. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Dar'st thou, Cassius, now 
 
 I^eap i 1 with me into this ansrv flood ? 
 
 "dlr'S'^ ' *^ ' ' *^"' "'^"^ ''^^' *^« «»«" ''^ ^eiug omitted after 
 
 2. I m\o the man enter the shop. 
 
 The man was seen to enter the shop. 
 
 The inhnitive ■'emer" is without the sign to after the 
 aotu-e voice "saw "; but the sign is used after passive " wa^ 
 
 Tlie infinitive used as a complement to express ptir- 
 pose, is often introduced by in order ,• as 
 
 i turned slowly round, in order to take hcxhr aim. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 173 
 
 Fur, should not be used before the infinitive. It 
 
 was common in older Engliah ; a«, " VVhnt went ye 
 o\ii for to seef 
 
 Syntax of Participles and Gerunds. 
 
 303. Participles are used with certain auxiliaries 
 to make compound forms of the verb. Thus the pre- 
 sent particii)le is used after tho various moods and 
 tenses of am in the proi/rcsxive form ; the past parti- 
 ciple is used after h>cre in tho pur/ccl tenses, and after 
 the various parts of am to form the passive coke. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. I am strtkinij (Progressive Form). 
 
 2. I have struck (Present Perfect). 
 
 3. I am struck (Passive Voice). 
 
 Participles used in these ways are parsed with the 
 auxiliary, according to the form for parsing verbs. 
 
 304. Participles used without auxiliaries belong to 
 nouns, which they limit or modify in the same man- 
 ner as adjectives. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. A Peri, standing at heaven's gate, was sad. 
 
 *. TV > wretch, condemned witli life to part, 
 Still on hope relies. 
 
 3. Charles, having seen me, ran ir+^^o the hou u. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 Having seen (3) ... .A verb, transitive, irregular, aeo^ 
 
 saw, seen. Active voice, parti- 
 ciple perfect, used as an adjec- 
 tive, modifying " Charles," ac- 
 cording to Kule XI. 
 
174 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 305. Participles of transitive verbs in the active 
 voice govern the objective case. 
 
 seen. 
 
 The I'lonoun "mo" in sentence (,'}) is governed by " having 
 
 Errors in the use of Participles. 
 
 Sailing up the river, the whole town may be .seen. 
 
 Exi'LANATiON.— Tliis sentence illustrates a common error in 
 tla; use of the j'articiide introducing a ))lira;je. Snilin(j (a par- 
 tiviplc construed as an adjective) laust belong to some iloun ; it 
 here belongs to the noun 'own. Hut it is certainly not intended 
 to say ' the town sailing ;' the idea is ur sailing. The sentence 
 should be, ' Sailing up the river, we may see the whole town.' 
 The rule is, that when a ]>articiple introduces a phrase, tliat 
 participle must describe the subject of the next verb, and the 
 subject of the next veib must be what is intended to be des- 
 cribed. 
 
 306. The past participle should not be used for the 
 past tense, nor the past tense for the past participle. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. I done my example in arithmetic correctly. 
 
 2. I ,see)t him wlien he iluite it. 
 
 3. Alice has went to school this morninff. 
 
 Exi'LAXATioN. — "Done" in (1) and (2) should be did, as the 
 Jtast tease should here Oe used, and for the same reason 
 "seen' in (2) should be mw, " went" in (3) should be <j<m<', as 
 the past participle is rei^uired after the auxiliaries have and hi\ 
 
 307. The Gerund xs a verbal noun, and has the 
 various uses of the noun. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 1. TaJkinif is easier than odimj. (Subject of the 
 
 V(!il)V 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 175 
 
 2. He ccntcmplated viarri/iny Esther. (Object of a 
 
 t'ansitive verb.) 
 
 3. Doubtless the pleasure is as great, of being 
 
 cheated, as to cheat. (In the objective, gov- 
 erned by a preposition.) 
 
 •4. We do not ''ance for ihuichuys sake. (In the pos- 
 sessive.) 
 
 The use of the Gerund in tlie possessive case is not eonnuoii. 
 
 Model for Parsing. 
 
 Marrying (2) .... A verb, ti'ansitive, regular-, active, 
 gerund, objective case, goA erned by 
 " contemplated" according to Rule 
 III. 
 
 308. Oerunds of transitive verbs govern the ob- 
 jective case. 
 
 Illustration. 
 
 He contemplated marrying Esther. 
 
 " Esther" is in the objective case governed by "marrying," 
 according to Rule III. 
 
 309. The gerund is often preceded by a noun or a 
 pronoun in the possessive case ; as, the story of Jack's 
 iliiohituj the bean stalk, *li:c. 
 
 Sometimes the participle is used instead of the 
 gerund ; /.v, " These circumstances may lead to your 
 ladyship quilting this house." — Thackeray. 
 
 310. When the gerund is preceded by the it should 
 be followed by of; but if the is omitted, oy'must not 
 be used ; thiu^, *' 2'he writing uf the book required 
 many years," 
 
 Mk' 
 
17(5 
 
 if 
 
 ENGLISH GRAM'tAR, 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 Parae the Infimtives, Participles, and Gerunds. 
 
 1. None cliired withstand liim to his face. 
 
 2. Having in my youtli notions of severe piety, I used to rise 
 in the night to watch, pray, and read the Koran. 
 
 3. I remember seeing, thiougli Lord Rosse's telescope, one of 
 tliose nchulit", wliicli liave hitherto appc-ar<:d like small masses 
 of vapor lloatiiig about in space. I .saw it composed of thou- 
 sands upon thousands of brilliant stars. 
 
 4. They seemed fixed in the very attitude of being fluuf^ forth 
 into space. ° 
 
 5. Nothing :/. his life became )iim like the leaving it. 
 
 6. Better dwell in the midst of alarms, 
 Tlian reigu in this horrible place. 
 
 7. Assuming that he it; guilty, what ought to be done. 
 
 Syntax of Moods and Tenses. 
 
 311. The conditional conjunctions if, thowjh, hnt, 
 unless, etc, may be used with either the indicative or 
 the subjunctive mood ; hence it is sometimes difficult 
 to determine which mood to use, — to tell whether to 
 say, I/he he, or If he is, If he love, or If he loves, 
 
 .312. The tendency of modern usn.re i? to disregard the nioetie.^ 
 of the Subjunctive Mood, and it s . ^.robable tliat this form 
 will in time wholly disappear from our ^^nguage. The irregular 
 verb to be is the only verb retaining any thing like full iudec- 
 tion of the Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 313. The choice between the two moods must be 
 determined by the sense. Thus, the following state- 
 ments are both correct, but they express different 
 idttjis 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 177 
 
 1. If he sees the signal he will answer. 
 
 2. If he see the signal he will answer. 
 
 ExFLAN' ,0N.— Both aentences imply doubt, but in the 
 tirst 8eatfc..,c the act of seeing relates to present time, and 
 in the second sentence it relates to future time. The first 
 sentence means, If he noir sees, &(\; the second, ' If he shall 
 see, &c, 
 
 V 
 
 Rule XVI. — When one of the potential auxili- 
 
 anes, ma//, ,■((/-, wovhl, s/ioxl', is understood, or the 
 
 future auxiliary s/^///, the subjunctive mood may be 
 used. 
 
 The rule may be stated in another xbrm. 
 
 When doubt and futurity are both implied, use the 
 subjunctive mood ; when they are not both implied, 
 use the indicative. 
 
 I [.LUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Though he shii/ me, yet will I trust in him. 
 
 Exi'LANATioN — In tlus .Sentence ' .slai/ ' is rightly in the 
 -subjunctive mood, as /, <y or shall can be supplied. 
 
 2. If he thinks as he s^^eaks, he may safely be 
 trusted. 
 
 ■ 
 
 KxPLANATiON.-^*' lie thinks = if he (fof.i think, not If he 
 maij think. Henoe the Indicative is correctly used. 
 
 .3. He a uprightly unless he 'l(>ceii'e.s me. 
 
 i^xPLAVATioK. — Th.3 does not mean unless he mai/ deceive 
 me, but unless he does deceive me. Hence the Indicative is 
 used. 
 
 4. If it were \_it shonld be] done, when 'tis done, 
 Then 'twere [it shoiihl he] well it were [// should 
 he'\ done quickly. — Shakspeco-e. 
 
 m 
 
 
 1: 
 
6i 
 
 178 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 english grammar. 
 The Use of Tenseh. 
 
 314. In constructing a sentence, the tense of the 
 verb fitted to express the exact meaning should be 
 employed- 
 
 Violations of this principle are frequent in the use 
 of the infinitive. 
 
 Present Infinitive. 
 
 1. Last week I intended to have written him a 
 letter. 
 
 Exi'LANATKiN. — No matter how long it now is since I 
 thought of writing, to icritc was present to lue when 1 intended, 
 and must still lie considered present when I recall the inten- 
 tion. The sentence should be, Last week I intended to icrite 
 A letter. 
 
 2. 1 expected last ye r /.) linri' ijohP. to Europe on 
 
 business. 
 
 3. When I went to Flurope I hoped to har> risifed 
 
 Italy. 
 
 4. It is a long time since I commanded him /" //'//>" 
 tfoi/f if. 
 
 Explanation. — F(tr the same reason as before given, thej»e 
 sentences are incorrect. The jx-'sntt infinitive, and not thf 
 ^itr/rrl, should be used. 
 
 Rule XVII.— When the act denoted by the infini- 
 tive is yet unperformed at the time of making the 
 stiileraent, use the present infinitive. 
 
 Hence, verbs expressing Jiope, (lesirc, intention, or 
 ronwKind should be followed by the present infini- 
 tive ; as, / Iiojx'd to go, I de-^ired to -sff him. 
 
 Perfect Infinitive. 
 
 1. Bishop tosher believed the earth to have been 
 
 , 1 4r\r\ t D / > 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 179 
 
 ExPLANATION.-Hereitis evident that the Vvrkd Infini- 
 Hve 18 c^mt</y used, the sentence being equivalent to < Bishoi. 
 Usher believed that the earth wm created 400 < B C —the 
 crfotion being a ^w.s/ event at the time Bishop L^her formed 
 his opinion. 
 
 2. Alexander considered the battle of the Granieus 
 to have heev iron by the charge of the Mace- 
 donian phalanx. 
 
 Here the act spoken of is regarded as having been com- 
 pletetl hi'fore the time when //-• considered. 
 
 Rule XVIIL—Use the Perfect Infinitive if the 
 act spoken of is regarded as completed before the time 
 expressed by the verb with which it is connected. 
 
 Harmony of Tenses. 
 
 315. A proper harmony and correspondence of 
 Tenses must be observed. 
 
 illustrations. 
 
 1 . I .shall be much gratified if you wou]<1 favor us 
 
 with your company. 
 
 ExPLANATioif.— A proper harmony requires the future in- 
 dicative, 'will favor,' not the past potential, ' would favor.' 
 
 2. I feared that I fshouhl hare nilssed the train. 
 
 Explanation.— Missing the train is here represented as 
 past at the time of fearing; this is wrong. The sentence 
 should read, 1 feared that I should miss the train. 
 
 3. Columbus believed that the earth iras .spherical. 
 
 Explanation.— Here was should be is, because it is not the 
 intention to state that the roundness of the earth was a fact 
 of tlie past ; it is an immutable truth, and the rule is that 
 such statements must always be made in the present tense. 
 
 4. If you are not careful, you might fall overboard. 
 The proper tense is ' ,iiay fall.' 
 
 T5! 
 
 :l 
 
 .«aI 
 
 j ,5 
 
 *', .,. 
 
 m\' 
 
 If 
 
 ?«^::! 
 
 
 1- 
 
 
 ^li * 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 f I 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
f « 
 
 n 
 
 4i *. 
 
 r J 
 
 i 
 
 180 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 5. I /tiioir him for more tlmii ten years. 
 
 Say havf liiofii. 
 
 G. Nor has it ever htcit seriously undertaken, until 
 it 'nis commenced, within the last ten years, 
 by the London Philological Society. 
 
 The present perfect tense is here wrongly used . It should 
 be, Nor iras it ever seriously uiv/erfaken, etc., or else, Nor 
 had it <-irr been, etc. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 t'vrrfel the fn/lox-iiii/ ; 
 
 1, 1 have lost the game, though I thouglit 1 should have 
 
 won it. 
 
 2, The next New Year's day I shall he at school three 
 
 years. 
 
 .3. I can not excuse the carelessness of the officer whose 
 duty it was to hare n'atrhrd the enemy's approach. 
 
 4. I intended to have gone to Ottawa last week. 
 
 Ellipsis of Verb^. 
 
 310. The following sentences illustrate a common 
 blun ler in the ellipsis of parts of compound verbs : 
 
 1 . This elucidation may serve for almost any book 
 that has, /V-, or shall be published. — jBoIini/broke, 
 
 Explanation. — ' Published,' the past participle of the verb 
 puhlM, is correctly used with ' shall be ;' its ellipsis with ' is ' 
 is proper ; but the ellipsis with ' has ' is not correct, because 
 the writer intended to say has been published, using the pre- 
 sent perfect tense, 'passive voice. 
 
 317. When two or more Compound Tenses of the 
 same Verb are connected, such parts of the tenses as 
 are not common to all must be inserted in full 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 181 
 
 2. Did he not tell you his fault, and entreated you 
 to forgive him ? 
 
 ExPCANATroN,— The two verbs here connected are 'did 
 tell ' and ' entreated ;' but, supplying the ellipsis before the 
 second verb, we have ' di/l he not entreated,' which is incorrect, 
 as 'did' is never used with a past participle. The sentence 
 fully corrected is, ' Did he not tell you his fault, and did he 
 not entreat you to forgive him ? It is allowable to drop the 
 auxiliary before the second verb if the verb is put into a form 
 to harmonize with the auxiliary ; hence we may say, ' Did, 
 he not tell you his fault, and entreat,' etc. 
 
 318. When Verbs are connected by a Conjunction 
 never make an ellipsis of an auxiliary used before the 
 first Verb if the after forms of the Verb will not har- 
 monize with the auxiliary when supplied. 
 
 Shall and Will. 
 ' T will drown ; nobody ><hal1 help ine.' 
 
 Tlie unfortunate foreigner that fell into a river, not under- 
 standing English idioms, exactly reversed the places of shall 
 and ii-ai when he made use of this exclamation. He meant 
 to say, I shall drown [i.e., I expect to drown], because no- 
 body will help me. ' 
 
 319. The correct and elegant use of shall and will 
 is one of the most difficult things in the English lan- 
 guage for a foieigner to learn. Correct usage, in- 
 deed, is often violated by those that speak and write 
 English as their luother tongue. 
 
 Each of these auxiliaries has its own specific shade 
 of meaning besides that of fnttnity, and hence arise 
 many nice distinctions in thei'' peculiar and appropri. 
 ate uses. 
 
 67(a^/ etymologically means /o oire or to he hioraUi/ bound. 
 It is traced back in its Origin to the Gothio f^kal, which meant 
 / /tare killed, and thence I <nre the penalty. Chaucer writes, 
 
 M 
 
 'J£..fll 
 
 XV: 
 
 MflH^M 
 
 Y 
 
 S^^^l 
 
 
 ^^H 
 
 r 
 
 ^H 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 I^^H 
 
 
 l^^l 
 
•f^ 
 
 182 
 
 FNOLISH ORAMMAH. 
 
 I! 
 
 ■ r 
 
 r 
 
 ■f^ 
 
 1 
 
 I) 
 
 ' By the faith I shall t>» (Jod,' meaning * I ove, to God.' Will 
 means to irish or to be 'ril/iny. Etymologically, then, Shall 
 implies obligation or necessity, and Will implies wish, consent, 
 or volition. 
 
 Ca»e I. -Futurity. 
 
 I ) ^"""^ ) 
 
 W I >^fii(ll write. He ;• unll write. 
 
 ^""^ They) 
 
 320. The reason of the preceding use of nh(ill in the 
 first person, and vnll in the second and third persons, 
 seems to bo this : When a person says, ' I shall write 
 a letier,' he expresses his own ohlujatlon to write ; 
 but he expresses the ohh'tfafion of another person more 
 deferentially and delicately by referring to that per- 
 son's wiiilt rather than to obligation. It is a form of 
 grammatical politeness. 
 
 321. The misuse of wil/ instead of f^fixff in the first 
 person, denoting mere futurity, is common in many 
 parts of our country ; thus : 
 
 ' In a century hence we nu'If [shall] be a great 
 and powerful people.' — Newspaper. 
 
 * We /("/// [shall] undoubtedly elect our candidate 
 by a large majority,' — Nt'/rsiKi/x'r. 
 
 The same rule of courtesy is the reason why shall is not al- 
 ways used in the first persf)n ])lural. When !"e means he and 
 I, it is followed by shall, but when it means you and I, the 
 courteous and deferential will takes the place of shall. If 
 the speaker puts himself in the third person he will not use 
 thall ; as, 'Mr. Brown trill be glad of Mr. Smith's company 
 at dinner to-day,' or, ' Dear Smith, I shall be glad of your 
 company to-day at dinner.' 
 
 Case II. —Determination, Command. 
 
 We 1 "'''' "^^^^^ 
 
 You 
 He 
 
 fTl 
 
 1 ilUJ 
 
 
 ahall M'rite, 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 183 
 
 322. * We ii:iU write ' ruay mean ' We promise to 
 write/ or it may express our determination to write. 
 In either case vnll retains its proper force, to irish, to 
 resolve, tit consent. ' You shalf write ' means ' 1 have 
 power over you, and I am determined to force you to 
 write ; i. e., I will yon to write. 
 
 In the two common forms of polite speech, ' 1 shall be 
 obliged to you,' and * I will thank you,' the auxiliaries are 
 rightly placed, and ought not to l)e reversed. ' I shall be 
 greatly obliged to jcu ' foretells an obligation in the future 
 for which 1 ought to thank you, and ' I will thank you ' ex- 
 presses my intention or my promise to thank you. ' I t'n/l 
 be greatly obliged to you,' and 'I s/in/l thank you,' are in- 
 elegant and ungrammatical. 
 
 Case III. Asking Questions. 
 
 Slmll I write ? 
 Shall we write ' 
 
 jyH/ you write '! 
 Will he or they write ? 
 
 323. The usual form in interrogative sentences is 
 >thall in the first person, and will in the others, but it 
 can not be laid down as an invariable rule to reverse 
 the declarative forms. Thus ve say, 'Will you go?* 
 or ' Shall you go ? ' The first form implies a reqiH'st ; 
 the second form, intention. 
 
 324. In asking a qufstion we yen^^rallij use the form 
 of expreasio'ii in which tee expert the answer to he 
 [fiven. 
 
 If I say ' Shall you go to school to-morrow ? ' [Do you in- 
 tend to go to school to-morrow ?], 1 expect the answer from 
 you 'I shall' [1 intend to go]. If I expect A jwornise, 1 say, 
 * Will you write a composition '1 ' and expect the promise ' I 
 will.' It is a piece of good manners, a part of grammatical 
 courtesy. 
 
 * You will go to scluHil to-morrow ' may tie said alfirma- 
 tivalv even ivit.b the visincr inflectinii. niid tlieii the n.nswpv 
 
 ?> 
 
 vH 
 
 «' 
 
 :.^H 
 
 r 
 
 ' ^9 
 
 3. 
 
 ;: n^l 
 
 r» 
 
 '^^B 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 u 
 
 £(■ 
 
184 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 expected is ' I will,' or ' I will not.' The expression ' Vou 
 will go to school to-morrow, shal/ you not ? ' may seem to be 
 redundant, but it is quite correct. 
 
 Errors in Verbs. 
 
 325. Tho following are souir of tin? most ooniinon 
 vultjariKiiis in the use of verbs ; 
 
 1. Hailn't [had not] 1 ought to do it ? 
 
 Had is mirr used as an auxiliary of oughf. You should 
 say ' Ought I not to do it ?' 
 
 2. He ifon't believe it. 
 
 Explanation.— Z)o?i'< is a contraction of do not, but it 
 would be incorrect to say. He do not. Hence the form should 
 he dots not , or hy colloquial contraction, doesn't. The same 
 objection may not hold as against ' I don't, ' but it is certainly 
 more elegant to say '1 du not,' and tho expression should 
 always be so written. 
 
 3. ' Tisr/'f a wsLsp. It's John that goes to school. 
 
 Exi'LANATioN.— ' T'/s and it's are not commendable forms 
 for it is. Though allowable in conversation, they should not 
 be used in written composition. ' Tis, is a poetic license, as 
 
 ' Twas mine, ' tis his, and has been slave to thousands. 
 
 — Shakspeare. 
 
 4. I have not done it yet, but 1 mean to. 
 
 Explanation.— To omit the infinitive after to is a very 
 faulty construction ; and though in ordinary conversation this 
 ellipsis often occurs, it is not allowable in accurate writing. 
 Either repeat the verb or supply its place by do or do so. ' 1 
 have not done it yet, but I mean to do it. ' You may take a 
 walk, if you like. ' Better thus : ' You may take a walk, if 
 you like to do so. ' 
 
 ' Is BEING DONE.' 
 
 32G. ForuLs like the above are fait to be very awk- 
 ward. T/ie hou-<e is being built, It has been being 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 n5 
 
 hui'f inami mviitha, are such diHagreeable phrases, 
 through the repetition of the verb he, that we avoid 
 them when possible. It is common even to say the 
 hoitae 18 huildiruj, or has been huUiliiiy, as if htiihi 
 were an intransitive verb. But this is not strictly 
 correct. The old English expression, It is a-huifdiufj 
 (at hiildivf/, 'in the process of building'), is prefer- 
 able, though seldom used. We must choose among 
 the following forms of expression : 
 
 The house has been many months a building 
 (which is good old Saxon English) ; 
 
 The house has been many months building 
 (perhaps elliptical for the above, V)ut in it- 
 self incorrect) ; 
 
 The house has been many months being built 
 (which is correct, but i tolerably awkward). 
 
 Or we may vary the expression by saying : 
 
 They have been many months building the 
 house ; 
 
 Or, The house has been many months in course 
 (or process) of building. 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 ThefollowirKj sentences Illustrate a great cariety oj 
 FAULTS OF SYNTAX. TJie piipU, iti correctiiu] fhpsc. 
 sentences, is to cipplif t/ie principles fier^'tofore Iparncd : 
 
 1. This is very easy done. 
 
 2. The ^resX historian auil the essayist is no more. 
 
 3. It could not have Viecii lier. 
 
 
 ii 
 
 Si' 
 
 i 
 
 if! 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 4>' ^ 
 

 o >>^:«^^ 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 •^tf 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 Hi jm |25 
 
 ■ 50 ^^" RHB 
 
 2: lis 12.0 
 
 U 116 
 
 W 
 
 e: 
 
 VI 
 
 V 
 
 ^;i 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^>;^' ^ 
 
 'W 
 
 o/m. 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 
 lui^- 
 
 5^'' 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTEP,N.Y. M580 
 
 (716) 872-4S03 
 

9l 
 
 h 
 
 III! . : 
 
 
 ^>?-^^i 
 
 186 
 4. 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 
 12. 
 13. 
 14. 
 15. 
 
 16. 
 17. 
 
 18. 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 
 21. 
 22. 
 
 23. 
 24. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 Did you see the man and the dog which passed this way ? 
 I intend to immediately retire from business. 
 I think I will return home next week. 
 He seldom or ever visits us. 
 It is thinking makes what we read ours. 
 The death was announced lately of the great statesman. 
 Who are you looking for ? 
 
 The collection of books that have come down to us 
 trom that penotl are very valuable. 
 
 I expected to have heea at home when you called. 
 
 It was him and me that were chosen to go. 
 
 When will we three meet again i 
 
 He not only ought but must succeed. 
 
 I never saw it rain so heavy before. 
 
 His work is one of the best that has ever appeared. 
 
 It has been said tliat politics are but little mor« than 
 common sense. 
 
 Metal types were now introduced, which before this 
 time had been mai'a of wood. 
 
 No man ever bestowed such a gift to his kind. 
 
 The book is fitted either for school or private use. 
 
 This is one of the most memorable battles that ever 
 have or will be fought. 
 
 .\11 thinking men believ? that the soul was immortal. 
 
 He found he had lost his sight, and Mas led from the 
 battle-field by a soldier. 
 
 25. It is now five days since you have arrived. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 187 
 
 26. I trust you shall overlook the circumstance of me hav- 
 ing come to school late. 
 
 27. The regiment had no less than a hundred men fell in 
 the engagement. 
 
 28. What is the difference between an adjective and par- 
 ticiple ? 
 
 29. These Howers smell very sweetly and look beautifully. 
 
 30. Have you no other book but this ? 
 
 31. He is only fitted to govern others who can govern him- 
 self. 
 
 22. The spirit, and not the letter, of the law are what we 
 ought to follow. 
 
 33. This one seems more preferable than the other. 
 
 34. The inscription gave the name and age of the deceased 
 merely. 
 
 35. Once upon a time there lived a poor man who had two 
 sons, near a wood. 
 
 36. 1 found the knight under the butler's hands who always 
 shaved him, 
 
 37. Flour will not do to make our bread alone. 
 
 38. No one in England knew what tea was two hundred 
 years ago. 
 
 39. The man could neither read or write. 
 
 40. The Book of Psalms were written by David. 
 
 41. That building must be either a church or school. 
 
 42. Here come my old friend and teacher. 
 
 43. The minute finger and the hour hand has eaoh its par- 
 ticular use. 
 
 44. Which of that group of men is the taller. 
 
 45. What boy amongst us can foretell their future career ? 
 
li 
 
 (r 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 I 
 
 1^8 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 46. She walked with the lamp across the room still burning. 
 
 47. An account of the great events in all parts of the 
 world are given in the daily papers. 
 
 48. I shall not trouble any reader, being studious of bre- 
 vity, with all the curiosities I observed. 
 
 49. If I were in his j^sition, I would not have gone. 
 
 50. They would neither eat themselves nor suffer nobodv 
 else to eat. •' 
 
 />!. Wild horses are caught with a la.sso, or a noose. 
 
 52. Did you expect to have heard so poor a speech. 
 
 53. I can not give you no more money. 
 
 54. Am I the scholar who am to be punishod, 
 
 55. There were a large number of soldiers killed and 
 wounded. 
 
 56. We did no more but what we ought to do. 
 
 57. We have <lone no more than it was our duty to hav. 
 done. 
 
 58. He is a man of remarkable clear intellect. 
 
 '^^' ?hem''''^*^ ™*' ^'^'' ^''"^^' ^"* ^ ^^^ "''* buy any of 
 
 60. I never have nor never will forgive him. 
 
 61. Every one is the best judge of their own conscierje. 
 
 62. They told me of him having failed. 
 
 63. I understand why the water never rises high quite well. 
 
 ^^' honor*" ^^^^^^' *"*^ ^'^^ continue to receive, many 
 
 65. A dervise was met by two merchants travelling alone 
 111 ft (i©8crt. 
 
 66. One .species of bread of coarse quality was only allowed 
 to be naked. 
 
67. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 The party whom he invited was very numerous. 
 
 189 
 
 68. It is now about four hundred years since the art of 
 multiplying books has been discovered. 
 
 69. An otticer on European and on Indian service are in 
 very different situations. 
 
 70. The doctor said in his lecture that fever always pro- 
 duced thirst. 
 
 71. Alarmed by so unusual an occurrence, it was resolved 
 to postpone their departure. 
 
 72. The Annals qf Florence are a most imposing work. 
 
 73. Such expressions sound harshly. 
 
 74. What can be the cause of the Parliament neglecting so 
 important a business 7 
 
 75. Either you or I are in the way. 
 
 76. He would not be persuaded but what I was greatly in 
 fault. 
 
 77. I do not think that leisure of life and tranquillity of 
 mind, which fortune and your own wisdom ha.s given 
 y^u, could b^ better employed. 
 
 78. That is seldom or ever the case. 
 
 79. The fact of me being a stranger to him does not justify 
 his conduct. 
 
 80. Let me awake the King of ^^orven, he that is like the 
 sun of heaven, rising in a storm. 
 
 81. Either the young man or his guardian have acted im- 
 properly. 
 
 82. I had several men died in my ship of yellow fever. 
 
 83. The following treatice, together with those that accom- 
 pany it, were written many years ago. 
 
 84. A talent of this kind would perhaps prove the likeliest 
 of any other to succeed. 
 
 »lEl 
 
li" 
 
 
 'J h 
 
 
 it 
 
 
 190 
 
 85. 
 
 86. 
 
 87. 
 
 88. 
 89. 
 90. 
 
 91. 
 92. 
 
 93. 
 
 94. 
 
 95. 
 96. 
 
 97. 
 
 98. 
 
 99. 
 100. 
 
 1. 
 f 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The ends of » ilivine and human legislation are very 
 different. 
 
 On your conduct at this moment depends the color and 
 complexion of their destiny. 
 
 I have never seen Major Cartwright, much less enjoy 
 the honor of his acquaintance. 
 
 I am afraid of the man dying before a doctor can come. 
 That is either a man or a woman's voice. 
 
 Man, though he has great variety of thoughts, yet they 
 are all within his own breast. 
 
 The ebb and flow of the tides were explained by Newton. 
 
 And indeed in some cases we derive as much or more 
 pleasure from that source than from any thing else. 
 
 The number of inhabitants were not more than four 
 millions. 
 
 The logical and historical analysis of a language gene, 
 rally m some degree coincides.' 
 
 But she fell a laughing like one ut of their right mind. 
 
 Verse and prote run into one another I'ke light and 
 shade. * 
 
 Homer had the greatest invention of any writer what- 
 ever. 
 
 Of all the other qualities of style, clearness is the most 
 important. 
 
 That is applied to persons as well as things. 
 
 The maps are clear, attractive in appearance, and not 
 encumbered with minute details calculated only to 
 embarrass the learne •, except the reference maps, 
 which we very full and complete. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 PART III, 
 
 Analysis and Construction. 
 
 191 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 DEFINITIONS AND PRINCIPLES. 
 
 The Sentence and its Elements. 
 
 327. A sentence is a combination of words express- 
 ing a complete thought. 
 
 To express a complete thought we must say some- 
 thing about something ; as, The old clock ticks faintly. 
 
 In this sentence we are speaking of the ' old clock ;' we say 
 that it ' ticks faintly. ' 
 
 328. Aniilysis iti resolving a sentence into its 
 elements, or component parts. The building up of a 
 sentence is called synthesis or construction. 
 
 329. The elements of a sentence may be classified 
 according to their rank ; as : — 
 
 I.— Principal Elements. II.— Subordinate Ele- 
 ments. III. — Independent Elements. 
 
 330. The principal elements of a sentence are : — 
 
 I. — The Subject. II. — The Predicate. 
 
 These two parts are necessary for the expression of 
 a thought ; they are therefor' essential elements. 
 
 331. The subject is that part of a sentence which 
 names the thing of which we are speaking. It is 
 always a noun or an equivalent of a noun. 
 
 Iff 
 
102 
 
 ENOLISH GKAIIMAR. 
 
 3 ■ 
 
 332. The predicate is that part of a sentence 
 which asserts something of the thing which the subject 
 represents. It must always contain a finite verb. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 1. Birds 
 
 2. He 
 
 3. To be 
 
 Illustkationss. 
 
 Pkedicate. 
 
 sing. 
 
 walks. 
 
 contents his natural desire. 
 
 • The steamer having left the wharf . ' Thi» . not a sen- 
 tence, for it contains no predicate. ' let't tov.-n this morn- 
 ing.' Here we have no subject. 
 
 333. Some verbs do not of themselves make a com- 
 plete statement, but require some additional word or 
 words to aid them in forming a predicate. Such verbs 
 are said to be incomplete, and that pare of the sentence 
 which fills up the statement is called the complement. 
 
 334. Transitive verbs in the active voice require an 
 object as complement. Transitive verbs in the passive 
 voice, and incomplete intransitive verbs, may take is 
 a complement a predi<ate nominative, or a predicate 
 adjective. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 Pkedicate Verb. 
 
 Complement. 
 
 Boys 
 They 
 The city 
 The bridge 
 James 
 
 The mau 
 
 • 
 
 love 
 stopped 
 was named 
 is considered 
 became 
 seems 
 
 play. 
 
 reciting their lessons. 
 
 Halifax. 
 
 dangerous. 
 
 Kiug. 
 
 better. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 193 
 
 
 Some verbs take a double complement, one direct, and the 
 other indirect. The indirect cor!i!)lement i.s sonsetimcs attribu- 
 tive, modifying the direct complement ; af>. They named the 
 child John. We hold Jamen accountable. 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 A 
 
 Name the complemeulu : — 
 
 1. Chaucer wrote the Canterbury Tales. 
 
 2. He seems very ill. 
 
 3. William is a diligent boy. 
 
 4. The teacher gave the boys a lesson. 
 
 5. He made his life his monument. 
 
 6. We consider the bridge dangerous. 
 
 B 
 Supply the parts lohich are wanting, 
 
 7. wrote Paradise Lost. 
 
 8. General Wolfe the city of Quebec, 
 
 9. the Pleasures of Hope. 
 
 10. Wellington defeated 
 
 11. The farmer made — 
 12. named 
 
 335. The subordinate elements of a sentence are 
 words introduced for the purpose ot modifying the 
 signification of the principal elements. They are called 
 adjuncts or enlargements. 
 
 Illustration. 
 Som^ birds oftlis country sing .w^eetly during the daij 
 
 13 
 
 rS 
 
194 
 
 ENOLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Explanation. — The subject birds in QKxlified by some and of 
 this country. These termn are said to be adjanots or enlarge- 
 ments of the subject. In like manner sweetly and during the 
 day are adjunrts of the predicate. 
 
 33G. The subject without adjuncts is called the 
 simple or grainmatlt-al subject ; the subject with its 
 adjuncts is t;alled the complete or logical subject. The 
 predicate without adjuncts is called the nmple or 
 yrtinimntical predicate ; the predicate with its adjuncts 
 is the logiciil predicate. 
 
 Illu.strations. 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 li' 
 
 LooicAL Subject. 
 
 Logical Predicate. 
 
 An.ll NTTOK SIB.IECT. 
 
 Simple Sib. 
 
 Simple Pred. 
 
 Adjikct ok Predicate. 
 
 The farmer's eldest 
 
 bon 
 
 wo-ks 
 
 diligently all day. 
 
 Logical Subject. 
 
 LofJiCAL Predicate. 
 
 AiurxcT. 
 
 SiwrxT. 
 
 1 
 Pped. Verb. 
 
 Complement. 
 
 Adjunct. 
 
 Great 
 
 generals 
 
 were 
 
 common 
 
 in the time of Napo- 
 [leon. 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 Give in tabular form the Subjects, Predicates, 
 Adjuncts, and Complements. 
 
 L Brave'soldiers fell at Thermoj«ylae. 
 
 2. A little old man , dressed in tattered clothe.<», passed by our 
 
 door. 
 
 3. Thy maker's will has placed thee here. 
 
▲NALTSin AND COySTRUCTION, 
 4. The very faire8t Howers wither the most quickly. 
 
 195 
 
 NoTB.— Observe carefully the difference between a eomplf 
 itunt of the predicate, and an adjunct of the predicate. An iu- 
 cuniplete verb leaves the statement unfinished, 80 that the com- 
 plement is .\n etuiential part of the predicate. An adjunct 
 merely modijiea the statement. 
 
 Illustration. 
 
 ■Tames broke the jntcher (complement). 
 
 The boys play on the hiJl (adjunct). 
 
 337. An independent element is not related to the 
 other parts of the sentence ; that is, it is neither a 
 principal nor a subordinate element; as : — 
 
 1, To say the leant, it is very surprising. 
 
 2. Mary, your lilies are in bloom. 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 
 Mark the Subjects, Completions, and Adjuncts, 
 in the following nentencen : — 
 
 1. Walking is a healthful exercise. 
 
 2. To be virtuous is to be happy. 
 
 3. Diligent^stndents will succeed. 
 
 4. StudAts of diligent habits will succeed. 
 
 5. Students who are diligent will succeed. 
 
 In the first sentence the subject consists of a single word, 
 " walking ;" in the second sentence it consists of three words,' 
 "to be virtuous." In the third sentence the adjunct of the 
 subject is a single word, "diligent ;" in the fourth sentence 
 it consists of three words, "of diligent habits ;" inthefifthson- 
 tence it consists of three words, "who are diligent." An 
 element of a sentence may, therefore, consist of one word or 
 of more than one. 
 
 J 
 
 !l 
 
136 
 
 ENOLISn ORAMMAK. 
 
 It 
 
 h' 
 
 
 
 \u 
 
 338. A proposition in ii conibinatioii of words con- 
 taining one subject an.l one pretlicate. A sentence may 
 consist of one proposition, or of more than one ; as 
 
 1. Life is but an empty dream. 
 
 2. Tell me not that life is but an empty dream. 
 
 Expr.ANATiON. The first si-ntence oontiiiiiH but one proposi- 
 tion. Tlie sccuii.l .sentence consists of two protwsitions, con- 
 nctcd by "that." " T.ll me not" is the nrin-ipal proposi- 
 tion ; " hfe 18 but an empty dream" is a .subordinate proposi- 
 tion, forming the complemeot of tlie princij.al prono.sition. 
 
 339. A clause is a dependent or :}uV>ordinate 
 {»ro|>OHition. 
 
 340. A clause is joined to th(( principal proposition 
 by a connective which may be a conjunction, a relative 
 pronoun, or a connective cidverh. 
 
 341. A phrase is a combination of words not ex- 
 pressing a complete thought. In its use it is equivalent 
 to a noun, an adjective, or an adverb. 
 
 A phrase may be introduced by — 
 
 1. A prepos-itioH, thus forming a prepositional 
 
 phrase ; as — 
 Tlie fruit of that forhiddden tree. 
 
 2. An cHjinitive, thus forming an infinitive phrase ; 
 
 as — 
 
 To love our neighbors as ourselves is a divine command. 
 
 3. A participle, thus forming aparticipial phrase; as~ 
 
 Children, cooung home /rum school, look in ct the open dtn,.-. 
 
 342. With reference to their structure, the elements 
 of a sentence are classified as — 
 
 -S 
 
AXALYSIfi AND CONST KIHTIO::. 
 I. VVoitDS. II. PhhaHES. III. (!laU8E8. 
 
 197 
 
 343. A word is termed an « lemant of th« firat 
 (hyrte. ; a phrase, an element of the tecotul (fetfree ; and 
 a elauRc, an element of the fhinf Jnjree. 
 
 344. In respect to their lute phrases and clause 
 I^erform the office of nouns, adjectives, or adverbs. 
 
 lu determining the class of a phra.se, or c clause, ask the 
 question, What part of siH-ech would thi.s be if the ide were 
 expre9ge<i by a sinffh wora >. 
 
 Illustratio.ns. 
 
 1 . Hr ent in ijreat hantt. 
 
 2. My uncle is a ::iaQ of prudence. 
 
 3. James loves to study lant/uages. 
 
 Explanation.— In the first sentence, "in great haste," is 
 equal to hastily, and is therefore an adverbial phrase. In the 
 sptond sentence, " of prudence" is etjual to prudent, and is 
 therefore an adjective phrase. In the third .senience, •' to study 
 languages" is the object of the verb loves, and is conse(|uently 
 a noun phrase. 
 
 SUMMAftY, 
 
 I" Principal. 
 
 The elements classed by rank are <J Subordinate. 
 
 ( Independent. 
 
 The elements classed by structure 
 
 4 
 
 ( Words 
 
 are... -( 
 
 Phrases. 
 ( Prepositions. 
 
 {Substantive. 
 Adjective. 
 Adverbial. 
 Exercise 59. 
 
 In the following sentences select the Grammatical 
 and the I-ogical Subjects, and the Grammatical and 
 
198 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 the Logical Predicates ; also climaify the Adjuncts, 
 with reference to their strurinre and their ojffice : — 
 
 1 . A thing of beauty is a joy forever. 
 
 2. Chaucer, the father of English poetry, wrote the Canter- 
 
 bury Tales. 
 
 3. Brave soldics fell at Thermopylae. 
 
 4. Nothing in his life became him like the leaving of it. 
 
 5. All the land, in flowery squares, beneath a broad and 
 
 equal-blowing wind, smelt of the coming summer. 
 
 6. The morn, in russet mantle clad, walks o'er the dew of 
 
 yon high eastern hill. 
 \ B 
 
 In the followimj, iHstirifjuish Phrases ami Clauses 
 from Sentences. 
 
 1. To die is gain. 2. Not to know me. 3. The design has 
 never been completed. 4. A design which has never been com- 
 pleted. 5. From bad to worse. 6. When morning showed the 
 snow-drifts. 7. Into the jaws of death. 8. R- le the six 
 hundred. 
 
 Classes of Sentences. 
 
 345. Sentences are classified — 
 
 I. According to their use. II. According to their 
 structure. 
 
 346. Sentences are divided according to their use 
 into four classes : — 
 
 I. Declarative. II. Interrogative. III. Impera- 
 tive. IV. Exclamatory. 
 
 347. A declarative sentence is one that asserts, that 
 is, affirms or denies ; as — 
 
 1. Man is mortal. 2. He is not proud. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 199 
 
 348. An interrogative sentence is one that expresses 
 a question ; as — 
 
 Do jou adLiire such people ? 
 
 349. An imperative sentence is one that expresses a 
 command ; as — 
 
 Be a hero in the strife. 
 
 350. An exclamatory sentence is on-j th it expresses 
 a thought in an interjectional manner ; as — 
 
 Oh ! that I knew where 1 might find him ? 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 Change the following declarative sentences into In- 
 terrogative, Imperative, and Exclamatory sentences, 
 
 1. The moon shines softly. 
 
 2. Isow fades the glimmering landscape on the sight. 
 
 3. The ploughman homeward plods his weary way. 
 
 351. Sentences are classified according to their 
 structure into three classes : — 
 
 '•M 
 
 I. Simple. II. Complex. III. Compound. 
 
 362. A simple sentence consists of one independent 
 proposition. 
 
 A simple sentence may consist of but two words, a subject 
 and a predicate ; as, 
 
 Birds fly. 
 
 A simple sentence may have its subject and predicate so 
 modified by adjuncts as to become a long sentence ; as, 
 
 ' About fourscore years ago there u?ed to be seen siunter- 
 ing on the pleasant terraces of Sans 6ouci, for a short imie iu 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ■'■ 'i I 
 
200 
 
 im 
 
 ■ i ■ : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 the afteinoou, or driving in a rauid, business manner on the 
 open roads, or through the scraggy woods and av*;nue8 of that 
 intricate, amphibious Potsdam region, a highly interesting 
 lean, little old man, of alert, th. ugh slightly stooping Hcu re ' 
 —C'arlylc'.t Frederick fhr Great. f «.8 
 
 353. A complex sentence consists of one principal 
 proposition aud one or more subordinate propositions 
 or clauses ; thus, — 
 
 ClaiUHe. Principal I'roposition, 
 
 When morning daivmd all kear.s were dispelled. 
 
 The subordinate proposition may stand within the principal 
 proposition ; thus, — *^ 
 
 The wind, vhick JukI blown all day, rE.4SED ai' sunset. 
 
 354. J compound sentence consists of two or more 
 independent propositions ; thus, 
 
 All fears were dlspelled, and we saw the land within 
 
 A FEW LEAGUES OF VS. 
 
 In compound sentences the members are merely jaw/ together 
 (con and ponere); in complex sentences they are xvoven to- 
 ffcther (con and plectere). 
 
 Adjuncts of the Subject. 
 
 355. Since the subject is always a noun or its 
 equivalent, and since the words which modify a noun 
 are adjective in office, the adjuncts of the aubject 
 must be Kdjerllve elements. 
 
 356. An adjunct of the subject may be -r adjective 
 
 element of the first, the second, or the third degree, 
 
 that is, it may be an adjective word, phrase, or clause. 
 
 I. As a word, an adjective element may be 
 
 1. Axi adjective ; as — 
 
 Kiml hearts are more than loionets. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 2. A noun in apposition ; as — 
 
 201 
 
 Newton, the philosopher, diBcovered the law of gravi- 
 tation. 
 
 3. A noun or a pronoun in the possessive ; as — 
 
 Children's voices should be dear to a mother's ear. 
 
 IL An adjective phrase may be in form prepon- 
 tional or participial ; *.hus — 
 
 1. The thirst /or /a7/t« is an infirmity of nobk- minds. 
 
 2. The man, being inju 'td hy the fall, was taken to the 
 
 hospital. 
 
 III. An adjective clause is always introduced by 
 a relative prenoun or a relative adverb ; thus — 
 
 1. The man that hath no m\mc in himself \a fit for strata- 
 
 gems. 
 
 2. The place where Moses was buried is unknown. 
 
 S.'iT. The subject may be modified by various com- 
 binations of adjective elements ; thus — 
 
 Born t'- inherit the most illustrioiis monarchy that the world 
 ever saw, and early united to the object of h^r choice, the 
 amiable princes.s happy in herself, and joyful in her 
 future prospects, little anticipated the fate that was so soon 
 to overtake her. 
 
 358. Adjective elements are used to modify not only 
 the subject, but a noun in any part of the sentence. 
 
 If the subject is an infinitive or a gerund, it may 
 in its /'^'rft-character take a complement or an adverbial 
 adjuncf ; thus — 
 
 1. To love one's enemies is a Christian duty. 
 
 2. Playing witfi fire is dangerous. 
 
 
 
 
 fill 
 
 
>'- VT- 
 
 202 
 
 english qramuar. 
 Adjuncts of the Predicate. 
 
 359. The predicate Terb is modified by adverbial 
 elements. 
 
 360. An adverbial element may be an element of the 
 first, second, or third degree. 
 
 i. As u word, an adverbial element may be — ' 
 
 1. An adverb ; as — 
 
 Leonidas died bravely. 
 
 2. An indirect object ; as — 
 
 J Give (he man a seat. 
 
 3. A noun denoting time or jtlace ; as — 
 
 1. Our friends have returned homt. 
 
 2. James remained a week. 
 
 4. An infinitive of purpose ; as — 
 
 She stoops to conquer. 
 
 II. An adverbial phrase may be in form preposi- 
 tional or participial ; thus — 
 
 1. Leonidas ui^d with great bravery. 
 
 2. He reads standing at his desk. 
 
 III. An adverbial clause is always introduced by a 
 conjunctive adverb, or a subordinative conjunction ; 
 thus — 
 
 1. The lawyers smiled that afternoon. 
 
 fVhen he hummed in court an old love-turu. 
 
 3= Fishes have no vnins h. 
 
 itf'./v.io^ than 
 
 tU^ 
 
 7 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 203 
 
 361. The predicate verb may be modified by any 
 combination or number of combinations of adverbial 
 elements, thus : — 
 
 Wh,en he heard the noise, he ran quickly into the xtreet to 
 discover the cause. 
 
 362. An adverbial element may serve as an adjunct, 
 not only of a verb, but of an .tdjective or an adverb. 
 
 363. The object of an incomplete verb may be en- 
 larged in all the various ways in which the mhject \% 
 enlarged. 
 
 364. The adverbial elements used in enlarging the 
 predicate may be classified under the following four 
 heads : — 
 
 (1.) Those relating to time, or the when word, phrase, or 
 clause. 
 
 (2. ) place, or the where word, phrase, or clause. 
 
 (3.) manner, or the hmwovA, phrase, or clause. 
 
 (4. ) caiLse, or the tohy w ord, phrase, or clause. 
 
 Illustrations — Words. 
 
 1. 'He came m.-^ yexU-rday' — time. 
 
 2. ' He went there' — place. 
 
 3. ' He walks /ow?'— manner. 
 
 4. ' Why did he go ?' — cause. 
 
 Illustrations — Phrases. 
 
 \. ' In Spain [place] Columbus waited /or seven years' [time], 
 
 2. 'Many travellers in Africa have perished, with terrible 
 suffering [manner], from thirst' [cauae]. 
 
 i m 
 
 ffll 
 
 11 
 
 i. 
 
k 
 
 ';( 
 
 W 
 
 .; li 
 
 IE 
 
 1 ' . 
 
 
 
 204 
 
 EXCLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. ' Him the Almighty power 
 
 Hurled hmdloufj [manner] Haming /n»n tht dhcrml sky 
 [place] " 
 
 With hulcous rtiiH and combustion [manner], <l .w,i 
 lo bottomless itcrditic^' [i)lac»0.— Mii.ton. 
 
 Illustrations— Clauses. 
 
 1. • Cro.nwell matured little events hefovp Iw ventured to 
 
 govern great ones' [time]. 
 
 2. ' The gardener is planting the shrubs where they mil have 
 
 the most shaded [place]. 
 
 3. He did the work as he was instriccied [manner]. 
 
 4. ' Fishes have no voice becmise th^-y have no lungs' [cause]. 
 
 Exercise 6i. 
 
 State hy what kind of an Adjective Element th^ 
 Sif/iject w enlarged [Adjective wwd Adjective 
 phrase, or Adjective clause^. 
 
 1. (Jood old red wine is the best. 
 
 2. Caesar, having conquered Gaul, sailed over to Britain. 
 
 3. Chaucer, the father of English iwetry, wrote the Canter- 
 
 oury laies. 
 
 4. The invention of the Isteam-engine has made ocean navi- 
 
 gation swilt and safe. 
 
 6. So ended Hannibal's first .ampaign in Ttaly.-ARNOLD. 
 
 6. The drum's deep roll was heard afar. 
 
 7. Under her torn hat glowed the wealth 
 
 Of simple T eauty and rustic health.— Whittibr. 
 
 ^" '"^I^AK^'^r*'^ *i'?* connects New York and San Francisco 
 IS the longest m the world. 
 
 9. The government foanded by our fathers will not be broken 
 up Dy us. 
 
 Ill A 1i"HU ^^A ~, A 1 • . .. ... 
 
 , ■■■^ "iaii, iiicsoou iu tarterea ciothes, passed by our 
 
analysis and construction. 
 Expansion. 
 
 205 
 
 365. Expansion is changing an element of the first 
 degree to one of the second or third degree, without 
 introducing any nev idea. 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 Adjei'fice Eli'ine^itn. 
 k prudent uxsio. is respected. (Word.) 
 A man of irrvr^ence. is respected. (Phrase ) 
 A man uho is prudent is respected. (Clause.) 
 
 Adverbial Elenunts. 
 Jenny Lind sang xweethf. (Word.) 
 Jenny Lind sang with sn'cetness. (Phrase. ) 
 Jenny Lind sang as a sweet singer does. (Clause. ) 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 Expand the Words printed in italics into Phrases and 
 Clauses. 
 
 1. Brace soldiers fell at Thermopy'-e. 
 
 2. The grateful mind loves to consider the bounties of Pro- 
 
 vidence. 
 
 3. Four-legged animals are called 4uadrnped.s. 
 
 4. Great generals [of great ability] were common in the time 
 
 of Napoleon. 
 
 5. Virtuniin men are honored. 
 
 6. Ho came upon mo unmrares [notice.] 
 
 •» r> v..:i,i iV- 
 
 :iii;:!t:x!ttsi 
 
 8. Do not ^T^&V. foolishly. 
 
 I 
 
 ^■i»l 
 
 ■*fti 
 
 f I 
 
A". 
 
 306 ENGLISH GRAyMAR. 
 
 9. Leonidas acted hfrokalbj. 
 10. Columbiu sailed confidently [mn of succfss. ] 
 
 tf 
 
 I ■ 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE SIMPLE SENTENCK. 
 
 366. The simple sentence consiHts of a single proposi- 
 tion, and hence can contain but one finite verb. 
 
 367. Tlie simple subject of the simple sentence con- 
 sists of a substantive element of the first or second 
 degree • that is, of a word or a phrase equivalent to a 
 noun. 
 
 368. The simple subject may be modified by any 
 adjective element of the first or second degree, or by 
 any combinal-ion of adjective elements of those degrees. 
 
 369. The simple predicate of the simple sentence 
 always consists of a finite verb, or of a finite verb with 
 its complement. 
 
 370. The simple predicate may be modified by any 
 adverbial element of the first or second degree, or by 
 any combination of adverbial element jf those desrees. 
 
 DIRECTIONS. 
 
 In analysing a simple sentence — 
 I. State the nature of the sentence. 
 
 1. By struct urf:. ^ 
 
 2. By usf. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 807 
 
 II. State— 
 
 1. The logical and the grunmatical subject 
 
 2. The logical and the gramn>aiical predicate. 
 
 3. The modifications of the subject. 
 
 4. The complement, when the verb is incomplete . 
 6. The modifications of the complement. 
 
 6. The modifications of the grammatical predicate. 
 THE OADER OF A SENTENCE. 
 
 371. The order of a sentence maj' be direct or 
 inverted; and in resolving a sentence— that is, in 
 showing the elements that enter into its construction- 
 it is necessary to reduce it from the inverted to the 
 direct form ; thus : ^ 
 
 Inverted. Now fades the glinunering landscape on the sight. 
 
 ( The glimmering landscape fades on the sight 
 
 Direct. \ now ; or, xu • t.* 
 
 ( The glimmering landscape now fades on the sight. 
 
 Inverted. Thee the voice, the dance obey. 
 
 Direct. The voice, the dance obey thee. 
 
 Inverted,. Slow melting strains their queen's approach de- 
 
 clare. 
 Direct. Slow melting strains declare their queen's approach 
 
 MODELS FOR ORAL ANALYSIS. 
 
 1. The hardy Laplander, clad in sJdns, hoUly dejie* 
 the severity of his arctic climate. 
 
 This is a si-nple dackretive sentence: The logical subject 
 is "The hardy Laplander, clad in skins. ' The grammatical 
 
 I,. _j. • .«x -_!-_-- >> on.- 1 :-«! nivulinafe ig " holnlv 
 
 defies the severity of his arctic climate." The grammatical 
 predicate h " defies." 
 
 it 
 
 i 
 
m 
 
 iV 
 
 Ai-: 
 
 208 
 
 KNOLI8H (iRAMMAR. 
 
 The grammatical subiect is moditied by ''the" »nd "hardy," 
 adjective elements of the first degree, and by " clad in skins," 
 an adjective element of the second degree. 
 
 The predicate verb is corapieted by the object "severity" 
 which is motlitiod by "the,'' an adjective element of the first 
 degree, and by "of his arctic climate," an adjective element of 
 the second <legree. 
 
 Th'; grammatical predicate is niodiKed by "l.M)ldly," an 
 adverbial element of the first degree. 
 
 2. This misfortune will certninlf/ ttiake the poi/r man 
 miserable for life. 
 
 This is a simple declarative sentence. The logical subject 
 is " This misfortune." The grammatical subject is " misfor- 
 tune." The logical predicate is ' will certainly make the poor 
 man miserable for life. " The grammatical predicate is *' will 
 muke." 
 
 The grammatical subject is modified by "this," an adjec- 
 tive element of the first dej^ree. 
 
 The predicate verb is completed by the object " man," and 
 by the adjective complement "raisewible." 
 
 The object is modified by " the" and " poor," adjective ele- 
 ments of the first degree. 
 
 The grammatical predicate ia modified by " certainly, " an 
 adverbial element of the first degree. 
 
 3. How oft the sight if means to do III deeds makes 
 ill deeds done ! 
 
 This is -i simple exclamatory sentence. The logical subject 
 " the sight of means to do ill a^eds." The grammatical sub- 
 ject is "sight." The logical predicate is -'makes ill deeds 
 done." The grammatical predicate is "makes." 
 
 The grammatical subject is modified by " the," an adjective 
 element of the first degree, and by " of means to do ill deeds," 
 an adjective element of the second degree. 
 
 The predicate verb is completed by the object "deeds." and 
 by "done," an adjective complement which modifies the object 
 
ANALYS;S AND CONSTRUCTION. 209 
 
 Thf object " det'ils" i» inmliHcJ hy "ill," an a«l.jei'tive ele- 
 ment of the fii-st (legn-e. The siiiiplu predicate ia aiodilietl liy 
 *• how oft," an adverbial element of the Hrat degree. 
 
 Written Analysis. 
 372. Written analysis may bo presented in iabul.ir 
 form or the elements and their degree may ha 
 designated by the following signs : — 
 
 s' r substantive tcorrf ; i.e., substuntivc element of/rs< degree. 
 
 s" -Hubstantive phrase : i.e., substantive element of second 
 degree. 
 
 s'" substantive clause: i.e., substantive element of third 
 degree. 
 
 a' n; adjective loord : i.e., adjective clement of Jirst degree. 
 
 a" adjective phrase : i.e., adjective lenient of scco..rf d-jgree. 
 
 a'" — adjective clause : i.e., adjective 'dement of third degree. 
 
 adv.' ^adverbial wurd : i.e., adverbial elemcn*^ oi Jirst degree. 
 
 (wZtJ." -adverbial phroic : i.e., adverbial element of second 
 degree. 
 
 n</t?."' -adverbial clause : i.e., adverbial clement cf third 
 degree. 
 
 Models. 
 
 1. Niyht, noble ijoddess, from her ebon throne, 
 In rayless inajesty, now stretches forth 
 Her leaden sceptre o'er a shtmberin(j world. 
 
 This is a simple declarative sentence. 
 
 Grammatical subject "Night" («'). 
 
 (Jrammatical predicate, ..." stretches." 
 
 Adj unct of subj ect " sable goddess' ' (a). 
 
 Complement. = . = , = ..,,, " sceptre" {obj.'). 
 
 U 
 
 |.,i 
 
 i 
 
''• ,- 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ ' .-, 
 
 _'■'• 
 
 '>r 
 
 ' ■ 
 
 ry<' - 
 
 
 \ii,. 
 
 ,«.- "''• 
 
 \. . 
 
 vk 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 Jis 
 
 m 
 
 K 
 
 210 ENOLI8H ORAMMAR. 
 
 Adjuncts of complement...'- her" and *' leaden" (a). 
 
 Adjuncts of predicat* "now" and "forth" {nrfv.') , from 
 
 her el)on throng" "in rayless 
 majesty, " and "o'er a slumber- 
 ing world" {adv."), 
 
 2. f/ini the Altnltjhty Pourr 
 
 Hurled hethUoinj Jiamiug /ram the othfrenl nky, 
 With \Heouii ruin and conibiistiuv, doV)n 
 To hottinnlesii perdition. 
 
 This is a simple declarative striteDrc, 
 
 Grammatical subject "Power" i^'). 
 
 (irammtttical piedicatc "hurled." 
 
 Adjuncts of subject " the" and " Almighty" (f»'). 
 
 Complement : "him ' (oft/.). 
 
 Adjuncts of Complement .... "flaming from the ethereal 
 
 sky" («'•). 
 
 Adjuncts of predicate "headlong" ("arft. ), "with 
 
 hideous ruin and combustion" 
 (adv.") down to iK.ttomles.s 
 perdition" [adv.") 
 
 3. The Kiiuj of Spain ordered Fernando de Talu- 
 uera, the Prior i,J Prado, to assemhle the mo.<t 
 learned astrononurs and cosmographers of the 
 kingdom, to holt u conference with Columbus, 
 
 This is a simple declarative s. utencq. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 211 
 
 Ai, Preukatk 
 
 roMri.RMRKTM. 
 
 1. KfnmiiiliMic 
 
 Taluvera (n!) 
 
 J. To MtMcinMe 
 
 Kint^iliini {»" ). 
 
 AOJ'NCTII Of 
 
 (,'omi'i.kmrmh. 
 
 the l*rior of 
 Pnui... 
 
 (a" uj cum. t) 
 
 U> hold. 
 
 Coltiml>i)!< 
 {adv." <'/ coin 7 
 
 Exerc ise 63. 
 
 Anali/.ze the J'q^JowIh<j .•<i nj)h' senleiireH : 
 
 1. In unj-ioiighetl Maine he sought the laborer's g^mg. 
 
 2. Stormed at with 8hot and shell, 
 Boldly they rode and well. 
 
 3. ITie plowman homeward plodx his weary way. 
 
 4. The squirrel eyes askance the chestnuts browning. 
 
 5. The moon threw its silvery light upon the ripplinpj 
 
 watei-s of the lal^e. 
 
 6. The swift-winged swallows twittered in their nests, 
 
 built under the eaves of the old barn, 
 
 7. Clad in a robe of everlasting snow, Mt. Everest towers 
 
 above all other mountain peaks of the globe. 
 
 8. Reaching the sunmiit of the juountains was a feat liaz- 
 
 ardoas to undertake. 
 
 y. In the hereafter angels may 
 
 Roll the stone from its grave away. — W/nftim-. 
 
 10. (iayly r.hattering to the clattering 
 
 Of the brown nuts downward pattering. 
 Leap the .s<iuiru'ls red and giay. — Uliitfirr. 
 
 1 
 
 1 '^rUn r»««^o4- iir/tvi loiil iir^ni) Viia f.u.'ik ttfnrp VARi'S i>» nMM>* 
 
 "—Wh 
 
 itticr. 
 

 
 
 
 H 
 
 l.'< 
 
 212 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 12. There iu a raiiturc on tlic lonely ahotn.—Bi/ron. 
 
 13. We while the evening hours away 
 Around our camp-tires burning. 
 
 14. Stretched round the fading, llickering light, 
 We wateh the stars above us. 
 
 15. The master gave his scholars a lesson to learn.* 
 16'. Where are you ? 
 
 17. Early to bed and early to rise, makes a man healthy, 
 
 wealthy, and wise. 
 
 18. Willit be the next week? t 
 
 11). I will give tliee a silver pound to row us o'er the ferry. * 
 
 20. Having ridden up to the spot, the enraged officer struck 
 the unfortunate man dead with a single blow of his 
 sword. § 
 
 'Jl. I saw a man with a sword. || 
 
 2'2. He found all his wants supplied by the care of his 
 friends. *^* 
 
 "23. All but one were killed. +t 
 
 24. He does not laugh. +i 
 
 25. What did you come here for ? §§ 
 
 26. The scholar did nothing but read. |||| 
 
 Construction. 
 373. In the following exercises the elements, which 
 iire stilted as separate propositions, are to bo built up 
 '"nto one simple sentence. 
 
 * "To loaiii"(a" o/comp). 
 
 t " W. ek " («(/i\") 
 
 t "To row us o'er the forrv " (adr.") 
 
 § "Dtwl "(«'((/■ o/y). 
 
 " With a siiiKh" hlow," &c. (adv." 
 II " V.'ith a sword" («" o/ohj.) 
 
 " "snpphed " (n' of oh}). 
 
 <♦ " hut one" di" of slilij). 
 
 ; ; •• n..t (adv. ). 
 
 5!! " lor uliat " {aitv." cfpicd. r). 
 
 , J " but read " (a" of vhj). 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUrTION. 
 
 213 
 
 Introduce in tlie simple sentence only such words 
 as are necessary fully and clearly to express all the 
 ideas. 
 
 ttW See that the sentence contains but one subject an«l one 
 finite verb. 
 
 .S74. A series of Adverbs, or of adverbial phrases, 
 should not be crowded together at the close of a 
 sentence but distributed in such a way as to group the 
 adverbials around the principal words. 
 
 MODEIi. 
 
 The F/-opositi07is. 
 
 1. Wellington gained a victory. 
 
 2. Wellington wiis the commander of the British army. 
 
 3. The victory was a decisive one. 
 
 4. It was gained over the Prench. 
 
 f). The victory was gained !it Waterloo. 
 
 6. Wati^rloo is in Belgium. 
 
 7. The victory was gained in 1815. 
 
 T/iP Sentence. 
 In 1815, Wellington, the commander of the British 
 army, gained a decisive victory over the French , 
 at Waterloo, in Belgium. 
 
 The PropoHilions. 
 The caterpillar seeks out some place. 
 This is !i place of concealment. 
 It docs so aftar a short period. 
 It h.is several times changed its skin.- 
 It has at length grown to its full size. 
 Itseoretps itaolf in some hole in the wall. 
 Or it buries itself under the surface of the ground. 
 
 f 
 
 
 THi 
 
 fill 
 
 1 
 
!. 
 
 L>ll 
 
 I'll-' 
 
 K\(;r,f)^Fr (MM MM vn 
 
 ;r : 
 
 Or s.^n.times only .tUvWn ,t,.H ,. a .ilkon ;veh to the 
 
 'J''ie aS'' /if I.' It re. 
 
 Having several times clianged its skin and havin- 
 at length grown to its full size, !. •aterpillar. 
 iifte. a short i)erio(l, seeks out son. .ace of con- 
 ceal nient, secreting itself in some hole in the 
 wall, burying itself under the surface of the 
 ground, or sometimes only attachin- itself hy a 
 silkeu wel» to the under side of .- leaf. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 6'on.J.it.,^ tin' fnVowiny Propo,Uiov.< into Sfmpi.e Skx- 
 
 TKNCKS, 
 
 1. {u) Stoi'l -8 made. 
 
 {'>) It is made by heiUing small bars of iron with rhar- 
 
 Kc) Or by beating them with I)one a.ul ircu ahavinj/s. 
 ('/I Or with other uiHammable substances. 
 
 2. ('/) The Uussiiins burued .Moscow. 
 
 (/') The FrciK'h were comi.elleil to leave the city. 
 
 3. (itf I saw the giicen of France. 
 
 {b It is now sixteen or seventeen years since I saw her. 
 (i) Mie was then the Daupliiuess. 
 {(1) \ suw her at Versiiilles. 
 
 4. (a) Leonidas sent away all but three hundred men. 
 
 {(') Me resolved to defend tlic pass with this devoted 
 
 '"'■ i';i J.}''' ^I'«J.'l'"'dei-.s wer -compose.l of anundierof tribes. 
 (li) 1 hese tribes were called clans. 
 (' ) Eacli clan bore a different name. 
 (d) Each clan lived upon the ImkIs of a ditlerent chieftain. 
 
 b". ''0 Alfred disguised himself as u p.-.^e 
 
 {b) He obtained access to the Danisfi camp. 
 '. (a) The organ is the most wonderful. 
 
 ih\ Tf iu tViu />>....... ..f J. — 1, ii i • ' . 
 
 , ;' ,r •' r,' °~" "' '■;■"■" -HAl 16 apOKcii ui. 
 
 (f) It 13 the most wondeiful of the seusts. 
 {,d) it is so in ui;my respects. 
 
 !t 
 
ANAF k'ftIS AND CONSTHUtflON. 
 
 215 
 
 8. (re) A frog one daj saw an ox graze in a meadow. 
 
 {b) It imagined it could make itaelf as large an that auimal. 
 
 9. {a) A balloon is a bag. 
 (6) It is a thin bag. 
 
 (c) It is a tight bag. 
 
 (d) It is made of varnished silk. 
 
 \e) It is generally shaped like a globe. 
 
 (/) It is Hlle<l with a tinid lighter than common ain 
 
 10. (it) Peter III. reigned but a few months. 
 
 (/>) Peter was deposed by a conspiracy of Russian nobles. 
 
 {r) Thi 1 conspiracy was headed by his own wife, Catha- 
 rine. 
 
 ((/) Catharine was a (German by birth. 
 
 (<) Catharine was a woman of bold and unscrupulous 
 character. 
 
 11. (o; Tht' Federalists decured tJie election of John Adams* 
 (h) Washington refused to be elected President. 
 
 (t) Adams was a leading member of the Federalist party. 
 (d) He was already distinguished by his political services 
 during the Revolution. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ■I- 
 
 ■I 
 
 ■ * r 
 
 ■if'. 
 
 
 Thi!, Complex Sentence. 
 
 375. The simple sentence and the complex sentence 
 agree in this, that each contains one, and only one, 
 hudiny proposition ; they differ in this, that the com- 
 plex sentence contains, in addition to the leading 
 propositic»n, a !<uhordiiiate proposition or clavxe. 
 
 37G. The complete thought expressed by means «»f a complex 
 sentence dots not necessarily differ from that expres.sed by a 
 simple sentence with adjuncts. A simple sentence can be 
 coiiverted into a complex sentence by expanding a subordinate 
 elemeiit of the hrst or second degree into du element of the 
 third deji/ee ; thus, — 
 
 
 • At the close of the u-ar (phrase). Wash' 
 ington retired to Mount Vernon.' 
 
 i 
 I ill 
 
'■HJf,'^ 
 
 fl * 
 
 I ■ 
 
 2in 
 
 EVr.MSII faiAMMAU. 
 
 (V)Mi'i.KX Sentknck....' in„n Uw >n,r rlos,',l. (clause), Wash- 
 ington retired to Mount Vernon.' 
 
 .377. Im tho complex; .son.ence the Kuhj'- ^1>« complr- 
 menf, or an a,fjnHct in any part of the nee may 
 
 l>e a ckiusc, or an element of the third <le"i«^o 
 
 •'^/'S, A clause in a conplex senton'^e is snhsfantivr. 
 wlj^ctin>, or <i<h-orhii(l, according to its office ; thus,— 
 
 1. That jimi cannot p<'rform the task is evident— (substan- 
 tive cLiuse lis sul)ject). 
 
 '2. I dreamt that I,hnlt h, nurrh/r ha' fs-(suhatant[vc clause 
 aS' object). 
 
 'i. Vou will never see the fruit of the trees irhlrh yon air 
 jiiunfuKj ~ (a.d'}ccUvi- clause modifying noun "trees"). 
 
 4. He f.mn.l the bn(.k whn-r h>* hff //-(adverbial clause 
 
 modifying the predicate "found"). 
 
 5. John i.s taller fh<in hi.^ hrofhrris -(Ailvcrhial clause modi- 
 
 fying the adje 'tive " taller "). 
 
 o. .She behave^ as well as iras ro///r/>,/,^,/_(adverbial clause 
 moditying the adverb " well "). 
 
 CoNNEf!TIVES. 
 
 'M9. A clause i.s introduced hy a irJatirp pronnim.o, 
 rdal'ui^ (ulrirh, or a xahonHuatire conjiuiriiou. 
 
 380. The diffi'ront kinds of clauses in complex 
 sentences may g(merally l.o disHniruislu.d by the 
 <-onnectives that introduce them. The following 
 :a.ssTHed table of connectives is given to aid the pupil 
 in disLinguishing clan^f,^ from principal members of a 
 sentence. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRITTION. 
 
 217 
 
 Introducing 
 I, Noun ('lau.scs 
 
 1. Fwi thiit, irliiit, vhcrr, >'-}n/, hmr, &c 
 '2. Altcrnativu— fhitlu-r »r. 
 
 II. Introducing adjecti\ c rlausos. 
 
 1. Person— "7(1, thaf. 
 
 2. Thing— ?'7</V7*, thiif,as. 
 .3. Place— «7*f-/v, ir/mriu. 
 4. Time--"//™, vhirmt. 
 
 III. 
 
 Adverltial 
 ClaiiHe of ' 
 
 II, 
 
 III 
 
 Pl-ACK. 
 
 Time. 
 
 Whirr, irhifhrr, vhnicc. 
 U'licti, n-hilf, v'/uutrer, 
 vtifil, 
 
 /III, 
 
 V^ 
 
 lAkeucss— as, an if. 
 
 ; -. Comi. arisen — ''•'* (imtch) 
 Manner j as, titan. 
 
 ( 3.».Kirect-(.so) that. 
 
 ( 1. Waa&oix— beam a,', si lire Jar. 
 
 I 2. Purpose— (<H order) that, 
 
 J IfKt. 
 
 i 3. Condition— jT", unless. 
 
 1 4. Concession— </toJii//i . 
 
 IV. Cai.se. 
 
 * Notes. 
 
 1 As different kinds of clauses are introduced by the .sr me 
 words, such asvho, vhn, vhcre, care should be taken to note 
 the ollice of the clause before stating its class. Ihus, lell 
 me vhre he lives" (substantive clause) ; "This is the place 
 vhere he lives" (adjective clause). An adjective clause must 
 always modify a noun. 
 
 2 The conjunction 'hat is frequently omitted before a sub- 
 stantive clause used as the (d)j.-. t of a verb: as " I fear Ac 
 vill not suceeed." So also, the relative pronoun that, when in 
 the objective case, is often omitted ; as, " 1 have found the 
 book you want." 
 
 3 A substantive clause introduced by the ccmjum tion that 
 is fre(iucntly found in af osition with a noun, and in such 
 cases it mu be treated as an adjective element of the thirv. 
 degree. Thus,—" The report that he «yas billed la untrue. 
 
 4 Adverbial clauses of comparison, int 'duced by r/.s' or 
 than, are often highly elliptical— sometimes the verb being 
 oiulcted, and son.etimes both subject and verb ; as, lie is 
 a3ricliasCio2SU8(i8rich)"; "The teacl.er praised you more 
 than (he i)raispd) me." 
 
 r». An interrogative proposition i-> sometimes used in such a 
 marry (-if any is merry), let hini sing psalms. 
 
 I 
 
 li 
 
:ns 
 
 KV(i[,r,S|| (JItAMMAR. 
 
 K Uhfcu a sMl.Htantiv,! .laiiHc tonus tin- Hubj^ot of a «en 
 Uiice, tlie fti.tioipuf:vc sulvJHct */ m ott,.„ omnloyed ; tlus anh- 
 stantive clause is then the real or logical subject ; as, "It wa- 
 ciear that they were on the jioint ot (|uarrelling." 
 
 it was clear 
 that-they-were-on-the 
 point-()f-(|uarrell:ng. 
 
 7. The adverbial connectives y-hiU; irhm, vher., (,s ic 
 
 are to be treated as elenn-nts of the clause (adverbial modiHers 
 
 oi the predicate) ; but subordinative conjunctions are merely 
 
 I'.ropitio,?^ '"'"'' *"'^ ^"™ "'^ ^""'^ "^ ^^'' structure of the 
 
 J)IRE(TM)N.S FOR AnaLVSIH. 
 
 r. After stating tlu" natm-e of tlu; senteiu-e, analyze 
 lie sentence as a whole, takmg up the principal pro- 
 positions, and treating the dependent propositions as 
 if they were single words. In this general analysis 
 designate — 
 
 1. Tlie grammatical subject of the principal proposition. 
 
 2. The grammati-al predicate of the principal proposition. 
 
 3. The modifiers of the subject. 
 
 4. The complement of the predicate. 
 
 5. The modifiers of the complement. 
 t>. The modifiers of the predicate. 
 
 II. Analyze the clauses in their ordei' after tlie 
 nmaner of the analysis of sin)])le sentencfs. 
 
 III. State tlie connective, 
 
 iSloDKf.s FOK Oral Analvhis. 
 
 1. Before Tim^ had touched his hair ivith silver, he 
 
 had often yazed vith u-i.^ffd fondness towards 
 
 that friendly shore on which Puritan huts 
 
 'J ■-"■^t!:!iiity iu cciioier i'iidtr Ihc 
 
 spreading shade of hickory and maple. 
 
ANM.VSIS ANP f'ONSTRrCTIOX. 
 
 2i0 
 
 Tliis is !i ioinplex .U-. lamtiv.- senteme, Tlif subje.t, gmm- 
 uiiiti. ill iin.l Inj/ioal, iH " lie" : the piedi. ate is ' lia'i gazi'<«, ■< 
 vtib ol ronipl.t.- i.irdi.Htiuii, an<l toiiH.Miuiiitly takiny no coiu- 
 lilenu-nt. 
 
 The grammatical pre.licate is mwlified by " before Tim.' hatl 
 l..H(he.l his hair with silver," anadvei:jial element of the thn.l 
 .{..uree, in.licatiiig time ; by "often," an adverbial elemeiu <.l 
 I he tirst «legree, indicating time ; by "with wistful fondness, an 
 ..dverbial elem.iit of the se. .nd degree, indicatmg manner ; ami 
 l.y " towanls th;.i friendly shore," an ad/eibial element ot the 
 second degree, indicating i^lace. The noun "shore' is modihed 
 l.y "on which I'uritan huts... maple," an adjective element ot 
 the tliinl degree. 
 
 Aiiahixix i>f the. CloKse-'. 
 
 4, " (Before) Time had ton. lied bis hair with silver" is an 
 adverbial clause, of which the subject, grammatical an<l logical, 
 is "Time," and the grammatical predicate "bad touchetl. 
 
 The predicate verb is completed by the object " hair" whi«h 
 is modified by " hia," an adjective element of the tirst degree. 
 
 The grammatical predicate is modified by " with silver," an 
 adverbial element of the sec(jnd degree, thus forming the logical 
 l.redi( ate, " had toucheil his hair with silver." 
 
 The connective is 'bciore," ai' adverbial element. 
 
 h. ''((hi irhirh) Puritan huts were already beginning tu 
 duster under the spreailiug shade of hickory and maple,' is an 
 .idjective clause, of which the grammatical subject is "huts, 
 and the grammatical predicate, " werr beginning." 
 
 The grammatical subject is modified by "Puritan," au 
 adjective element of the first degree. 
 
 The predicate verb is completed by the object "to cluster"... 
 )„aple " a substantive element of the second degree, consisting 
 of the infinitive "to chi.ster," modified by " umler the shade ot 
 hickory ami i.iaple," and " on which," adverbial element ot tlie 
 second ('egree. 
 
 The grammatical predicate is modified by "already, ' an ad- 
 verbial element of the first degree. The logical predicate u 
 
 ill 
 
 1-- 
 
 The connective is "on which." 
 
*'"i^"' 
 
 :. 
 
 4.' 
 
 
 I* 1 
 
 ~*' nNOLISII GRAMMAR. 
 
 2. 7'A« orrau is as Je,-p as tho nwnntalns arv. hnjh. 
 sitIm'bHn/''7h"' •l«*'''^.'-«tivv sonten.... th. principal propo- 
 
 I'V th. I. w.r . .. •' '» '■ fjrainmatical nre.licato is n.o/lilir:l 
 nLutain';^ high/' "'' '^ ^''^ "'""•'"'^' •^••-- " ^ ^»- 
 
 AvaJysIs of the Clause. 
 " As the mountains are high." 
 
 V^J't-i!^'^""' I\ ''tl.e n.onntn.n^; the grammatical 
 J.reUK ati » is, ,., ,upl,.te<l by tlie predi.-at." udj.'ct^ve " hi.'li - 
 
 •Xgitai pn (iicat>', as are IiigJi. 
 
 Models for Written Analysis. 
 
 A reader iimirrpiamted with the real nature of a 
 classical ed>,ratwu wlH prohahhj nndervalne It whni he 
 ■<ees that so large a portion of time is devoted to .he 
 .study of a few aneieut authors, whose works seem to 
 have no direct hearing on the studies aud duties of our 
 own yene ration. 
 
 A complex declarative sentence. 
 
 <!raniiiiatical subject •' if^dor {s'\ 
 
 (inuiunatical pre.li.ate " will unllervalue." 
 
 ( "A"(«'). 
 
 Adjuncts of sulyect / " ">iia«'<iuainted with the real 
 
 'y nature of a cl.issical edu- 
 
 \ cation" (a.") 
 
 <'onipleinent «< jf /^'v 
 
 Adjuncts of predicate.'. .■.■■. .■.■.■.;..■ '« pn.bab'ly" {a,lv.') 
 
 ■ " ■■ -■ • ■•o^'"^'auoa 
 
 (adv.'") A. 
 
 ■ 1' I ^» I 
 
 11' 
 
ANALYSIS AND ((jNaTKLC'TUlN. 221 
 
 Atuih/tin of A. 
 "(Wh.-ii) hc.s(»'S....Keiu'ration" (adv.'", adjuiut of pn ui.atf. ) 
 
 tiniiiiiiiatical Hul>ji'<t *' I'l;" ('*• ) 
 
 CriiiiiiMiitiial incdicatt " si-cs*." 
 
 Coim.lemont " th.it so Uip; a portion . '^vn- 
 
 ' tTiition" (.v") fi. 
 
 Adjimot of pmlicate " wlic"" Mi-')- 
 
 A iLdli/sit of H. 
 
 " (That) so laif^c a portion generation" (■-<,'" cuu\\>. v\ A.) 
 
 (Iiammaticalsnhject " portion" (•<'). 
 
 Gruniinatical predicate " is devoted." 
 
 ( " so lar<;e" (a') 
 
 Adjuncts of subject ] !! ^i'/"'*-.. / "v 
 
 •^ ( " ot time {(I ). 
 
 A.ljuncts of predicate •• to the study ofa lew annent 
 
 •' ' authors ((u'r. ') [whose 
 
 works seem generation ' 
 
 (a'") ] C. 
 
 AiKilyi^in of (^. 
 "Whose works sceMi.,.g.neniliou" (r(,"' adjunct of "auUi«.rs.") 
 
 G.anm.atieal .subject '* works." (V). 
 
 Graniinatical predicate ".seem." 
 
 Adjunct of subject : " whose" (a). 
 
 Complement " to have" («'). 
 
 Complement of complement " b. arin.'" (.v'). 
 
 ^ "no"(«). 
 
 Adiuucts of second complement. '* direct" ("'). 
 
 ' " on the studies.. Kei'^^iation 
 
 {a"). 
 
 I 
 
*)oo 
 
 KN(iLlf I (iRAMMAR. 
 
 I, .: 
 
 ij 
 
 If i 
 
 TABULAR ANALYSIS. 
 
 F'ri.j.()sitinnN KiiidN. Sul.ject. 
 
 I. Re/ore Tunc] A.lverl.ial Tiiiu' 
 had tmuhcrl his <'laiixe to 
 hair with silver, 11. {Tiine).^ 
 
 n Hchiu! xftcni I'riiui|ifcl He 
 xa/M witli «iKt-i projMtsi- 
 ful foiuliieuM to-, tioii 
 wani that friend 
 l.v shore, 
 
 PRKDH Air. 
 
 N'erh. Coiiiii't. 
 
 tiHiI hiH hair 
 
 touohi'd 
 
 KnJHrgeiiicnt. 
 wiMi HiU.r. 
 
 MI. On irhich Adjertive Puritan 
 
 I iiritHn hilts C'hmsc to hiitd 
 
 wire alruidv bo- II., 
 
 ;^inninK to cluster niodifyii.tf 
 
 under the spread- " shore " ' 
 i'lKshade of hick- 
 ory and maple i 
 
 had xazcil 
 
 jl. often r.'V(;l<) 
 I-, with wist 
 I fill ' 'iidnt'K^ 
 t(Maniiei). 
 .S toward that 
 friendly shore 
 
 «'-'■< to clus- !. alreadv 
 
 Ix'k'iiiniiix ter. l^T.inc). ' 
 
 ■i. unde; the 
 
 •eat'injf 
 lo. Hieof hick- 
 iorv and 
 niapli!(/7a/v). 
 
 Exercise 65. 
 
 Aualijze the /ollowuiii cmp/rx sehfeKr^.o, 
 \. The rose that all are praisiii- is not the rose for n,,». 
 
 3. \Vhilst light and colors ri.se and lly, 
 Live.s Xewton's deathle.ss memory.' 
 
 "*• l^'jf boy stood on the burning deck 
 W hence all }>ut him had tied. ' 
 
 Hi'^H,^^ •'? ^l^ l""^ '"■ ''°>'' ^''•anklin, who afterwanls became a 
 
 thf nS ;:^ffi'''*";^"•"';! pi"i«-p'--, leamed lustmli 
 
 Bosto" ° ■' "' ^'°''^''"' "'^^ published a paj.er ,n 
 
 6. He that fitrnt.s and ruii.s away, 
 May live to tight another day. 
 
 . -"■v''^''^: ^«t^'lV«lon.st who sells tulip.s For their weight in u.U 
 «aua»s at mc Hi.li.iuary whopays agfeat price for a rusty "lump." 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUl TION, 
 
 223 
 
 
 \* 
 
 8. We nm,st not think lh.> lite of a man bfgin;, when he can 
 feed himself. 
 
 0. Tell me itot ' mournful numht-rM, 
 Life in l»»t an empty tlri-am. 
 
 l(» Wh.n public bodies no to b.- a.l.licH»e.l on moni.'nt.tus 
 occasions, when grca' interests meat stake, ami strouK pas- 
 sions excited, nothing is valuabb- in speech urther than it is 
 coMnecte.! with high iutdlectual and moral en(h)\vment». - 
 Dnn'ui Wibstrr. 
 
 1 1 A man who, exposed to all the inlluence^ of such a state 
 of so.:ietv as that in which we live, is yet afraid of exiKJsing 
 himself to the inlluence of a few Greek <.r Latin vei^es aj^ts we 
 think, much like the felon who begged t.ie sheriffs to let hiiu 
 have an umbrella held over his head from the .lo..r of N wgate 
 to the gallows, because it was a drizzling morning, and he was 
 apt to take cold. Macanlay. 
 
 12. But when the sun broke from the underground, 
 Then these two brethren, slowly, with bent brows, 
 Accompanying the sad chariot-bier. 
 Passed like a shadow through the field that shone 
 Full summer, to that stream whereon the barge 
 Palled all its length in blackest samite lay.- rcnnuson ^Elainp. 
 
 13 if 1 could stand for one moment upon one of your high 
 mountain tops, far above all the kingdoms of the civilized 
 worlJ, and there might see, coming up one after another, the 
 bravest and wisest of the ancient warriors and statesmen, and 
 kings, and monarchs, and priests ; and if, as they came up. 1 
 miffht be permitted to ask from them an expression of opinion 
 upon such a case as this, with a common voice, and iii thunder 
 tones, reverberating through u thous ind valleys, and ochoiu^ 
 down the ages, they would cry, " •;, ^^^^V' Freedom, the 
 Universal Brothekhooi. of Mxs\'' -Colon>'^ Bnktr. 
 
 14. He is proud that he is noble.* 
 
 15. The older you become, th .iser you should be.t 
 Irt. His conduct is not such as I admire.* 
 
 - "That he is noble" (adv."'), ailjuuct of i.redicate (reason), 
 i .. mi.- i.i.J.iir " i-t:- ^i.'?!' '">. nio.Ufviiig " snoula rn". 
 : •• Asi admire " {a'"), mo(iifying ''■ such." 
 
22 4 ENciLisH (;ua..ima: . 
 
 1 7. Sro, Ihto in Ji bower * 
 
 Of ij^liiiitinc, with •'oiicyMucklo wovtii, 
 V'hcru nut Ji simrk of prying Ii;;Jit crLcpH iii.§ 
 
 l^. The liiiil) thy ri«it doomed to hh-t'd to-day, 
 M;i<l hi; thy reason, wouhl h- skip iind play.ll 
 
 Sfntexce-Building. 
 
 3.S1. In toinhining IVoi»ositioiiM into u Con>i»l«'x 
 Sentence!, ol)«ervc the following dinrtionM ; — 
 
 1. ('lau.soK sjjould stand as near as i)ossiMe to the 
 
 words they cjualify. 
 
 2. An adjective clause must follow the noun which 
 
 it (lualifies. 
 
 '3. An adverbial clausv. ijeueraff't/ follows the word it 
 niodifios ; Ijiit it is often more elegit nt to make 
 certain auverbial clauses — especially those of 
 time, place, concession, condition — precede the 
 word they (pialify. 
 
 1. A noun-clause used as suhject generally stHuds 
 t»'/'u-(i the verb ; used a-s the complement of a 
 transitive verb, after it. 
 
 MOOEL OK 8YNTIIESI8. 
 
 I. Propositions to he combined into a Con/jtlex Scntrnce, 
 
 1. IJenjamiii Fraukhu learned his trade. 
 
 2. He (lid this when ho was a boy. 
 
 S " ^yiiiTc not :i »\wk," tU'. («'"), adjunct of " Lower." 
 I " Mould heskip;" " Hu " is u rt'i-ttitioii of sul.ject "Jamb." Arnintf 
 thus:_ ; Would tlif laiul) wliicli fliv riot doomed tc bleed to-dav. skin and 
 
 \>iu^ \l lie iiiiti iiiv reason : '' 
 
ANALYSIS AM> < < •NsTKl ( Tl' 'N. 
 
 225 
 
 ■) Mc .aftumanlM hccaino a (listin^iUMluMl i^tatcMin hikI a 
 
 plllloH(l|lllC'l. 
 
 4. lie IfuriHftl liis trade in hin l>rtithor'H iiriiiting-ottiie. 
 
 fi. Mis lii-otlit-r published a pup<-i' iu liotitoii. 
 
 II. Projxmdoun conihiwd. 
 
 When he wiis a Ijoy, Kniukliii, u!io at'terwanl Ikh-uihh 
 a (listinguishtMl staifstnan and [)hih)Sopher, learned 
 hiH trade in the printing-cttice *" hia hrother, who 
 [(iiltlished a paper in Hoston. 
 
 Exercise 66. 
 
 ('i>n<h)lSt th'' fi)lh)ii'ing PllOI'OSITIONS intn CoMPLKX 
 
 Skntkncks. 
 
 I. ((/) Tilt' ineriiio . sheep is a native of Spain. 
 (6) I'iitu ch>th is made from ita wool. 
 
 'J. ((() Tea was unknown in this country a few centuries ago. 
 [(>) We could now acarct-ly dispeuHe with it. 
 
 .*{. {ii) 1 1, iiity of Home is situated on the river Tiber. 
 (//) Thv oity is about sixteen miles distant from the sea. 
 
 4. (ii ) The sca-dykeslin Holland are generally ab<»ut thirty feet 
 in height. 
 [b) They are erected, all il' u^ the coast. 
 
 r». (a) I'hrirles W was the in. >st unowned of all the emperor 
 of Germany. 
 {h) He abdicated the thr(<ue. 
 ('•) He retired to a convent. 
 
 »j. (a) The Spanianla were beginninj^ to despair. 
 
 t^h) The eagle eye of Cortez had been keenly surveying the 
 
 whole Held of battle. 
 (.) \\a saw where the sacred banner of Mexico was borne 
 
 aloft in triumph. 
 
 7. {(>) Cicsar migiit not have been murdered. 
 
 {!)) Suppose Ctesar had taken the advice of the friend. 
 ((•) The friend warned him not to go to the Senate-house 
 on the Ides of March. 
 
 8. (a) The world is of this op >ion. 
 {b) The end of fencing is to hit. 
 (c) The end of medicine is to cure. 
 \d) The end of war is lo comjufi. 
 
 13 
 
 \m 
 
 I 
 
r 
 
 U' 
 
 22fi 
 
 KN'OLISIf (iff A\f\f,\F!, 
 
 V. (o) The lital w;i8 ao great. ^ 
 
 {b) We were living in Italy. 
 
 ' ) We were obliged to remain in .larkcne.l rooms <lu.ii,.. 
 several hours of the day. 
 
 10. (a) The lion was niagnirioent to behold 
 
 (6) He was stan.ling with his .heek against the grating <,J 
 Ills cage. '^ 
 
 (c) He was attempting to break down the olmta.tle. 
 
 ((/) Ihis obstacle separated iis 
 
 ie) He shook the walls of hi.s cage with roars of rage. 
 
 i 
 
 I ■ 
 
 ' «' 
 
 |i 
 
 ■I- 
 
 ? ■ 
 I 
 
 
 !l 
 
 •J 
 
 CHAPTKk I v. 
 
 The ('u.viPor.M* Sentknce. 
 
 382.; A compound .sentence contains two or more 
 
 principal or independent j.iopo.sitions. These proposi. 
 
 tions are said to be ro-ordimfr, tliat i.s of the .same rank, 
 
 and they are connected by co-or.linative conjunctions.' 
 
 Im.l-,stkatiov. 
 ^ Japoleon .rossed the Alps, and de.scen.led into the plains of 
 
 38:i. The propositions in a compound sentence arp 
 called members. Any member taken by itself may be 
 either a simple sentence or a complex sentence. 
 
 384, When a member is a simple sentence it may be 
 called a .y/my^ n>.mher ; when a comple.x .sentence, a 
 coi/ip/ej- memher. 
 
 385. Abridged Ccmpounds.- When co-ordinate pro 
 positions have the same subject or predicate, or even the 
 same complement, or the same modifier of the subject 
 or of the predicate verb, the common element may be 
 oraitte<i. The compound sentence i.s then called a 'con . 
 c ' . 'rc? oentence. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRrCTlON. 
 
 '211 
 
 Ilhstratiuns. 
 1. Either a knave (must have clone this) or a fool niUBt have 
 
 •lone tluH 
 
 la (l)y lieat) and (the air) becoincs light hy 
 
 2. The air exi»an» 
 
 lit'at. 
 
 3. Frogs ami seals live on laixl and on wat^-r to four siinplp 
 
 sentences : 1. FrogH live ou land. -'. Frogs liv.- m 
 water. 3. Seals live on land. 4. Seals live in watt-r. 
 
 4. With eveiy etl'ort, with every breath, ami with every 
 
 motion —voluntary or involuntary- a part of the mus- 
 c ular suljstance beiomts dead, separates from the living 
 part, eondmies with the remaining portions (»f inhaled 
 oxygen, and is removed. 
 
 Hert' there an- four predicates, having but one suVjeet, and 
 tlti.-e enlargements of tliese predicates distinct from one an- 
 other. To express the entire meaning of the sentence in 
 separate propositions, we shouhl have first to repeat tl- subject 
 with each predicate, making four simple sentences, and then 
 ivpeat each of those sentences with each of the enlargements, 
 milking twelve propositions in all. 
 
 Method of Analysis. 
 :iSO. The analysis of the compomid sentence involves 
 no new principle. Fts members are unHlyzed accordin;^^ 
 to the models for the analysis of Himple and of coni- 
 ple.\ sentences. 
 
 Co-ORDINATR ( 'oNNECTI VKS. 
 
 The following table i my aid in distin«,Mii.shing the 
 specutl nature of the conn.iction of the members of a 
 I'ompoiind sentence. 
 
 Copulative 
 
 / And, also, likewise, again, besides. 
 
 ) Moreover, further, furthermore. 
 
 ) Not only . but, then, too (following 
 
 ( another word). 
 
 I Either... or. 
 
 1 -» .. . , • ii 
 
 Disjunctive '. -^"^ cituci uoi , uur {m uic 
 
 ( otherwise, else. 
 
 
 r 
 
228 
 
 KNCJLISii OUAMMAn. 
 
 V-i 
 
 .1 , 
 
 Adversative 
 
 Illative. 
 
 f Kut, on the ntlicr hiiinl. Uiii then. 
 
 I <)nly, nfvertli..lo.sy, at tin- bame time. 
 
 i However, iiotMitlistiiiidin^^. 
 
 I On the one hand, on tin- otlier hand, 
 
 { eon'er.'iolv. 
 
 I Yet, still, for all that. 
 
 S 
 
 Accordingly, con.se(jUfntly. 
 Hence, whence, ho then, ami so. 
 ( For, thus. 
 
 Exercise 67. 
 
 A. 
 
 Aiit(hi::e thr fulloirhnj ('oMr(HNi) Si:ntk\('ks: 
 
 I. Men's evil manners live in l.rass : their virtues we write 
 in water. 
 
 '1. I love Freedom; I will speak her words ; I will listen t.. 
 her music , I will arknowled^r,. l,,,, impulses • 1 will 
 stand beneath her Hag ; I will tight in her ranks' ; ami 
 wlien I do so, I sliall find myself suirounded hy the 
 great, the wiae, the good, the brave, the noble of every 
 land. — E. I). Biikrr. 
 
 8. Tile a.ts, scirnces, and literature of f]ngland came over 
 with the settler^; the jury came; the hah'n.-< mrpx^ 
 came ; the testamentary power came ; and tiie law ot 
 inheritance and descent came also, exce])t that part of 
 it wliicli rec(»gni;^cs the rights of primogeniture, which 
 either did not come at all, or soon gave way to the rule 
 of cpial partition of estates among children. - MV/m/,/- 
 
 4» ^ <)n a sudden, open t\y 
 
 With impetuous recoil and jarring sounds 
 The infernal doors ; and on their liiiu'es grate 
 Harsl- thunder.— J/ i7;i>«, '' 
 
 It (Bacon s Philosophy) has lengthened life ; it lias miti 
 gated pain ; it has extingui.shed diseases ; it has in- 
 creaa2<l the fertility of thj soil , it has given new 
 securities to the mariner ; it has furnisiied now arms to 
 tJie warrior ; it has spanned great .ivers and estuaries 
 with bridgf of fonu unk own to our fathers ; it has 
 guided the thunderbolt innocuously from heaven to 
 eartli : ithnn litrhtedu'j the niL'htv.'ith t}!.':.:!-.!^^!-..!.... ..f i i. . 
 
 day ; it has extended the range of the humairvisiou ; 
 
ANALYSIS ANO fONSTRl TIOX. 
 
 229 
 
 it has multipliea the power of the human Tniiscles ; it 
 has accelerated motion ; it has annihilatea distance ; 
 it has facilitated intercourse, corrcBpondence, all 
 friendly offices, all dispatch of business ; it has enable.1 
 men to descend to the depths of the sea, to soar into 
 the air, to i-cnetratc seiurely into the noxums recesses 
 of the .-arth, to trr.vcrse the laud in car« which whirl 
 alona without horses, an.lthe ocean in ships whuh run 
 t.-n knots an h.uir against the ^^\ni\.~MncaHlay shssay 
 on Lord, Bmoii, 
 
 B. 
 
 C/iawje thefolhmhiii hirerte<l Conipoond Seutmre^i into 
 
 their conuixm order : 
 
 1. Now came still evening on, and twilight gray 
 Had in her sober livery all things c\a.i\.—MMoH. 
 
 2. 'Twas in autumn, and stormy and d: ik was the night, 
 And fast were the windows and Aoo\».—Southi'ij. 
 
 C. 
 
 Snpph/ the KlUpses in the followin'j Scu mces : 
 
 1 But what are lands, and seas, and skies to civili-ed man, 
 ■ without society, without knowle.lge, without niorals, 
 
 without religious culture: and how can these be on- 
 ioved, in all their extent, and in all their excel.encp, 
 but under the protection of wise institutions and a tree 
 government ? — IVfhstt'r. 
 
 2 Some place their bliss in action, some in ease ; 
 Those call it pleasure, and cnntentmcnt these. 
 
 3 All nature is but art unknown to thee : 
 
 All chance, direction which thou canst not see ; 
 All discord, harmony not understood ; 
 All partial evil, universal good.— Poy>r. 
 
 Contraction and Expansion. 
 
 .387. Tlie compound sentence maybe chstnged into a 
 complex sentence bv taking one member as thein'incipal 
 .......l^.u^^., ..t.,1 ..boiirnna tlip otlicis. SO that as clause: 
 
 ses 
 
 ' I 
 
 fef 
 
 thev 
 
 .all make their statement as attendant or motli 
 
 i 
 
 t>i 
 
 i 
 
230 
 
 KNfiLISM (MUMMAR. 
 
 r 
 
 I 
 
 ii: 
 
 
 M. 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 lying cncmustances. Again, by changing the clause 
 to a phrase, we have a simple sentence. This process 
 IS called contraction. The changing of a simple sen- 
 tence to a complex sentence, or to a compound sentence 
 js called eu-pauslon. ' 
 
 iLLUSfRATION OF CONTRACTION. 
 
 (Jompomvl Senleni^c. 
 The sea spent its tiny, and then it became calm. 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 When the sea had spent its fury it became calm. 
 
 I tSintp/e Sentenre. 
 
 The sea, having spent its fury, became calm. 
 
 Exercise 68. 
 
 A. 
 
 Contrartth'foUoiruHj Compound Hkntknces into Com- 
 plex Sentences, and then, if 2^.^.4 hie, into Simply 
 >Spn tetters : 
 
 ]. The light infantry joine<l the main body, and the Hritish 
 troops retreated precipitately into Boston. 
 
 -• ^"^ "^^^ » worthless man, and he could not conunand the 
 respect of liis neighbours. 
 
 3. Kgypt is a wonderfully fertile country, and it is annually 
 
 overflowed by the river Nile. 
 
 4. The earth is round, and no one doubts it. 
 
 5. The house was very large, and consequently there was 
 
 little comfort in it. 
 
 B. 
 
 Conftnef the JoUmvhtg C,>tt>ph.r Setiteuees Ivtu Shttplc 
 
 S»'iite)n'eet : 
 1. .Socrates proved that virtue is its own reward. 
 
 "■ '' S nlTl^' ^^"^1 ^'^ '^r"' ""'■ "''•!' «t''"^->^ '^» a sunken 
 r"ef near the rock-bound coast. 
 
ANALYSIS AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 231 
 
 3. It may he easily shown that the earth ie round [the 
 
 rot"ndity of]. 
 
 4. It is generally believed that the soul is immortal. 
 
 c. 
 
 E.qniii<l ihv foUiiiriiHj Slinph' S^'iitciirta into Cowpler 
 
 Senfrn<rs : 
 
 1. Quarrelsome per.sons are disagreeable. 
 
 2. The ancients believed the earth to be the centre of th« 
 
 universe. 
 
 3. With patience, he might have succeeded. 
 
 4. The utility of the telegraph is evident to all. 
 
 J. The manner of his escape is a profound mystery. 
 
 D. 
 
 Cmtrarf the foilotrliKj Piininraphs Info Conq>fe.r Spv- 
 teun'H: >„• (if iJu\s <-aiinot he >kme), Into Cowpnnnd 
 Sen tc /ices : 
 
 1. l^ngland abounds in tine pastures. 
 England abounds in extensive downs. 
 
 These pastures and downs feed great nunibers of sheep. 
 
 2. The Highlanders were composed of a number of tribes. 
 Theae tribes were called clans. 
 
 Each clan bore a different name. .,-,*• 
 
 Each dan lived upon the lands ot a different chiettain. 
 
 3. The cuckoo builds no iiest for herself. 
 
 vHhe lays in the nests of other birds. . „ u -j 
 
 She does not lay indiscriminately in the nests ot all birds. 
 
 .1. The pitcher-plant is a native of the East Indies. 
 The pitcher-plant has mugs or tankards. 
 These are attached to its leaves. 
 They hold each fr.>in a pint to a nuart of very pure w«tpr. 
 
 5. A young girl had fatigued herself one hot day. 
 It was with running about the garden. 
 She sat herself down in a pleasant arbor. 
 She soon fell asleep. 
 
 m 
 
 ■m 
 
232 
 
 ENGLISH GKAMMAR. 
 
 
 E 
 
 Co,Mne Ike Statements ,„ ,acK P„rn,r<.ph !,„o a 
 
 They did not know how to procure arrows at nresent 
 rhej had great reason to clread their attacks. 
 
 1. Out of this clay they found means to form a utensil 
 rh.8 utensd n.ight servo for a lamp. '""'• 
 
 ofSS's.*" '^^P "'* ^''"«^-*'>- '---fe' -ith the fat 
 They might kill the animals. 
 
 ^' Th?H"ff"" ^T ««o^etimps engaged in labors 
 
 '^ Ubiirs::er^"'>' ^"^"*« ' -^^ "- — t these 
 He thus ac-'uirert firmness of frame 
 He thus acquired a disregard of hardship. 
 
 3. Tin is a metal. 
 
 Ancient P.ritain was most famous tor tin. 
 
 ll.e Phwnicians were first induced to visit Britain for tin. 
 
 ^' ""^"wHh gas'" ' -'^t-y-go. London began to be lighted 
 
 '''''' ::i'^^!^l:Tri^^^ '"^^^^"^-^ >* -*« ^^^ streets 
 
 ^'";Lrreif *^°*« ^^' '^^ ''^'''^' their houses son. 
 
 ^' Thll"!^ fern pushed her head tlirough the ground 
 This was on a bright May morning ^ 
 
 SW Hrif ^^ ""T^^ *^''^^'" unrolling her head. 
 ■>ne hrst looked around. 
 
 *;;;= Lwunse f'rOaiVter « wise fcvn. 
 
4. 
 ANALYSIS 
 
 AND CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 233 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 6. He spoke to the king like a rough man. 
 I think this myself. 
 He wan a rouf n, angry man. 
 He did nothing more. 
 
 F. 
 
 Covstruct a Narrative out of the following facU, intro. 
 ducing the yeveml kuuls of itentences : 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 Cotton is a white subHtance. Cotton grows in the seed-pod 
 of a plant. It is gathered from the pod. It is cleaned out 
 from tlie seed. It is sent to the manufacturer. The manu- 
 facturer makes it, by the help of machinery, into thread or 
 yarn. He also makes it into cloth. Cotton is used very ex- 
 tensively as material for clothing. It« combination of warmth 
 and lightness tits it for a great variety of climate. Its cheap- 
 ness brings it within reach of the poorest. It is grown largely 
 in India and Egypt. The finest kind is obtained from America. 
 
 Iron. 
 
 Iron may be said to be the most useful of metals. It is em- 
 ployed in all the more important pioccsses of human labor. We 
 are largely dependent on it for carrying on the business of life. 
 We are largely dependent on it for enjoying the comforts of 
 life. The plough is made of iron. We turn up the ground 
 with the plough. Boilers ai ade of it. We prepare our 
 food in boilers. Pens are made of it. We write with pens. 
 Hail ways are made of it. We travel on railways. Iron is 
 employed in three states. Cast-iron is so called from being 
 cast in moulds. Cast-iron is used for railing, pots, and grates. 
 Wrouqht iron is so called from being wrought by the hammer. 
 This process gives it greater consistency. Wrought iron is 
 used for railways. Wrought iron is used for all articles m 
 which toughness is required. Steel is iron tempered so as to 
 bpcome very hard and fine. Steel is used for edged tools and 
 tine instruments. The most useful metal is also the most 
 abundant. This is a happy circumstance that Britain abounds 
 in iron. The principal mines are in Staffordshire, Wales, and 
 the west of Scotland. 
 
 The IVir..: (i)x<t the Sim. 
 
 A disiiii-te OIK e arose between the wind and the sun which 
 of tliem" is the stronger of the two. They agreed to decide jt 
 
234 
 
 KN(;LrsM rjRAMMAR. 
 
 i 
 
 ^>y this consideration. One of them would sooner make a 
 traveller lay aside his cloak. He was to be accounted the 
 more powerful . The wind blew a blast with all its might and 
 main. This blast was cold as a Thracian storm. This blast 
 was fierce as a Thracian .storm. He blew stronger. The tra- 
 veller wranped his cloak closer about him. He grasped it 
 tighte. with his hands. The sun then broke out. With his 
 welcome beamH he dispensed the vapour. With his welcome 
 heams he dispersed the cold. The traveller felt the genial 
 Harriitli. The sun shone brighter and brighter. The traveller 
 sat down. The traveller was overpowereil with the heat. 
 I he traveller cast his cloak on the ground. 
 
I 
 
 J 
 
 JIILI.ER'S NEW 
 
 SW'INTON'S LANGUAGE LESSONS, 
 
 ADAPTED TO CANADIAN SCHOOLS. 
 
 By J. A. MACMILLAN, B.A., 
 
 OTTAWA COLLJOUTE INSTITUTE. 
 Specially arranged ai an introductory Text Book to Mason'i nram- 
 marrthc authorized text >ook for Public Schools. The DefiniUons. 
 Classification of Pronoun.. Verbs and General Treatment are now 
 brought into complete harmony with Mason* Larger Grammar. 
 PRICF. - 25 CENTS. 
 The only edition approved of by the Miniiter of Education, Ontario. 
 The only edition approved of by the Su pt. of Education, Manitoba. 
 
 D. H, SMITH, A.M., Inspector of Schools. Colchester Co., N. S. 
 " Miller's new Swinton't Lant-iage Lessons Icons.der is a work that 
 has been long needed in our pubHc ^choc's for beginners. The sulrc^ 
 of *hich it treats has been hitherto too much studied by them in a 
 medfanical manner. They are allowed to commit ,ts principles to 
 memory without any definite understanding as to their application. Thr 
 
 ^^^leLd natural method pursued in tht,^«**irJitTintelIi«nce"- 
 will break up the practiac and ac comphab the work with intelligence. 
 
 W. L. DANAGH, Inspector, Cumberland Co., N. S. 
 "Miller's new Swinton'a Language Lessons, by Macmillan, a;; an 
 easy and speedy method of teaching grammar it seems to me to bo 
 
 unequalled. ' 
 
 L. S. MORSE, M.A., Inspector of Schools for Annapolis County. 
 " Having examined Miller's new Swinton's Language Lessors, bv 
 Macmillan, f must record my high appreciation ot the work as an elemen- 
 ta?v"ext biok. It is well adapted for the use of junior classes, and shou.a 
 be in the hands of every young a nd inexpe rienced teacher, 
 
 J. D. McGILLIVRAY, Inspector P. S., Hants, N. S. 
 
 " Miller's new Swinton's Language Lecsons, by Macmillan, I logard 
 u an admirable work." 
 
 Rev. JOHN AMBROSE, M.A.. Supt. of Schools, Digby. N. S. 
 
 " Miller's new Swirton'a Language Lessons, bjr McMillan, is an 
 admirable epitome of English Grammar and Composition avoiding diffi- 
 cult words, and simple and clear in its explanation, will supply a want in 
 our public schools to which I have more than once invited public 
 
 attention. 
 
 C. F. ANDREWS, Inspector for Queen's County, N. S. 
 
 " Miller's new S-Mnton's Language Lessons I consider an excellent 
 elementary text book, fitted alike for the experienced a.id inexperienced 
 Readier Its practicable adaptation to the work of the school room is an 
 admirable featu. , and I shall have much pleasure in recommending the 
 introduction of this work into the schools under my inspection. 
 
 TO AVOID CONFUSION ASK FOK 
 
 Miller's New Swintou's Language Lessons. 
 
 I 
 
'i: 
 
 THREE EDITIONS SOLD IN SIX MONTHS 
 
 —OF- 
 
 HAMBLIN SMITH'S ARITHMETIC, 
 
 ADAPTED TO CANADIAN CUKRKMCV BV 
 
 THOMAS KIRKLAND. M.A.. Science Master Normal 
 
 School, Toronto, and 
 WM. SCOTT. M.A., Head Master Model «chooJ, Ontario. 
 
 4th Edition, Price, 
 
 75 Cents. 
 
 Authorized by the Minister of Education, Ontario. 
 Authorized by Ihe Couucil of Public Inetntction, QutUe, 
 Recommended by the Senate of the Univ. of hnlifax. 
 Authorized by the Chief Su.tjt. Education. Manitoba. 
 
 FROM MOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 A. C. A. DOANE, Inspector of Schools, Bp-rrington, N. B. 
 
 training. Tliov Vill Iso ^ov . *"' *" >^«cl>prH i„ thorough 
 
 onset niles af ^,Ton eTplaVaTi,^^^ 
 
 obRc.ritirs, f>o tl aTpu ,^!s i.H V r, ,nl ^''*' '^'/^'"V'K of scomiDR 
 
 aiKl proceed to the solu>,,s e • ' ''""''"•^'•""'■'l the questions 
 those desirous of obSf«M .f ^^1 ''''""■'''*'" 'ts use to all 
 useful kuo-"dge *"'''^°"^« *"'' acnuuntai.ce with this branch of 
 
 C. F. ANDREWS, Inspector for Queen's Co., NoTa Scotia 
 
 book on that sr.i.jtct that has verofn;r^VV over any text 
 
 practical, ^-m^U- nu,\cou,TeWe^^^^^^^^ " '" 
 
 pleased t^okcoun.*eud\»;'^'Syhltlodttlot''''"'"'- ' '""^ ^« 
 
 W 8. DANAGH, M.A.. Inspector of Schools, Cumberland. N S. 
 ^Hambi^i^w SMITH'S AniTHMKTtr. -■■ It ,„,. a value for candidate. 
 
 n I' 
 
M 
 
 HAMBLIN SMITflt'S ALGEBRA. 
 
 With Appendix by ALFRFU BAKKR, H A , Mathem.tkal Tutor. 
 
 University ColleRe, Toronto. 4th hd., rjo cti. 
 Antnorized by the ^finister of Education f^rVntario. 
 AnthoHMed bv the Cmincil of Public InBtrMcticm for (^bac. 
 Becommended by the Senate of the Univeriity of Halifax. 
 
 O. MACDONALD, Prof. M»thematlc», Dalhousie College, Halifax. 
 - 1 have received a set of your Mathematical Publicatloni. viz.. 
 the Treatiaea on Arithmetic, Algebra, and (Jeomotry. by > »"• H";^^'?- 
 i 'a Smith. They all seem to me admiraole treatises, and ntted. to 
 I a the text bookn for more thorough and Bcientiflc teac'ilnc than 
 Las yet found its way into the majority of our high HchooU and 
 academies. </f the copious exercises in elementary algebraic, pro- 
 ceases every thorough teacher will approvn, since experience shews 
 that, as discipline in grammar is the uiain requirement of the 
 young student of classics, so practice in algebraic manipulations is 
 Ihe fundamental requirement of the algebraist Then again, the 
 refenence of equations involving the treatment of radicals to a 
 separate and advanced section. m> -ks the author as one who has 
 jyinpathy with the difliculties of beginners. The ex- sitions are 
 unifoiTOlv succinct and clear. The geometry has merits equally 
 hich Mai y of Euclid's methods are improved on. and propositions, 
 not as in ;:uclld, deduced from a common principle I raav ln»tauce 
 two propositions in the 3rd book.the 22nd. and the :U9t. The methcHl 
 of Buperoosition of triangles employed in the earlier propositions 
 of the 6th book, will be to many a striking novelty, and it is untforyi 
 Of course, many of us, from long practice In expounding and critj. 
 cising Euclid-s element, had arrived long ago at these method^. 
 But ft may be doubted if they are BeneraUy l^nown They arg 
 unquestionably preferable to the old, though Euclid s methouf, 
 ought to be explained along with them. We want sadly a national 
 Euclid, and this is the best approximation to it that I have seen. 
 We in Dalhousie include these books as admissible and recom- 
 mended text books in our mathematical classes of the first year. 
 They are sure to come into sxtensive demand, as thsir merits come 
 to be recosnised. 
 
 B. C. WBLDON, M^, Math. Matter Mrv ^Ulson College, 
 
 SackviUe, N. B. 
 "We «r« nalnf yonr Algsbra in our AeaAomj.** 
 
 A. C. A. DOANE, Inspector of Schools, Barrington, N. S. 
 ••The algebra as an elementary work contains all that is needed 
 for our better class of common schools. The on-angement is such 
 as to lead the student from first principles gradually to the intri- 
 cacies of the science, and then with lucid discussions to unravel 
 those intricacies and bring the whole under the comprehension ot 
 e\ Jry ordinary intellect. The examination papers form a valuable 
 and useful part of the work. I can unhesitatingly recommend it 
 to teachers as ^rell adapted to aid them materially in their work, 
 and to Btudentii as a text book well suited to their needs. 
 
 C. T. ANDREWS, Inspector for Queen's Co., N. S. 
 •• I have examined Hamblin Smith's algebra and found the ex- 
 amples admirably arranged in a progressive order, easy and well 
 adapted for the use of r-r public schools, Into which I shall be 
 pleased to recommend its troduction. 
 
 HEBBEBT C. CBEED, M.A.. Math. Master Normal Scotia, 
 Fiedericton, N.B. 
 
 ••I have made sufficient acquaintance with Hwm'tiU^, Smithes 
 Ihisebra K) be aaiiBii'ju ul its oxcsiiencs as a itJii yuu-, =.i:a •-■-• -.r^.!- 
 rar.t me in reccinmeuding it to one of my classes. 
 
"How To lYirAfk 
 
 A D.... Boo. Po. CO-..CT ..o ExpT.if.^S:„,„. Ao*„.n 
 
 no • rO« THE USB OF SCHOOLI 
 
 By R.rHA.n T.«,v,, Teacher of Flocutlon, Au.oor of "Dominion F.loct- 
 tionut, Ac. 3rd Ed.. Price 73 Cent!. 
 ' ^^tft^yritBd hu ttie MiniMter of Education fnr Ontarin 
 Authortsed by ths Ckisf Supl of ^.Xuc^CSlJ^fta. 
 D. H. SMITH. A.M.. Inspe'stor of Bchools. Colohetter Co., N. 8. 
 " Lewis' ' How to Read.' '>.omes In sood timn Tn n^ t^^^^^u «# 
 
 U S. M0R8K. M.A.. Insfector Sohoo!*, AnnapolU Co, N. B. 
 
 cuUy maatar the rules and principles thwelDTwntlSfled. 
 
 J. D. McGILLIVBAY, Inspector of Schools. Co. Hanta 
 
 ^>.^^'!'*M'°f°r'V'° ®**^'' *« "^o »>«8* <lrlll book in elocution for 
 jch^l^use that I have ««n. I have r«ad it over with a^at deal 
 
 O. T. ANDREWS, Inspector for Qneen's Co., N, 8. 
 "I have exaniined 'How to Read,' ,ad have no hAii<t»Mnn i« 
 pronouncing It the best little work on olocutioL fo^towhei thlt 
 !iM yet come under my notice. A thorough drU) in tht^exereiges 
 with due attent on to the elementary sounds of the iLSe as' 
 mustruted by the author, and an intelligent ooncepttor^ thS 
 f^vlP.1*" *°d «u«BeBt.on8 therein given will insure pleasinJ and 
 expressive reading. It cannot but be hailed with Dleasura Ht «v^^J 
 Jhr?,«' "^*' JuPPHes a want long felt in ouTs^SL. and fc to 
 irta^do'^cleice/'-^^'"' °' reading its due prominence, as Kau 
 
 A. C. A. DOANE, Inspector of SchooU, Bhelbtinie Co N S 
 " How to Bead,' Is just what Is needed, both as a sch^l cla!a« 
 
 book and an aid to teachers in the proper teainlng of prnU^ 1,? th! 
 
 principles of effective reading. -****«« oi pmua m tiie 
 
 Rev. JOHN AMBROSE, M.A., Inspector P. Schools, Digby N a 
 
 It i?thTK°-f^vf^? ^\^;°r^^*^ I^kwis.-" This book, for the sl^e of 
 It, U the best by far that I have euer seen on the subject." 
 
 W. L. DANAQ.'I, Inspector for Cumberload, N. 5. 
 
 "How to Read Is a seasonable publication. As a drill book for 
 
 expressive reading It supplies a cfesideratum Ir our sc1k>o18 u 
 
 must be admitted that Setter teaching c.n tois Cnch Katlv 
 
 anth^" ''°"' "^"'^ "^ *°*^ ^" ^«^y cSdltobleTo the 
 
 JOHN T. ' miM, Broad Cove, Cape Breton, J?. B. 
 " The plan pursued in the arrangeTaenta of the woik. common 
 ^^ Z\\^ elemento essential to correct vocali*aSoS«Ld^SSto« 
 grailually on to jrmciplea and practice In some of t& pnrestMmf 
 of the language muat commend itself to every admlwrof cW 
 
 Sf^ff^l''^ ^H"I"^^ i^'^^«- '^^^ tyPOf^-raphic^get^vSf 2ei^' 
 It hijjhiy creditable to the eoterprising publiahe^^- 
 
4 
 
 BEATTY ft CLARE'S lOOK-KEEPING. 
 
 ATriatub on SmoLiAWD DouiiLi Ent»» Book KE«HNO.roR tti 
 
 IN IIiOH AMD Public Schools. 
 Bv S a Bbattt. PHnciptl Onttrio Cominerci«l Colle|«. Belleville »n^ 
 ' Samuil Clarb, Bcxik-Keeplnfand Writtnf Mait*r, 
 Normal School, Toronto. 
 
 Srd Ed., PRICE. 
 
 70 CENTS. 
 
 Author atd by «'«' MtnUUr of EdueaHen. Ontario. 
 AuthoHMed by the Chief Supi. EduoaUon, Manitoba. 
 i«oomin!rrui«a by the douncil of Public Inetructiofi. QuebM. 
 
 FROM NOVA SCOTIA AND MANITOBA. 
 
 A. C. A. DOANE, In•^ P. Schoolt, Shelb me Co.. Nov* SootU. 
 "I have carefully looked over Be«tty & C 4re'« Bookkeeping. »nd 
 cannot but aitmire the .implicity of the outline, t - practical bearing of 
 the transactions, the perspicuity of the instructions, and ihe varied com- 
 mercial character of the whole work. It commends itself to teacher* as 
 a text book and to all otbera dMiroM of acquiring a knowledge 01 this 
 important biancb." 
 
 J. D. McGILLIVRAY, Inap. SchooU. Co. Hants.. Nova ScotU. 
 
 Braty ft Clark's Bookeesmho.-" Besides looking ovrr this book 
 mvself, I have submitted it to the inspection of practical bookkeeper* who 
 »L;ree with me in he propriety of recommending it as a schtjl booL 
 Its directions are minute and to the point, and ita examples ample. 
 
 C. T. ANDREWS, Inipector for Queen't Co., Nova Scotia. 
 " Bhatty & Clare's Bookkf.epino has had a careful perusal, 
 with which thr; principles of bookkeeping are explained and illustrated, 
 will recommend this work to any teacher or pupil preparing for examina- 
 lion, while it is sufficiently comprehensive for all practical purposes. 
 
 L. S. MORSE, UJi., Insp. Schools, Annapolis Co., Nov» ''>cotl*. 
 " I have examined Beatty & Clare's Bookkeeping and find it :o be an 
 excellent work. The definitions, forms, and transactions therein con- 
 tained, are plain and simple, yet compi jhensive and pracUcal. It u well 
 adapted for use In th« pobllc schools. 
 
 U. H. SMITH, A-M., Inap. Schools, Colchester County, Nova Scotia. 
 " Beatty ft Clare's Bookkeeping Is an admirable work, its simplicity 
 alone is sufficient to secure for the book a place In our schools throughout 
 the Dominion." 
 
 W. S. DANAGH, Inspector for Cnmberland, N. S. 
 « I have looked into Beatty ft Clare's Bookkeeping, and have much 
 oieasure In saying that the work is just what is wanted for boys whodesire 
 to acquire in a short time snch knowledge as will fit them for business' 
 
 REV. JOHN AMBROSE, M.A., Snpt. of SchooU, Dlgby, N. S. 
 '• I am very much pleaaed with the simplicity and thoroughhess of 
 Beatty & Clare's Bookkeepinf. 
 
 THOS. HART, M.A., Winnipeg. 
 •* Several months ago v r introduced Mason's Enc'Ish Grammar into 
 Manitoba College, and n«. we are introducing Beatty & Clare's Book- 
 kscpir^. We fioi'. tbMB ji what «• »Md in toeir respective subjects ' 
 
JILfR & CO,'S mE OF BUNKS, 
 
 t'l- 
 
 
 
 
 J.^1^ 
 
 rt-' 
 
 Used in Nearly all the principal High and 
 Public Schools of Canada. 
 
 Hughes' Composition Blanks, No. 1-lOc. 
 ;; " " 2-lOc. 
 
 3-20C. 
 Canadian Spelling Blanks, No. 1-lOc. 
 
 r^ \ . " 3-lOc. 
 
 Dr. Davies' Grammar Blanks, No. 1-lOc. 
 
 2-lOc. 
 3-15C. 
 4-15C. 
 
 it 
 
 If 
 
 « 
 
 u 
 
 FROM NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 J. D. McGILLTVRAY, Inspector. Hunt Co., Nova Scotia. 
 "I Imve looked over carefully your Spelling Blanks. Grammar 
 hlunUs and Composition Blanks, and consider tliom excelled" No 
 sclmol ctn be regarded as fully equipped which is witWthem 
 
 our'Shl'?s%i&..? ""^' "^'^ ^'''''^'' ^-^'^ *^« atril^^f 
 
 / . C. A. DOANE, Inspector of Schools, Shelbume Co., N. 8. 
 
 " The Fxarcise Books are well arranged, of convenient sire and 
 8ef..n suitab y adapted for use in all onr Rchools As helps to 
 correct spelling careful writing, and proper analysis and constJuo^ 
 tiuii sentences they are really invaluable/' 'ibwuo- 
 
 W. S. DARRAGH. MJL., Insp. P. S., Cumberland Co., Nova Scotia. 
 8PEI.I-INO Blanks and Hughes' Composition Books — " I hava 
 examined them with much pleasure. It is highi but certalnlv no? 
 oxaggeratedpraise.tosaythat the books arefnVo"nt of pra/tica' 
 utility unrivalled. I have perfect confidence & recon^enS 
 them to the teachers of our widely extended country. * 
 
 D. H. SMITH, KU., Insp. Colchester County. Nova Scotia, 
 lend to inculcate a taate of neatnesH aid care in their work," '